TopPage

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXM264/S1E

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM

MX-M264U/M264N
MX-M314U/M314N
MODEL MX-M354U/M354N
CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

[7] TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

[14] TOOL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.

This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING [6] SIMULATION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. General and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 2. Starting the simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 3. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii 4. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii [7] TROUBLESHOOTING
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the developing unit . . . iii 1. Error code and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii 2. JAM and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
8. Relation between model names and names 3. Image send communication report code . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
in the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
4. Dial tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE
1. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2. Option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
[9] MAINTENANCE
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
2. Copy functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2. Other related items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
3. Printer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
4. FAX function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
1. Process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
5. Image send function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2. Developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
6. Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
3. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
7. Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
4. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
5. Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
6. Side door unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
7. 1st paper exit unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
3. Developer/Drum life end definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
8. Laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
9. Power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
5. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
10. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 11. Ozone filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 12. Transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 13. Operation section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
3. Automatic document feeder and document glass . . . . 4-3 14. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
4. I/F connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
5. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
1. HDD/SD card memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
6. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB,
7. Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 HDD and the SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
8. Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 3. HDD/SD card SIM format operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
9. Solenoid/Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE
10. Drive motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
11. Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
2. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12. Fan/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION
13. PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
14. Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
2. Power line diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
3. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
4. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[14] TOOL LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

 Symbols in this manual
The lists of symbols used in this manual are shown below.
The meaning of each symbol described in the table must be understood for proper servicing.

1. Symbols used for notes and Symbol Meaning

OK/GOOD Indicates a correct
cautions procedure or result in an
adjustment, etc.
Symbol Meaning
NO GOOD Indicates a wrong
CAUTION Indicates a general
procedure or result in an
caution item.
adjustment, etc.

NOTE Indicates a note.

HIGH TEMP Be careful of a high
temperature in the IMPORTANT Indicates an important
fusing section. item.

REFER Indicates a reference

page, etc.
HIGH VOLTAGE Be careful of an electric
shock where a high NEW Indicates a new
voltage is applied such technology, a new
as the high voltage method, or a new item.
PWB, the main charger, EXAMPLE Indicates a description
and the process section. using an example.
DANGER Indicates danger.

2. Symbols used in the work

HANDLE WITH Indicates a part which
contents
CARE requires special care for
handling such as the Symbol Meaning (Work content)
HDD, and the LSU. Adhesion Indicates that a seal, etc.
INHIBIT Indicates inhibit. is attached.

Adjustment Indicates an adjustment.

NO Be careful to keep away

ELECTROSTATIC from static electricity.
CHARGE (PWB's and electric Measure a Indicates that a
parts) dimension or a dimension or a length is
NO DUST, Be careful not to touch size. measured.
FINGER PRINT, directly, such as the
DIRT, SCRATCH optical section, the Apply grease Indicates that grease is
photoconductor, and the to be applied.
DV roller.
Also be careful not to
Apply conductive Indicates conductive
scratch.
grease grease is applied
NO SCRATCH

Cleaning Indicates clean with a

(Dry) dry cloth.
NO LIGHT Be careful not to expose
to light, such as the
photoconductor, and the Cleaning Indicates clean with a
test chart. (Wet) cloth dampened with
NO SOLVENT Be careful not to use a water.
solvent in cleaning, etc. Cleaning Indicates clean with
(Alcohol) alcohol.

NO DISASSEMLE Do not disassemble.

Not serviceable. Cleaning Indicates cleaning is
Example CCD unit. (Blower) done with a blower/
brush.

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

 Symbol Meaning (Work content) Symbol Meaning (Work content)
Cleaning Indicates that cleaning is Engage the pawl.
(Vacuum) performed with a
vacuum cleaner.

Cleaning Indicates that cleaning is Screw lock Indicates that a screw is

(Brush) performed with a brush. secured with adhesive.

Oil Indicates that oil is Unlock

applied to lubricate.

Apply powder. Indicates that setting Turn OFF the

power is applied to the power.
photoconductor drum,
the transfer belt, etc.
Replace Indicates that a part is Disconnect the
replaced. power plug.

Check Indicates that a check

(replacement,
adjustment, cleaning) is
3. Symbols used for kinds of parts
performed.
Cut Indicates that cutting is Symbol Meaning (Kinds of parts)
performed. Maintenance Indicates a part which is
part replaced in a maintenance
procedure.
Loosen Indicates that a screw is
loosened. Consumable Indicates a consumable
part part such as a
photoconductor,
Connect Indicates that a developer, a transfer belt,
connector is connected. etc.
Waste part Indicates a waste part
which is consumed but
Disconnect Indicates that a
excluded from the above
connector is
consumable parts. (A
disconnected.
roller, a seal, etc.)
Remove a Indicates that a harness Unit part Indicates a part which is
harness. is unsecured. designated as a unit.

Included part Indicates a part which is

Attach a harness. Indicates that a harness included in the package
is secured.

Remove a clamp.
4. Symbols used for additional
descriptions
Attach a clamp.
Symbol Meaning
View from the Indicates from which
top angle the drawing is
Release a hook. Indicates that a hook is viewed.
View from the
released.
bottom

View from the

Fix a hook. Indicates that a hook is
front
fixed.
View from the
back
Disengage the
pawl.

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

 NOTE
MX-M264U
FOR SERVICING It may cause
Service an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
Manual
• Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.
* About a main unit illustration, it may differ from a target model.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not stress, forc-
ibly bend, or pull the power cord.
1. Precautions for servicing It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
• When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the • Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
when performing the communication test, etc.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
• Do not place liquids or foreign metallic objects inside the
• There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use machine.
extreme care when servicing.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
It may cause a burn.
• Do not touch the power cord, insert the phone jack, operate the
• There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may machine, or perform service on the machine with wet or oily
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing. hands.
• Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective It may cause an electric shock.
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. 3. Note for installing site
• When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to
Do not install the machine at the following sites.
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other
driving sections. • Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature,
low humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature
• Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.
and humidity.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside
Paper may get damp and form condensation inside the machine,
the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury.
causing paper jam or copy dirt.
• When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink exces-
For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
sively. Do not get them in the eyes.
described later.
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
• The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to dam-
age fingers when servicing.
• Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner
may ignite and burn you.
• When replacing a lithium battery on a PWB, only use the speci-
fied replacement battery.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may cause a • Place of extreme vibrations
machine malfunction or breakdown. It may cause a breakdown.
• When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to it,
be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may otherwise cause a machine breakdown or malfunction.

CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
(200V series only)

2. Warning for servicing

• Poorly ventilated place
• Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone.
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so as
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of such a
shock.
machine may produce an ozone smell. Install the machine in a
It may cause a fire or an electric shock. well ventilated place.
• If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
• Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may result.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,
grounding must be made.
• When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the fol-
lowing points.
 Gas tube
 Lightning conductor
 A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
grounding object by the authorities.
 Grounding wire for telephone line

MX-M264U NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 • Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may parts
undergo qualitative change.
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
It may cause a breakdown or output quality problems.
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
• When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or an
anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.

• Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier and blue
print machine may result in poor quality output.
• When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag (case),
use an earth band as shown below:
• Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the machine.

• Place of much dust

When dust or contaminants enters the machine, it may cause a
breakdown or poor quality output.

• Place near a wall

The machine will require ventilation.
If ventilation is not proper, poor output or machine failure may
result.

11-13/16" • When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the

(30cm) procedure on an anti-static mat.

11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)

• Unstable or irregular surface

If the machine is dropped or tips over, it may cause injury or
machine malfunction.
Use an optional desk or an exclusive-use desk.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and lock
the casters.

MX-M264U NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU Screw kinds and tightening torques

When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
items.
Tightening Tightening Tightening
• When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
power plug from the power outlet. (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
• When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
described in this Service Manual. M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
• When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
the parts including the cover installed and perform the operation Tapping screws (for iron)
check.
• Do not modify the LSU. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
• When visually checking the inside of the machine for the opera- torque torque torque
diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
tion check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes.
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
If the above precaution is neglected or the LSU is modified, ones (Plate thickness
safety may be at risk. 0.8mm or above)
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the (Plate thickness
0.8mm or above)
developing unit M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
When handling the OPC drum unit, and the developing unit, strictly (Plate thickness
observe the following items. less than 0.8mm)
M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the (Plate thickness
copy and print image quality. less than 0.8mm)
Drum unit
Tapping screw (for plastic)
• Avoid working at a place with strong lights.
• Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights for Tightening Tightening Tightening
a long time. Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
• When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it with (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 sheets M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
of paper to cover it.) M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
• Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the OPC drum surface.
Developing unit 8. Relation between model names and
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign names in the manual
material on the developing unit.
Fusing unit
Model name Name in the manual
• Be careful not to "leave" fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign MX-M264U/MX-M264N 26cpm machine
material on the fusing roller. MX-M314U/MX-M314N 31cpm machine
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the MX-M354U/MX-M354N 35cpm machine
copy and print image quality.

7. Screw tightening torque

The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three
types.
These types are classified according to the shape of the screw
grooves and use positions.
The table below shows the types of the screws and the tightening
torques depending on the use position.
When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
table.
However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than speci-
fied on this table, or under special circumstances, the details are
described on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such
an exception.
CAUTION: Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is
an electrode or a current flows, use enough care to
tighten securely to avoid loosening.

MX-M264U NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 [1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
MX-M264U
Service Manual

1. System configuration
MX-RP15 MX-VR11
REVERSING SINGLE PASS DOCUMENT COVER
FEEDER

MX-M264U/M314U/M354U
MX-TR11 MX-M264N/M314N/M354N
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
JOB SEPARATOR
SYSTEM

MX-TE10
EXIT TRAY UNIT

MX-FN23
FINISHER

MX-DE17 MX-DE18
500 SHEET PAPER 2x500 SHEET PAPER MX-DS17
DRAWER DRAWER
HIGH STAND

MX-DS16
LOW STAND

MX-PB15 MX-PK11 MX-PF10 MX-NSX1 MX-FX11 MX-FWX1

PRINTER EXPANSION KIT PS3 EXPANSION KIT BARCODE FONT KIT NETWORK SCANNER FACSIMILE EXPANSION INTERNET FAX EXPANSION
EXPANSION KIT KIT KIT

AR-SU1 MX-FR37U MX-USX1 MX-USX5 MX-US10 MX-US50

STAMP UNIT DATA SECURITY KIT SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE
KIT KIT KIT KIT

MX-USA0 MX-UN01A MX-UN05A MX-UN10A MX-UN50A MX-UN1HA

SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE Sharp OSA Network Scanner Sharp OSA Network Scanner Sharp OSA Network Scanner Sharp OSA Network Scanner Sharp OSA Network Scanner
KIT Tool 1 License Kit Tool 5 License Kit Tool 10 License Kit Tool 50 License Kit Tool 100 License Kit

MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-SCX1 AR-SV1 MX-HD12

APPLICATION APPLICATION EXTERNAL ACCOUNT STAPLE CARTRIDGE STAMP CARTRIDGE HARD DISK EXPANSION KIT
INTEGRATION MODULE COMMUNICATION MODULE MODULE

MX-KB14
KEYBOARD

MX-M264U PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2. Option list
MX-M264U MX-M264N
Model name Name MX-M314U MX-M314N Remarks
MX-M354U MX-M354N
Document feed system MX-RP15 REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER OPT STD
MX-VR11 DOCUMENT COVER OPT ---
Paper feed system MX-DE17 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
MX-DE18 2x500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
MX-DS16 LOW STAND OPT OPT
MX-DS17 HIGH STAND OPT OPT
Paper exit system MX-TE10 EXIT TRAY UNIT OPT OPT *1
MX-TR11 JOB SEPARATOR OPT OPT *2
MX-FN23 FINISHER OPT OPT *3
Printer expansion MX-PB15 PRINTER EXPANSION KIT OPT STD
MX-PK11 PS3 EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT *4
MX-PF10 BARCODE FONT KIT OPT OPT *4
Image send expansion MX-NSX1 NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT OPT STD
MX-FX11 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT
MX-FWX1 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT *5
AR-SU1 STAMP UNIT OPT OPT
Authentication/Security MX-FR37U DATA SECURITY KIT OPT OPT *5
Application/Solution MX-USX1 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-USX5 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-US10 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-US50 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-USA0 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-UN01A Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 1 License Kit OPT OPT *6
MX-UN05A Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 5 License Kit OPT OPT *6
MX-UN10A Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 10 License Kit OPT OPT *6
MX-UN50A Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 50 License Kit OPT OPT *6
MX-UN1HA Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 100 License Kit OPT OPT *6
MX-AMX1 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE OPT OPT *5
MX-AMX2 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE OPT OPT *5
MX-AMX3 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE OPT OPT *5
Service MX-SCX1 STAPLE CARTRIDGE OPT OPT
AR-SV1 STAMP CARTRIDGE OPT OPT
Other MX-HD12 HARD DISK EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT
MX-KB14 KEYBOARD OPT OPT

STD: Standard equipment

OPT: Installable option
*1: The FINISHER is required.
*2: Cannot be installed the EXIT TRAY UNIT and the FINISHER concurrently.
*3: Cannot be installed the JOB SEPARATOR concurrently.
*4: PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is required.
*5: HARD DISK EXPANSION KIT is required.
*6: APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE is required.

MX-M264U PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 [2] SPECIFICATIONS
MX-M264U D. EngineManual
Service resolution
Resolution*1 Copy Writing
1. Basic specifications 600 x 600dpi
Print Writing
A. Engine Specification 600 x 600dpi
1,200 x 600dpi (PCL/PS)
Photo conductor OPC (Diameter: 30mm) Gradation *2 Copy Writing
Recording Electronic photo (Laser) (256 levels) 600 x 600dpi x 1bit
Development Dry-type dual-component magnetic Print Writing
brush development Sharp Advanced Printing Language:
Charging Charged saw-tooth method 600 x 600dpi x 1bit
Transfer Transfer roller PCL:
Separation Separation claw method 600 x 600dpi x 1bit
1,200 x 600dpi x 1bit
Cleaning Counter blade
PS:
Fusing Heat roller
600 x 600dpi x 1bit
Waste toner disposal Toner cartridge collection 1,200 x 600dpi x 1bit
Toner supply during operation N/A
Outer color Pastel white (Natural wave pattern) *1: Resolustion: 600dpi (default)
*2: The dither and error diffusion methods using 8bit input will be
B. Engine speed (ppm) performed.
Tray 1 - 4
E. Scanner section
26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
Paper size
machine machine machine
(1) Resolution/Gradation
A3 15 17 20
Scanning Monochrome
11" x 17" 14 17 19
Resolution (dpi) Platen 600 x 600dpi
8K 16 19 21
600 x 400dpi
B4, 8.5" x 13" 16 20 22 600 x 300dpi (default)
8.5" x 14" 16 20 22 RSPF 600 x 600dpi
A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 5.5" x 8.5", 16K, A5 26 31 35 600 x 400dpi (default)
(B5 cannot be applied to the 2-stage Exposure lamp White LED
paper feed tray.)
Reading gradation 10bit
A4R, 16KR, 8.5" x 11"R, 18 24 27
Output gradation BW: 1bit
B5R 21 24 30 Grayscale: 8bit
Full Color: each color RGB 8bit
Manual paper feed
26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
(2) Document table
Paper size
machine machine machine
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)
A3 14 17 18
Scanning area 297 x 432mm
11" x 17" 14 16 17
Original standard Left rear reference
8K 15 18 19
position
B4 16 19 20
Detection Yes
8.5" x 13" 17 20 22
Detection size Automatic detection (Detection types can be
8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 13.4" 16 19 21
changed in the system settings)
8.5" x 14" 16 19 20
Dehumidifying Supplied as a service parts
A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 5.5" x 8.5", 16K, A5 23 27 29 heater
A4R, 8.5" x 11"R, 19 22 24 (Scanner section)
B5R 21 24 26
A6R 23 27 29 F. Document feeder
Extra 14 16 17
Custom 14 16 17 Type RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)
Scan speed Monochrome Color (A4/8.5" x 11")
C. Printable area (A4/8.5" x 11")
Copy Single: NA
A3 Wide N/A 16K 187 x 262mm 50-sheet/min.
A3 289 x 412mm 12 x 18 N/A (600 x 400dpi, 4bit)
B4 242 x 356mm 11" x 17" 271 x 424mm 36-sheet/min.
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
A4 202 x 289mm 8.5" x 14" 208 x 348mm
Double:
B5 168 x 249mm 8.5" x 13" 208 x 322mm
20-page/min.
A5 140 x 202mm Executive 183 x 259mm (600 x 400dpi, 4bit)
A6R 92 x 140mm 8.5" x 11" 208 x 271mm 17-page/min.
8K 262 x 382mm 5.5" x 8.5" 132 x 208mm (600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
8.5" x 13.5" 212 x 336mm 8.5" x 13.4" 212 x 333mm FAX Single: 50-sheet/min. NA
Custom Min.: 96mm x 141mm; Max.: 297mm x 432mm (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 20-page/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Max. range AB system: 416 x 293mm
Internet FAX Single: 50-sheet/min. NA
(When the resolution is 600dpi: 9826dot x 6920dot)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Inch system: 428 x 275mm
Double: 20-page/min.
(When the resolution is 600dpi: 10110dot x 6496dot)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Void Area / Top: 4mm or less
Image Loss Bottom: 4mm or less
FR total: 6mm or less

MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Scanner Single: 50-sheet/min. Single: 50-sheet/min. Reliability MCBJ/MCBF: Same as the main unit
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit) Life Same as the main unit
Double: 20-page/min. Double: 20-page/min. Power Source Provided from the main unit
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit) Dimensions W 580 x D 465 x H 155 mm, W 22-54/64 x D 18-20/
Original setup Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard) 64 x H 6-7/64 in.
direction Weight Approx. 7.3kg, Approx. 16.1 lbs
Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for Outer color Warm gray/ Pastel white (2 toned color)
position random feeding)
Optional detection Auto detection supported
Original transport Sheet-through method
Installation / Should be installed by the service technician easily
method
Maintenance
Original size Standard size
Packaged items Glass cleaner (must be storable in the RSPF)
Inch-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4 G. Paper feed section
Inch-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4 (1) Basic specifications
Inch-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11",
8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4 Type Standard 2-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed
AB-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, tray
A4R, B5, B5R, A5 Full option 4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed
AB-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, tray
A4R, B5, B5R, A5 Dehumidifying N/A
AB-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, heater
A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
AB-4: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5 Multi
Tray Tray 1 Tray 2
AB-5: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, Bypass Tray
A4R, B5, B5R, A5 Paper Standard 500 sheets 500 sheets 100 sheets
Long 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only) capacity paper
paper Internet Fax 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm. (80g/m2)
When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper Paper size Refer to “Size of paper which can be fed”.
is not available. Paper size detection No Yes
Mix paper feed Enabled (Guide adjustment and size input)
(Same series, Paper type setting Refer to “Size of paper which can be fed”.
same width paper) Changing of paper Switched by the user Switched by
Random feeding Enabled size the user
(feeding of different Only the following combinations of 2 size types are (Guide
types / different allowed: adjustment)
widths) A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; B5 and A5; Universal handle Yes ---
and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available. 2-sided Default Inch 8.5" x 11" ---
scanning is disabled during random feeding. paper system
Original copy Single: size AB A4 ---
weight Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2) setting system
Plain paper: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Detection of N/A (Only paper availability is detected)
* Thin paper mode (39 pages/minute
remaining paper
(A4, 8.5" x 11", 600 x 400dpi) / 26 pages/minute
Paper size display Yes ---
(A4, 8.5" x 11", 600 x 600dpi) is set up for the thin
window
paper.
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)
(2) Extra paper capacity
Max. loading Max. 100 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max.
capacity of height: 1/2 inch, 13mm or less
Paper type Paper feed tray Manual feed tray
documents
Envelope NA AB system: 10 sheets
Un-acceptable Transparency, second original paper, tracing paper,
Inch system: 5 sheets
originals for carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles,
Transparency NA 40 sheets
feeding. folds, or breakage, pasted paper, cutout document,
document printed with ink ribbon, documents with Heavy paper NA 30 sheets (Max. 200g/m2)
perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated Tab paper NA 30 sheets (Target)
document by punch unit is allowed.) Others NA 1 sheet
Detection Yes
Paper detection Auto detection
size Inch-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11",
8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
AB-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
AB-4: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-5: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Paper feeding Right hand feeding
direction
Finish stamp Option

MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 2
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (3) Size of paper which can be fed

Paper Feeding Section

Bypass
Standard Tray Optional Tray
Tray
Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4
Paper Size 12 x 18 (A3W) — — — — —
11" x 17" Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 14" (216 x 356) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 13.5" (216 x 343) Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5
8.5" x 13.4" (216 x 340) Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5
8.5" x 13" (216 x 330) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 11" Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 11"R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
7.25 x 10.5R — — — — Yes
5.5" x 8.5" Yes — — — Yes
5.5" x 8.5"R — — — — Yes
A3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5 Yes — Yes Yes Yes
B5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A5R — — — — Yes
A5 Yes — — — Yes
B6R — — — — Yes
8K Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
16K Yes — Yes Yes Yes
16KR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A6R — — — — Yes
Envelope*1 — — — — Yes
Custom*2 — — — — Yes
Paper Type Thin paper 13 - 16 lb bond (56 - 59g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Plain paper 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre-printed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre-punched Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 200g/m2) — — — — Yes
110 lb index - 140 lb index (201 - 256g/m2) — — — — —
Envelope 75-90g/m2 — — — — Yes
Transparency — — — — Yes
Label*3 — — — — Yes
Tab paper*4 — — — — Yes
User settings 1-7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

*1: Supported envelop types:

Monarch/Com-10/DL/C5/Custom
* Custom envelope size is configurable by Sim setting (default: hidden)
*2: Custom size

AB system (mm) Inch system (inch)

Min. Max. Min. Max.
Bypass tray X 140 432 5-1/2 17
Y 100 297 5-1/2 11-5/8

Long size paper from the bypass tray: max. 1,200mm is configurable by Sim.
*3: Supported label paper: SF-4A3F
*4: Supported tab paper:
A4 tab width: 12 - 20mm
8.5" x 11" tab width: 6.1 - 17mm
*5: Need to set from Sim

MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 3
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 H. Paper exit section
(1) Exit Capacity

Output Location Center Job Separator Right Side (Option)

Output Method Face down
Output Capacity 500 sheets (80g/m2) Upper tray: 100 sheets (80g/m2) 100 sheets (80g/m2)
Lower tray: 500 sheets (80g/m2)
Output paper size / weight Refer to “Size of paper which can be discharged”.
Shifting function Yes No
Output paper detection Yes No
Exit tray full detection No Yes

(2) Shifter

Type Shifter
Paper size Non-offset (Normal output) Refer to “Size of paper which can be discharged”.
Offset mode Refer to “Size of paper which can be discharged”.
Paper weight All usable paper
Productivity Non-offset (Normal output) Same speed as the main unit (no speed loss)
* When A4/8.5" x 11" is used Offset mode Same speed as the main unit (no speed loss)
Offset range 30mm
Range of error Horizontal direction Vertical direction Between jobs
* When the recommended paper of Non-offset Not drop from the tray — —
A4/8.5" x 11" is used Offset mode Within 50 mm Within 10mm 10mm or more

(3) Size of paper which can be discharged

Output Section
Center Tray
Duplex Right Exit
Job
Exit Tray Offset Tray
Separator
Paper Size 12 x 18 (A3W) — — — — —
11" x 17" Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 14" (216 x 356) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 13.5" (216 x 343) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 13.4" (216 x 340) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 13" (216 x 330) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 11" Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 11"R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
7.25 x 10.5R — Yes Yes Yes —
5.5" x 8.5" — Yes Yes Yes —
5.5" x 8.5"R — — — — —
A3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A5R — Yes — Yes —
A5 Yes Yes Yes Yes —
B6R — Yes — — —
8K Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
16K Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
16KR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A6R — Yes Yes Yes —
Envelope*1 — Yes Yes — —
Extra — Yes Yes — —
Custom*2 Yes Yes Yes — Yes

MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 4
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Output Section
Center Tray
Duplex Right Exit
Job
Exit Tray Offset Tray
Separator
Paper Type Thin paper 13-16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2) — Yes Yes Yes Yes
Plain paper 16-28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre-printed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre-punched Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 28 lb bond - 110 lb index — Yes Yes Yes —
(106 - 200g/m2)
110 lb index -140 lb index — — — — —
(201 - 256g/m2)
Envelope 75 - 90g/m2 — Yes Yes — —
Transparency — Yes Yes — —
Label — Yes Yes — —
Tab paper — Yes Yes — —
User settings 1 - 7 Yes*3 Yes Yes Yes Yes

*1: Supported Envelop types:

Monarch/Com-10/DL /C5/Custom
Custom envelope size is supported by Sim. Not displayed at the default setting.
*2: Custom size

AB System (mm) Inch System (inch)

Min. Max. Min. Max.
Bypass tray X 140 432 5-1/2 17
Y 100 297 5-1/2 11-5/8
Duplex X 182 432 8-1/2 17
Y 182 297 7-1/4 11-5/8

Long size paper (bypass tray only): support up to 1,200mm by Sim

* Long size paper ejection is from center tray/inner finisher
*3: Comply to “Paper type setting”
*4: Can be input but array is not supported
*5: Can be input and stapled but array is not supported
*6: Array of heavy paper more than 130g/m2 is not supported
*7: Heavy paper can be stapled only in case of using as front and back cover page with other normal paper

MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 5
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 I. Operation panel 2. Copy functions
Size 7 inch A. First copy time
Form Dot matrix LCD, Touch panel
26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
Display dot number 800 x 480 dots (WVGA) Engine
machine machine machine
Color Yes
Platen 4.7 sec. 4.3 sec. 4.0 sec.
LCD drive display area (W x D) 152.4 x 91.44
RSPF 7.5 sec. 6.9 sec. 6.5 sec.
LCD backlight LED backlight
LCD contrast adjust Yes * Measuring Conditions
Angle/position adjustment No tilting mechanism
Feed the A4 (8-1/2 x 11) sheet in landscape from tray 1, with the
polygon rotating condition.
J. Controller board
Value might vary depends on the machine settings/conditions
CPU ARM11: 600MHz
ARM9: 400MHz/during 1W energy save mode: 75MHz
B. Job Speed
Interface
26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
IEEE1284 No Engine
machine machine machine
Parallel
S to S 26cpm (100%) 31cpm (100%) 35cpm (100%)
Ethernet 1port
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T * Defines the copy speed of when the main unit and a document
Support TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, EtherTalk feeder are used in combination.
Protocol
* S to S: copying 1 set of an 11-sheet original in A4 / 8.5" x 11"
USB 2.0 (high 2port
speed) (host)*1 (Simultaneous use of the front/rear ports is enable.)
(not including the first copy)
USB 2.0 (high 1port Monochrome: 600 x 400dpi (default)
speed) (device)
USB-HUB (host) Internal: 4port
C. Job Effectiveness
• For Front USB Port BLI Standard (RSPF)
• For Rear USB Port
• Reserved 26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
Engine
• For the retractable keyboard machine machine machine
USB certification No S to S 25cpm (96.2%) 28cpm (90.3%) 33cpm (94.3%)
ACRE expansion No S to D 21cpm (80.8%) 23cpm (74.2%) 24cpm (68.6%)
I/F D to D 20cpm (76.9%) 22cpm (71.0%) 23cpm (65.7%)
Ir-Simple I/F No
Video I/F No * S to S: 10 pages of A4 / 8.5" x 11" document and 5 copies
Serial I/F 1port * S to D: 10 pages of A4 / 8.5" x 11" document and 5 copies
(For coin- (The port is on the electric board. D-Sub cable is * D to D: 10 pages (20 sides) of A4 / 8.5" x 11" document and
operated provided as a service part.) 5 copies
machines/PCI)
Memory See the section “Memory/Hard disk/SD card memory”.
Windows No
Premium Logo
certification
WHQL Yes
certification

*1: The USB port can be disabled by Sim

K. Memory/Hard disk/SD card memory

ICU (Reus) PWB
SD card HDD*2
Memory*1
8GB 2GB OPT (160GB)

*1: Memory expansion is not available

*2: HDD capacity depends on the procurement and sourcing status
When an option HDD is installed, the SD card of 4GB is
required.

Memory area Boot/Program area

(SD card) FAX data storage area
Without HDD With HDD
512MB 1GB

L. Warm-up time
Warm-up time 20sec. or less
Pre heat Yes
Jam recovery time*1 10sec. or less

* Result may change depending on conditions.

*1: Conditions: Leave the machine for 60 sec. after door open,
standard condition, Polygon stops.

MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 6
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3. Printer function
A. Printer driver supported OS
Sharp
Custom
Custom Advanced
OS PCL6 Custom PS PPD PC-FAX TWAIN
PCL5e Printing
SPDL2
Language
Windows 98 / Me No No No No No No No
NT 4.0 SP5 or later No No No No No No No
2000 No No No No No No No
XP CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
XP x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2003 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2003 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Mac 9.0-9.2.2 No No No No No No No
X 10.2.8 No No No No No No No
X 10.3.9 No No No No No No No
X 10.4.11 No No No CD-ROM No No No
X 10.5 - 10.5.8 No No No CD-ROM No Web No
X 10.6 - 10.6.8 No No No CD-ROM No Web No
X 10.7 - 10.7.2 No No No CD-ROM No Web No

B. PDL emulation/Font
PDL (Command) Installed font Option font
PCL6 compatibility N model: STD European outline font = 80 styles Barcode font = 28 styles
U model: OPT Line printer font (BMP) = 1 style
Postscript3 compatibility OPT - European outline font = 136 styles

4. FAX function D. Image Quality/Image Process

A. Transmission method Half tone reproduction Equivalent to 256 levels (Valid only when
monochrome document is scanned.)
Transmission time Less than 3 sec (Super G3) Exposure adjustment Auto / Manual (5 steps)
Less than 7 sec (G3 ECM) FAX quality selection Standard (8 x 3.85 lines/mm (203.2 x 97.8dpi))
Compression/ MH, MR, MMR, JBIG Fine (8 x 7.7 lines/mm (203.2 x 195.6dpi))
expansion system (Fixed to ECM for MMR or JBIG.) Super Fine (8 x 15.4 lines/mm (203.2 x 391dpi))
Modem speed 33.6kbps  2.4kbps automatic fallback Ultra Fine (16 x 15.4 lines/mm (406.4 x 391dpi))
Resolution 8 x 3.85 line/mm, 8 x 7.7 line/mm, Half-tone (Combination with normal character is
8.15.4 line/mm, 16 x 15.4 line/mm (Standard invalid.)
memory is used for transmit/receive.)
Intercommunication G3/Super G3: Standard (V.34, V.17, V.33, V.29, E. Record Size
V.27ter)
Communication line General telephone line (PSTN), ISDN (When TA Max. record width 293mm
is installed.) Private Branch Exchange (PBX) Record size (AB series)
ECM Yes A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R
(Inch series)
B. Number of Support Line 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11",
8.5" x 11"R, 8.5 x 5.5R
Standard 1 line
* If the document length exceeds A3 size, it is divided and printed.
Expansion Not provided
* For printing the list, A5R and 8.5" x 5.5"R cannot be used.
C. Transmission Mode
RSPF/OC Yes (Switching during the reading is not feasible)
transmission switching

MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 7
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 F. Dial Transmit Thin paper scan function Available except for duplex
function scan
Manual dialing To be entered by 10-key, # key, * key Edge erase transmit function Yes
Re-dialing The previous 8 items (max.) can be saved, and Only for the fixed sizes
one of them can be selected. Job build Yes
One-touch call is available. 999 sheets or memory full
One-touch dialing 1000 items including the group dialing items Page division transmit Yes
Group dialing 1000 items including the one-touch dialing Cover No
items Index No
Program dialing Max. 48 items Transmit message adding No
Chain dialing Max. 64 digits including one-touch dialing, function
10-key dialing, and pause. Receive Auto receive Yes
Dial search Alphabet order search, User index groups function Manual receive Yes
Quick search Yes DRD call function Distinctive Ring Detection
LDAP search Yes North America: Standard,
Sub address Yes Pattern 1 – 5
Password Yes Australia/New Zealand/Hong
Memory box registration Yes Kong: ON/OFF (TEL/FAX)
Memory receive Yes
* LDAP: Lightweight Directory Access protocol Transfer function Yes
Number of registration:
G. Memory for Transmit/Receive 1 item
Specified receive function Yes (Number of registration)
FAX transmission data HDD Rejection numbers: Max.50
FAX reception data SD card items
Receive data print condition Yes
H. Function function
Receive data staple setting/ Yes
Transmit Calling function Yes Copy number setting
function Requires the frequency
Rotation receive Yes
setting for each destination.
Output by clockwise rotation
PBX function Germany, France only of 90 degrees
Memory transmit Yes (Definable destinations : Divided receive Yes
94 destinations) Divided print is not made in
On-hook Yes duplex mode.
Quick online transmit Yes Duplex receive Yes
Direct transmit Yes F-code confidential receive Yes
Manual transmit Yes Special Print hold Yes
Auto re-call mode Yes function Document Admin Yes
Time indication function Yes Inbound Routing Yes
Sequential broadcasting Yes Sender registration function Yes
function Sender print function Yes
F code interface Yes On-hook dialing function Yes
broadcasting indication Only one interface station
Retransmit function Yes
function can be specified.
Pause function Yes
F code interface Yes
Pause time is 1 – 15 sec.
broadcasting function
Sound volume setting Yes
F code confidential send Yes
function
function
Tone pulse select function Tone, Pulse, Auto
Polling Yes
(North America/Taiwan)
Even with another company
* For the other destinations,
machine
set with the soft switch.
Sequential polling function Yes
External phone connection Yes
Even with another company
Memory remaining capacity Yes
machine
check function Only the integral part is
F-code polling Yes
displayed.
Bulletin board Yes
Back up Yes
F code bulletin board Yes
Registered data read/write Yes
function
function
Auto reduction transmit Yes
Report/List Yes
A3  B4, A3  A4, B4  A4
Destination check function Yes
Rotation transmit Yes
Broadcasting destination Yes
Counterclockwise rotation of
display function
90 degrees
Transmit job change function Yes
Duplex transmit Yes
Save-energy function Yes
Document transmit from OC Yes
function Line monitor display function Yes
Long length original transmit Only when RSPF is used. FAST Yes
Transmission is enable up to Facsimile Automated Service
1000mm. Technology
Mixed documents function Only when RSPF is used. Time adjust function Yes
Summer time ON/OFF
Zoom transmit Yes
PC-FAX Yes
2 in 1 transmit Yes
Color mode No
Card shot transmit Only when transmitting from
OC

MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 8
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Special Sender registration function Yes * Broadcast transmission is allowed. (Monochrome only)
function Number of registration: 1 for (5) Transmission function
standard sender name and
address. And 18 sender
Mode FAX
names can be registered.
Memory transmission 94 destinations in all
Default destination setting No
On-hook Yes
Unauthorized scan Yes
Quick online transmission Yes
prevention function
Direct transmission Yes
Filing-each-page function No
(Switching: Memory transmission
Re-operation function Yes
Direct transmission)
User account function Yes
Automatically-reduced Yes
Max. 200 items additionally
transmission
to the default
Rotated transmission Yes
Counter function Yes
Scaled transmission Yes
Enlargement/reduction is allowed
only from a fixed size to another.
Reduction may be done on the
5. Image send function receiver side with Fax/Internet Fax
sending.
A. Mode Recall mode Error Yes
Busy Yes
FAX FAX to e-mail/FTP
Number/time to be set up through
system setup
B. Image send function
Long original transmission Yes
(Push send from the main unit) Maximum of 1000mm (single side
(1) Support image only/black-white 2 values only)
Confidential transmission (Sharp No
Mode FAX mode)
Compression method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG Relay broadcast transmission No
(Sharp mode)
(2) Image processing Large capacity original mode Yes
Scanning of thin paper Yes
Mode FAX Mixed originals feeder Yes (Random + MIX)
Original scanning color B/W Default date sender transmission Yes (ON only)
Halftone reproduction Equivalent of 256 steps Preview No
Density adjustment Auto + 5 steps Side erase Yes

Selection of image quality Half tone (Black-white only) ON/OFF (6) Reception function
Resolution (depends on file Standard character (203.2 x 97.8dpi)
format/transmission method) (half tone not allowed) Mode FAX
Fine (203.2 x 195.6dpi) Automatic reception Yes
Super fine (203.2 x 391dpi) Manual reception No
Ultra fine (406.4 x 391dpi) Switching from manual reception to
automatic reception. (Allowed only
(3) Specification of Addresses for France and Japan)
Memory reception Yes
Mode FAX Fixed size reduced reception Yes
Address specification Specification by one-touch/group/ Specified size scaled reception No
direct address entry. Rotated reception Yes
Entry from 10-key. (Fax) Setting of received data print Equal size print (partition not
Selection from LDAP server condition allowed)
Number of One-touch address key Total (number of key): Equal size print (partition allowed)
registration Maximum 1000 Equal or reduced size print
Number of Group (1 key) address Number of Group (1 key) address 2-sided reception Condition setting through system
registtation registration : maximum 500 setting
Number of Group key registration : 2-in-1 reception No
5000 (Total address number Automatic reduction setting upon Yes
included in /1000 key) receiving A3
Program 48 Automatic reduction setting upon Yes (Other than North America and
Direct entry of addresses Entry by 10-key, # key receiving letter Inch destinations)
Chain dial Yes (pause key) Reception from a specific number Specified numbers only
Resend Call up nearest 8 addresses. *1 not allowed, or allowed. (50 numbers /20 digits)
Destination confirmation Yes (Allow/Reject)
Shortcut for address selection Use the 10-key to call up registered External phone connection Yes
(quick key) numbers of addresses. remote
Disable direct entry transmission *2 Yes Confidential reception (Sharp No
Disable PC- Fax sending Yes mode)
Received data bypass output Yes
*1: Except for FTP, Desktop, SMB, USB memory, Broadcast. Index printing No
*2: When disabled, the address registration is not allowed either. Transfer function upon disabling Yes (1 receiver (of transfer)
of output. registration)
(4) Specification of Multiple Addresses Internet Fax/Fax to e-mail Yes
(Transfer of Internet Fax/Fax
Mode FAX reception data to e-mail, inbound
Broadcast Yes (500 destinations) routing)
Request of serial transmission Yes

MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 9
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Mode FAX (9) Transmission Method
Exit tray setting Yes
Insertion of job separator sheet No Mode FAX
Staple function of received data Yes Transmission time 2 seconds level (super G3/JBIG),
6 seconds level (G3 ECM)
Auto wake up print Yes
Modem speed Automatic fall-back : 33.6kbps  2.4kbps
Received data print hold *1 Yes
Intercommunication Super G3/G3
Color toner print when black toner No
runs out. Communication line General membership telephone line
(PSTN), independent business line
*1: This function saves all received data in memory and starts out (PBX), F net.
put after password entry. (Confidential reception is excluded.) (R-key for PBX setting: Germany/France)
Setting only on the reciver side. ECM Yes

(7) Report/list function (10) Record Size

Mode FAX Mode FAX
Image sending activity report Yes Maximum record width 293mm
Time-specified output Record size A3 – A5/11" x 17" – 5.5" x 8.5"
Output with memory full
* Maximum of 200 times including (11) F code communication
both transmission and reception
Transaction report Yes Mode FAX
Address/phone number table Yes Sub-address Yes (20 digits)
Group table Yes Password Yes (20 digits)
Program table Yes
Memory box table (F code) Yes (12) Registration-related settings
Communication original contents Always print/Upon error/no print
print Mode FAX
List of allowed or rejected Yes One-touch/group *1 1000 destinations
reception numbers E-mail Use of LDAP allowed
Table of control record for each No FTP Up to 500 registered addresses for
account Desktop each group dial.
SMB Registered name in 18 full-size
(8) Other Functions FAX character (36 half-size characters)
One-touch dial receiver number
Mode FAX registration: within 64 digits for
receiver number + sub-address +
Time specification Yes
passcode (including "/").
Polling reception Yes
Program Registration of addresses (groups),
Bulletin board transmission Yes
settings (density, image quality) and
Up to 100 registrations allowed with
special functions in one set is
bulletin board, confidential and relay
allowed. (48 of them)
broadcast all combined. (Free area :
Number of memory boxes Registration of bulletin board/
1 registration)
confidential/relay broadcast is
Setting of the number of
allowed up to 100.
transmission: 1/no limit.
Registration name: 18 characters
Cover sheet function No
Number of sender registration 1 (default) with 20 characters
Transmission message No
Number of sender selection Total: 18 registrations (20 characters)
Sender print Yes
registration (Sender selection: In addition to
Sender selection Yes default, 18 registrations allowed)
Page number print Yes Registration of polling approval 10 numbers/20 digits
Date print Yes (Date can be expressed number
alternatively) Registration of Fax system No
Polling protection function Yes number (Sharp mode)
Page partition transmission Yes Registration of Fax polling No
Page connection No approval ID number (Sharp mode)
Confidential (receiver unit) Yes (F code method) Fax relay ID registration (Sharp No
Relay broadcast instructions Yes (F code method) mode)
Fax to e-mail (F code) *1 Yes Quick key (short cut registration) *2 Yes (001 – 1000)
Edge erase Yes Import/export of address book Yes (By storage backup)
Center erase Yes Black list (for France) No
2 in 1 Yes
Card shot Yes (Equivalent or enlargement up to *1: Since scan/Internet Fax/Fax uses the common address book,
the paper width. The maximum the number of addresses allowed for registration is the sum
enlargement is not allowed to exceed total of all modes.
400%) *2: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the
Forward data transmission/ Yes registered number of each address within the book for address
reception (Document Admin) Data transmission by PC-Fax/ selection. Users should be able to select a quick key number.
PC-Internet Fax is allowed, too.

*1: This function means that e-mail address setteing on F code

relay broadcast allowed.

MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 10
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (13) Telephone functions 7. Dimensions and weight
Mode FAX
Outer dimension W625 x D645 x H652 mm
On-hook function Yes
(Included operation panel) When the OC is installed:
Hold No
W625 x D645 x H686 mm
Setting of pause time Yes (1 – 15 seconds) When the RSPF is installed:
Telephone transmission during No (External telephone transmission W625 x D645 x H799 mm
power outage allowed) Footprint W625 x D645 mm
Tone pulse switching Tone, Pulse, Auto (North America/ Dimension occupied by the W902 x D645 mm
Taiwan) machine (when the bypass tray is extended)
* For the other destinations, set with
Weight When the RSPF is installed:
the soft switch.
Main Unit 51.6 kg (100V type)
(including photoreceptor / 52.1 kg (200V type)
(14) Sound settings
not including consumables) When the OC is installed: 46.5 kg
When the RSPF/OC is not installed: 44.9 kg
Mode Item FAX
On-hook sound Sound volume setting 1-9
Sound volume for calling Sound volume setting 1 - 9, No
Line monitor sound Sound volume setting 1 - 9, No
Reception sound Sound volume setting 1 - 9, No
Transmission success sound Sound volume setting 1 - 9, No
Transmission and reception Sound volume setting 1 - 9, No
error sound
Sound setting for end of Sound volume setting Large/middle/
original reading (image send) small/no sound

(15) Others

Mode FAX
PC-FAX Yes
FAST Yes (SEC only)
Network FAST No
Distinctive ring detection Setting for each destination

6. Power consumption
The full configuration can be operated with the rated power source.

Maximum rated power 100 V 200 V

Consumption*1 1.44 kW 1.84 kW
Energy consumption Not applicable
rate
TEC value (Measured 26cpm machine: 26cpm machine:
result) 1.8 kWh 1.84 kWh
31cpm machine: 31cpm machine:
2.3 kWh 2.25 kWh
35cpm machine: 35cpm machine:
2.4 kWh 2.35 kWh
TEC value (Standard) 26cpm machine:
Tier2 3.10 kWh (0.1 kwh x 26 + 0.5 kwh)
31cpm machine:
4.85 kWh (0.35 kWh x 31 - 6.0 kWh)
35cpm machine:
6.25 kWh (0.35 kWh x 35 - 6.0 kWh)
Power consumption is Yes –
1W in standby for NW (Exclude the case of
* Condition of use Fax and Network
Standing by at once)
Network:
Connected with
TCP/IP protocol
only
Moving time to pre- 1 minutes (default)
heat mode
Recovery time from 10 sec.
pre-heat mode
Moving time to sleep 1 minutes (default) 11 minutes (Europe)
mode * Printer mode: 10sec. (default)
Recovery time from 20 sec.
sleep mode

*1: At power-on timing

(with condition of dehumidify heater turned OFF)

MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 11
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 [3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
MX-M264U
Service Manual

1. Supply system table

A. North America, Middle America, South America
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x1 25K MX-312NT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document
2 Developer (black) Developer x1 26cpm: 75K MX-312NV
31/35cpm: 100K
3 Drum Drum x1 26cpm: 75K MX-312NR
31/35cpm: 100K

B. Brazil
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x1 25K MX-312BT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document
2 Developer (black) Developer x1 26cpm: 75K MX-312NV
31/35cpm: 100K
3 Drum Drum x1 26cpm: 75K MX-312NR
31/35cpm: 100K

C. Europe/ East Europe/ Russia / Australia/ New Zealand

No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x1 25K MX-312GT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document
2 Developer (black) Developer x1 26cpm: 75K MX-312GV
31/35cpm: 100K
3 Drum Drum x1 26cpm: 75K MX-312GR
31/35cpm: 100K

D. Asia affiliates
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x1 25K MX-312AT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document
2 Developer (black) Developer x1 26cpm: 75K MX-312AV
31/35cpm: 100K
3 Drum Drum x1 26cpm: 75K MX-312AR
31/35cpm: 100K

E. Hong Kong
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x1 25K MX-312AT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document
2 Developer (black) Developer x1 26cpm: 75K MX-312AV
31/35cpm: 100K
3 Drum Drum x1 26cpm: 75K MX-312AR
31/35cpm: 100K

F. Middle East/Africa/ Israel/ Philippines/ Taiwan/ Agent

No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x1 25K MX-312FT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document
2 Developer (black) Developer x1 26cpm: 75K MX-312FV
31/35cpm: 100K
3 Drum Drum x1 26cpm: 75K MX-312FR
31/35cpm: 100K

MX-M264U CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2. Maintenance parts list
A. North America, Middle America, South America
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller x1 150K AR-310UH
Fuser gear x1
Upper heat roller bearing x2
Upper cleaning pad x1
Fusing separation pawl (upper) x4
Thermistor cleaning pad x2
2 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller x1 300K MX-311LH
Fusing separation pawl (lower) x4
Fuser bearing (lower) x2
3 150K maintenance kit Drum separation pawl unit x2 150K MX-311KA
Transfer roller unit x1
DV blabe x1
DV side sheet F x1
DV side sheet R x1
Toner filter unit x1
4 MC unit MC unit x 10 26cpm: 75K (x 10) MX-311MC
31/35cpm: 100K (x 10)
5 Cleaner blade Cleaner blade x 10 26cpm: 75K (x 10) MX-311CB
31/35cpm: 100K (x 10)
6 Drum frame unit Drum frame unit x1 26cpm: 225K MX-311DU * The life of the toner reception seat attached
31/35cpm: 300K to the drum frame is 300K, and it can be
used up to 3 times.
(Supplied as a drum frame unit.)
7 Transfer roller unit Transfer roller unit x1 150K MX-311TX
8 Paper feed roller kit Paper feed roller kit x1 100K MX-311RT
9 Fusing unit Fusing unit (120V heater lamp) x1 150K MX-311FU
10 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 staples x 3 MX-SCX1

* The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.

B. SEGA/ SUK/ SCA/ SCNZ/ SEA/ SEES/ SEZ/ SEIS/ SEB/ SEN/ SEF/ SMEF/ Russia/ Special country
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller x1 150K AR-310UH
Fuser gear x1
Upper heat roller bearing x2
Upper cleaning pad x1
Fusing separation pawl (upper) x4
Thermistor cleaning pad x2
2 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller x1 300K MX-311LH
Fusing separation pawl (lower) x4
Fuser bearing (lower) x2
3 150K PM kit Drum separation pawl unit x2 150K MX-311KA
Transfer roller unit x1
DV blade x1
DV side sheet F x1
DV side sheet R x1
Toner filter unit x1
4 MC unit MC unit x 10 26cpm: 75K (x 10) MX-311MC
31/35cpm: 100K (x 10)
5 Cleaner blade Cleaner blade x 10 26cpm: 75K (x 10) MX-311CB
31/35cpm: 100K (x 10)
6 Drum frame unit Drum frame unit x1 26cpm: 225K MX-311DU * The life of the toner reception seat attached
31/35cpm: 300K to the drum frame is 300K, and it can be
used up to 3 times.
(Supplied as a drum frame unit.)
7 Transfer roller unit Transfer roller unit x1 150K MX-311TX
8 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 staples x 3 MX-SCX1

* The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.

MX-M264U CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 2

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 C. STCL/ SRH/ SRS/ SRSSC/ SBI/ Agent
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller x1 150K AR-310UH
Fuser gear x1
Upper heat roller bearing x2
Upper cleaning pad x1
Fusing separation pawl (upper) x4
Thermistor cleaning pad x2
2 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller x1 300K MX-311LH
Fusing separation pawl (lower) x4
Fuser bearing (lower) x2
3 150K PM kit Drum separation pawl unit x2 150K MX-311KA
Transfer roller unit x1
DV blade x1
DV side sheet F x1
DV side sheet R x1
Toner filter unit x1
4 MC unit MC unit x 10 26cpm: 75K (x 10) MX-311MC
31/35cpm: 100K (x 10)
5 Cleaner blade Cleaner blade x 10 26cpm: 75K (x 10) MX-311CB
31/35cpm: 100K (x 10)
6 Drum frame unit Drum frame unit x1 26cpm: 225K MX-311DU * The life of the toner reception seat
31/35cpm: 300K attached to the drum frame is 300K, and it
can be used up to 3 times.
(Supplied as a drum frame unit.)
7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 staples x 3 MX-SCX1

* The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.

3. Developer/Drum life end definition

• When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified level.
• When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified level.
When either of the above reached the specified level, it is judged as life end.

In an actual case, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the
specified level, it is judged as life end.
To check the drum and developer life, use SIM22-1/SIM22-13.

Number of rotations
Developer/drum counter
(Rotations)
Developer/drum 26cpm model 31/35cpm model 550K
75K 100K

MX-M264U CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 3

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 4. Production number identification <Drum>
The laser print indicates the model conformity code and the date
<Toner cartridge>
(year, month, day) of production.
The label on the toner cartridge shows the date of production.

Label position

Internal product name

1 2 3 4 5
Incompatibility
Destination 1 Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code. L for this model.
2 Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
3 Number or X, Y, Z
Version No. Indicates the month of packing.
Production year/month/day (6 digits) X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Serial No. in production day (5 digits) 4, 5 Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
Production place (1 digits)

<Developer>
5. Environmental conditions
(Humidity)

85%

60%

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
20%

The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as fol-
10 C 30 C 35 C
lows.
(Temperature)
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag.
Standard environmental Temperature 20 - 25C
1 Alphabet conditions Humidity 65  5%RH
Indicates the production factory. Usage environmental Temperature 10 - 35C
2 Number conditions Humidity 20 - 85%RH
Indicates the production year. Atmospheric 590 - 1013 hPa
3, 4 Number pressure (height: 0 - 2000m)
Indicates the production month. Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
5, 6 Number manufactured month (Production lot) under
unsealed state
Indicates the production day.
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month
7 Hyphen
under unsealed state
8 Number
Indicates the production lot.

MX-M264U CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 4

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 [4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
MX-M264U
Service Manual

1. External view

1 2 3 4 5 8 6

When a output tray unit is installed

When a keyboard is installed

10 7

When a finisher is installed

11 12 13 14

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Job separator tray (Upper tray) (optional) Print jobs and received faxes are delivered to this tray.
2 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically
scanned.
3 Front cover Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a toner cartridge.
4 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray.
5 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
6 Exit tray unit (right tray)*1 When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
7 Finisher*1 This can be used to staple output.
8 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
9 Keyboard*1 The keyboard is integrated into the main unit.
If not using the keyboard, it can be retracted into the bottom of the operation panel.
10 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in the "on" position.
11 Tray 1 This holds paper.
12 Tray 2 This holds paper.
13 Tray 3 (when a paper drawer is installed)*1 This holds paper.
14 Tray 4 (when a paper drawer is installed)*1 This holds paper.

*1: Peripheral device.

MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2. Internal structure

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Toner cartridge This holds toner for printing. The toner cartridge must be replaced when indicated on the operation panel.
2 Upper cover of machine Open this cover to remove jam paper when a paper jam occurs in the output of the job separator or the optional
finisher.
3 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.
4 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a misfeed.
5 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.
6 Photoconductive drum This drum has a photoconductive coating on its surface.
The images are formed on top of this photoconductive surface.
(The photoconductive coating is green in color.)
7 Right cover of paper drawer (when a Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 3 or tray 4.
paper drawer is installed)
8 Paper tray right side cover Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 2.
9 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading a large sheet of paper, be sure to pull out the bypass tray extension.

MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 2

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3. Automatic document feeder and document glass

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Paper feed roller This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.
2 Document feeding area cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.
3 Original guides These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly.
Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
4 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
5 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
7 Original size detector This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
8 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.

MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 3

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 4. I/F connectors

2
3
4
5

When a fax expansion kit is installed

7
8

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Connector for the finisher only Connects the finisher.
2 Service-only connector This connector is for use only by service technicians.
Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to malfunction.
Important note for service technicians:
The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
3 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network.
For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
4 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
5 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
6 Power plug
7 Extension phone jack When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to this jack.
8 Telephone line jack When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this jack.

MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 4

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 5. Operation panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11 12

JOB STATUS PRINT

READY
DATA
SYSTEM
SETTINGS IMAGE SEND
LINE
DATA

HOME LOGOUT

15 16 17

14

7 8 13

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you
perform an operation.
2 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper
tray settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier
to use.
3 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and
to cancel jobs.
For details, see the chapters for each of the functions in this manual.
4 PRINT mode indicators • READY indicator: Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
• DATA indicator: This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
5 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are also
used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings).
6 [CLEAR] key ( ) Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
7 [HOME] key Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to
enable quick and easy operation of the machine.
8 IMAGE SEND mode indicators • LINE indicator: This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during
transmission of an image in scan mode.
• DATA indicator: This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such
as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
9 Stylus pen This can be used to touch a key displayed on the touch panel.
10 [STOP] key ( ) Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
11 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
12 [POWER] key ( ) Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
13 [LOGOUT] key ( ) Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line.
14 [#/P] key ( ) When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialing.
15 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial
state.
16 [START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.
17 [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.

MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 5

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 6. RSPF
A. Sensors and detectors

SCOV
SPPD1 SPED SPLS2
SPPD2 SPLS1

SPWS
SOCD
SPPD3 SPPD4

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation Note

SCOV RSPF cover open/close detector Micro switch Detects open/close of the RSPF cover.
SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.
SPED Document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS1 Paper size detector 1 Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS2 Paper size detector 2 Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPPD1 Document transport sensor 1 Transmission type Detects paper feed and the document size in random
paper feed.
SPPD2 Document transport sensor 2 Transmission type Detects paper pass.
SPPD3 Document transport sensor 3 Transmission type Detects paper pass.
SPPD4 Document transport sensor 4 Transmission type Detects paper exit and switchback.
SPWS Document size detector Volume-type resistor Detects the document width.

B. Motors, clutches, solenoids and PWB

SRRC
STMPS SPFM

SPRS

SPM (SPUM)

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

SPFM RSPF transport motor Stepping motor Transports a document.
SPM/SPUM RSPF paper feed motor Stepping motor Feeds a document.
SPRS Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid Magnetic solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller. (Releases the
(RSPF) paper exit roller pressure when reversing paper.)
SRRC Registration roller clutch (RSPF) Magnetic clutch Controls the registration roller. (Controls the timing of document transport.)
STMPS Stamp solenoid Magnetic solenoid Drives the finish stamp.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 RSPF driver PWB Drives the motor, the solenoid, and the clutch in the RSPF section.

MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 6

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 C. Rollers

6 5 4 2 3 1

7 8 10 9 11 12

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Document pickup roller (RSPF) Feeds a document to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (RSPF) Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a buckle on paper between the registration roller and this
roller to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan.
3 Separation roller (RSPF) Separates a document to prevent double-feeding.
4 Transport auxiliary roller (RSPF) Reduces friction between a document and the paper guide to transport the document smoothly to the
registration roller.
5 Registration roller (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document to the transport roller 2. / Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts
the document scanning timing.
6 Registration roller (Idle) RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to the document.
7 Transport roller 2 (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller
to the document.
8 Transport roller 2 (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section.
9 Transport roller 3 (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller
to the document.
10 Transport roller 3 (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller.
11 Paper exit roller (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller
to the document.
12 Paper exit roller (Drive) (RSPF) Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning
the back surface.

MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 7

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 7. Sensor No. Name Code Function and operation
21 1st tray paper empty C1PED 1st tray paper empty detection
sensor
1
22 Toner sensor TCS Toner density detection
23 Center tray paper TFD1 Center tray paper YES/NO
2 YES/NO sensor detection
3 24 Reverse pass paper APPD1 Reverse pass detection
4 detection sensor
25 2nd tray (paper tray) C2SS 2nd tray (paper tray) empty
detection detection
26 Manual feed width MPWD Manual feed paper width
5 detection sensor detection
27 Temperature sensor/ TH_RA/ Machine temperature/humidity
6
Humidity sensor HUD_RA detection
27
7 8. Switch

8
4
9
10
23 25
22 11
21
20 12 1
19

18
17
16
24 15 26 14 13

No. Name Code Function and operation

1 Scanner home MHPS Detects the scanner home
position sensor position.
2 Paper size detection OCSW Detects generation of the paper
trigger sensor size detection trigger signal.
3 2nd paper exit POD2 2nd paper exit detection
sensor (Option)
4 2nd paper exit full TFD2 2nd paper exit section full
detection sensor detection
(Option)
5 1st paper exit sensor POD1 1st paper exit detection
6 Shifter home position SHPOS Shifter home position sensor
sensor detection 3 2
7 Paper exit sensor POSD Paper exit detection
(DUP side)
No. Name Code Function and operation
8 Thermistor TH_UM/ Fusing temperature detection
1 Right cabinet door DSW_POC Right cabinet door open/
TH_US
switch (Option) close detection
9 1st tray (paper tray) C1SS 1st tray (paper tray) empty
2 Door switch DSW_R Front door and side door
detection detection
open/close detection
10 Manual feed paper PPD1 Sensor of paper entry from the
3 2nd right door switch DSW_C2 Side door open/close
entry sensor manual paper feed tray, the
detection
2nd/multi-tray desk, or the DUP
4 Main switch MSW Main power switch
11 Manual paper feed MTOP2 Manual feed tray position
tray empty sensor 2 detection
12 Manual paper feed MTOP1 Manual feed tray position
tray empty sensor 1 detection
13 Manual feed length MPLD1 Manual feed paper length
detection sensor 1 detection
14 Manual feed length MPLD2 Manual feed paper length
detection sensor 2 detection
15 Manual feed paper MPED Manual feed paper empty
empty sensor detection
16 2nd tray paper pass C2PFD 2nd tray paper pass
sensor
17 2nd tray paper upper C2LUD 2nd tray paper upper limit
limit detection sensor detection
18 2nd tray paper empty C2PED 2nd tray paper empty detection
sensor
19 1st tray paper pass C1PFD 1st tray paper pass
sensor
20 1st tray paper upper C1LUD 1st tray paper upper limit
limit detection sensor detection

MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 8

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 9. Solenoid/Clutch 10. Drive motor

1
3

5
2
3

4
5

9
9

8
8 6
7
7 6

No. Name Code Function and operation No. Name Code Function and operation
1 Paper exit gate POGS1 Paper exit gate switcher 1 Scan motor MIRM Drives the scanner unit
switching solenoid 2 Shifter motor OSM Shifter drive
(Option) 3 Paper exit reverse POM Duplex paper switching and exit
2 PS clutch RRC Main unit paper feed motor motor
3 1st tray paper feed C1PUC Paper feed roller drive 4 ADU motor ADUM Reverse pass for paper
clutch transport
4 Manual paper feed MPFS Manual paper feed solenoid 5 Main motor MM Main drive
solenoid 6 Tray lift motor C1LUM Tray paper lift
5 Paper feed transfer PTRC2 Paper feed transfer clutch 7 Tray lift motor C2LUM Tray paper lift
clutch 8 Toner motor TNM Toner supply
6 2nd tray paper feed C2PUC Drives the paper feed roller 9 Polygon motor PM Drives the polygon mirror
clutch
7 2nd tray paper feed C2PUS Solenoid for the paper feed from
solenoid the tray
8 1st tray paper feed C1PUS Solenoid for the paper feed from
solenoid the tray
9 Separation pawl PSPS Separation pawl operation
solenoid solenoid

MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 9

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 11. Lamp 12. Fan/Filter

6
7
2 1
3 5
6
1
4

No. Name Function and operation No. Name Code Function and operation
1 Copy lamp Image exposure lamp 1 Fusing fan FUFM1/2 Cools the inside of the unit.
2 Heater lamp Fusing heat lamp 2 Power supply cooling PSFM1 Cools the inside of the unit.
fan 1
3 Power supply cooling PSFM2 Cools the inside of the unit.
fan 2
4 Paper exit fan POFM1 Cools the inside of the unit.
(31cpm/35cpm machine only)
5 Paper exit fan POFM2 Cools the inside of the unit.
6 Ozone filter
7 Ozone filter

MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 10

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 13. PWB 14. Roller

13
9 1
3 1
2
2

7 3
4

5
6 6
8 7
8

5
9
10
11
12

14 13
11

12 No. Name Function and operation

10 1 Paper exit roller Paper exit roller
2 Transport roller Paper transport roller
3 Upper heat roller Fuses toner on paper. (with the Teflon
No. Name Function and operation roller)
1 Document size Drives the LED for the document size 4 Lower heat roller Fuses toner on paper. (with the silicone
detection PWB detection. rubber roller)
(Light emitting) 5 DUP transport Duplex paper transport
2 Document size Outputs the document size detection signal. follower roller
detection PWB 6 DUP transport roller Duplex paper transport
(Light receiving)
7 Transport roller Transfer images on the drum onto paper.
3 Scanner lamp drive Drives the scanner lamp
8 Resist roller Synchronize the paper lead edge with the
PWB
image lead edge.
4 CCD PWB Scans document images and performs A/D
9 Manual paper feed Picks up papers in manual paper feed port.
conversion of the scanning signal.
roller
5 USB I/F PWB USB I/F
10 Manual feed Transports paper from the manual paper
6 KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal. transport roller feed port.
7 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD 11 1st tray paper feed Transports the picked up paper to RESIST
display signal. Controls the touch panel. roller section.
8 PCU PWB Controls the engine section. 12 1st tray pick-up roller Picks up paper from the tray.
9 SCU PWB Controls the scanner and the operation 13 2nd tray paper feed Transports the picked up paper to RESIST
section. roller section.
10 Tray interface PWB 2nd tray control 14 2nd tray pick-up Picks up paper from the tray.
11 DC power supply DC voltage control roller
PWB
12 High voltage PWB High voltage control
13 MFP control PWB Controls image data (compression,
decompression, and filing), and controls the
whole machine.

MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 11

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 [5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
MX-M264U
Service Manual

1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.

2. Adjustment item list

Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit 1A Developing doctor gap adjustment
1B MG roller main pole position adjustment
1C Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values 2A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2
2B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1
2C Transfer current and voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 3 Image lead edge position, 3A Print image off-center automatic adjustment (Print engine) (Each paper feed tray) 50-28
image loss, void area, image off- 3B Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub scanning 50-28
center, image magnification direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (Document table mode)
ratio adjustment (Automatic 3C Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub scanning 50-28
adjustment) direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (RSPF mode)
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion 4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
adjustment (Document table 4B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
mode) 4C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew adjustment (RSPF mode) 64-2
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment 48-1
ADJ 7 Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) 50-5
ADJ 8 Image density adjustment 8A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) 63-3 (63-5)
8B Copy / Image send / FAX image 8B Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each 46-2
quality adjustment (Individual (1) monochrome copy mode) (separately for the
adjustment) low-density area and the high-density area) (No
need to adjust normally)
8B Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) 46-19
(2) mode document density scanning operation
(exposure operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
8B Document low density image density 46-32
(3) reproduction adjustment in the automatic
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (No need
to adjust normally) (Background density
adjustment in the scanning section)
8B Copy/Scan low density image density 46-63
(4) adjustment (for each mode) (No need to adjust
normally) (Effective only for the color scan
function)
8B Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color 46-37
(5) document reproduction adjustment (No need to
adjust normally)
8B RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density 46-9
(6) adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
ADJ 9 Paper size sensor adjustment 9A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
9B RSPF paper feed tray document size (width) sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ 10 Document size detection 10A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-1
adjustment 10B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
ADJ 11 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 12 Print image position, void area, 12A Print image print area adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment) 50-10/50-1
off-center adjustment (Print 12B Print image off-center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment) 50-10
engine) (Manual adjustment)
ADJ 13 Scan image magnification ratio 13A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
13B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1/48-5
(Document table mode)
13C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
(RSPF mode)
13D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
(RSPF mode)
ADJ 14 Scan image off-center 14A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode) 50-12
adjustment (Manual adjustment) 14B Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) 50-12/50-6

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 1

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 15 Copy image position and image 15A Copy image position, image loss, and void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document 50-1
loss adjustment (Manual table mode)
adjustment) 15B Image scanning position adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) 53-8
15C Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) 50-6
ADJ 16 Finisher adjustments (alignment, staple position) 3-10

3. Details of adjustment

ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit 1-B MG roller main pole position adjustment
1) Put the developing unit on a flat surface.
2) Tie a needle or pin on a string.
1-A Developing doctor gap adjustment
3) Hold the string and bring the needle close to the MG roller hor-
1) Remove the doctor cover.
izontally. (Do not use paper clip, which is too heavy to make a
correct adjustment.) (Put the developing unit horizontally for
this adjustment.)
4) Do not bring the needle into contact with the MG roller, but
bring it to a position 2 or 3mm apart from the MG roller. Mark
the point on the MG roller which is on the extension line from
the needle tip.
5) Measure the distance from the marking position to the top of
the doctor plate of the developing unit to insure that it is
9.1mm.
If the distance is not within the specified range, loosen the fix-
ing screw A of the main pole adjustment plate, and move the
adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.

2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw A.

3) Insert a thickness gauge of 1.5mm to the positions of three
screws on the developing doctor as shown.

A
9.1mm

R
A

C
A

F
A

4) Tighten the developing doctor fixing screw.

5) Check the clearance of the developing doctor. If it is within the
specified range, then fix the doctor fixing screw with screw
lock.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the MG roller.
<Adjustment specification>

Developing doctor gap

+0.1mm
F/C/R: 1.5 -0.15mm

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 2

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2) Close the front cabinet.
1-C Toner density control reference value
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, [EXECUTE] key is high-
setting lighted (in black) and the developer adjustment is started. (The
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: adjustment is automatically performed for 3 minutes.)
* When developer is replaced. 4) When the developer adjustment is completed, [EXECUTE] key
CAUTION: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer returns to the normal state (in white), and the developer adjust-
is replaced. Never execute it in the other cases. ment value is displayed.
1) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2. CAUTION: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the
adjustment result is not reflected.
 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the operation,
7(67 6,08/$7,21 12 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 the operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to
$7'(9($'-  
the normal display.
If [EE-EU] or [EE-EL] is displayed, setting of the refer-
ence toner density control value is not completed nor-
mally.
Troubleshoot the cause, remove the cause, and per-
form setting again.

Error
(;(&87(  Error name Detail of error
display
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level below 78
EXECUTE
EXECUTE EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level above 178
or INTERRUPT
5) Cancel SIM25-2 with [CA] key.

 6) Toner cartridge installation
Shake the toner cartridge 20 times horizontally.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&6

20

(;(&87( 

Adjustment completed
7) Press the lock release lever and insert it along the guide in the

 machine until it locks securely.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-

(;(&87( 

Abnormal end



* Before installation, clean and remove dust and dirt from the
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( toner cartridge.
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&6(((/ 8) Close the front cabinet.
9) Confirm that "Toner replenishment in progress" is displayed,
and wait until the display disappears. (It takes 30 sec - 6 min.)
NOTE: This procedure is for checking the toner supply operation
from the toner cartridge to the DV unit. The operation time
differs depending on the toner quantity in the toner car-
tridge, uneven distribution of toner, and the internal state of
the toner cartridge.
(;(&87( 

CAUTION: Do not perform operations which interrupt the above

operation, such as opening the front cover, entering the
SIM mode, and turning OFF/ON the power. If this pre-
caution is ignored, Trouble codes F2-40 or F2-64 or a
over-toned condition may occur.
CAUTION: When not replacing the developer, do not execute
SIM25-2.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 3

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3) Enter the main charger values of items A/B under TS_OFF/
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values ON.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the
2-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.

* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced. CAUTION: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on
* U2 trouble has occurred. the MC/DV high voltage power PWB.

* The PCU PWB has been replaced. Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC/
DV high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
order to check the adjustment value.
1) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.
This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advis-
able to put down the adjustment value in advance.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖&23<*%
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the mid-
$˖  %˖ ˖35,17(5)$;*% dle speed mode is set, the adjustment values of the
˷ ̚˹ other modes are automatically set according to the mid-
dle speed mode setting in a certain relationship.

CAUTION: Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a

digital multi meter in this model, a judgment of the out-
put must be made by checking the print image quality.

76B2)) 76B21 (;(&87( 2. 2-B Adjust the developing bias voltage

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
10-key EXECUTE * When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec. * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
 1) Enter the SIM 8-1 mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖ &23<*%

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
$˖  %˖ ˖ 35,17(5)$;*%
7(67
'96(77,1*$1'287387
˷ ̚˹
$˖ ˖ &23<'9%
$˖  %˖ ˖ 35,17(5)$;'9%

˷̚ ˹

76B2)) 76B21 (;(&87( 2.

76B2)) 76B21 (;(&87( 2.

10-key EXECUTE
2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted.
EXECUTE
Button Item Display Content
Setting Default or after 30 sec.
range value
TS_OFF A COPY Charging/grid bias set 0 - 750 590 
GB value in a copy job ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(Toner save mode '96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖&23<'9%
OFF) $˖  %˖ ˖35,17(5)$;'9%
B PRINTER Charging/grid bias set 0 - 750 590 ˷̚ ˹
FAX value in a Print/FAX
GB job (Toner save mode
OFF)
TS_ON A COPY Charging/grid bias set 0 - 750 460
GB value in a copy job
(Toner save mode
ON)
B PRINTER Charging/grid bias set 0 - 750 390
GB value in a print job 76B2)) 76B21 (;(&87( 2.

(Toner save mode

ON)

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 4

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted.
2-C Transfer current and voltage adjustment
Button Item Display Content
Setting Default This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
range value
* When the TC high voltage PWB is replaced.
TS_OFF A COPY Developing bias set 0 - 650 450
DVB value in a copy job * U2 trouble has occurred.
(Toner save mode * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
OFF) * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
B PRINTER Developing bias set 0 - 650 450
1) Enter the SIM 8-6 mode.
FAX value in a Print/FAX
DVB job (Toner save mode
OFF) 

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
TS_ON A COPY Developing bias set 0 - 650 320 7+96(77,1*$1'287387

DVB value in a copy job $˖  ˖9)

$˖ 
(Toner save mode %˖  ˖95

ON) ˷̚˹ &˖  ˖9)

'˖  ˖95
B PRINTER Developing bias set 0 - 650 250 (˖  ˖96)
DVB value in a print job )˖  ˖965

(Toner save mode *˖  ˖96)

ON) +˖  ˖965
,˖  ˖9;6)

3) Enter the developing bias values of items A/B under TS_OFF/ -˖  ˖9;65

.˖  ˖9;6)
ON. /˖  ˖9;65

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the (;(&87( 2.

procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped. 10-key
EXECUTE
CAUTION: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on EXECUTE
the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. or after 30 sec.
Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC/
DV high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in 

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
order to check the adjustment value. 7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387

This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advis- $˖

$˖  ˖9)

 %˖  ˖95
able to put down the adjustment value in advance. ˷̚˹ &˖  ˖9)

'˖  ˖95
(˖  ˖96)
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the mid- )˖  ˖965
dle speed mode is set, the adjustment values of the *˖  ˖96)

other modes are automatically set according to the mid- +˖  ˖965

dle speed mode setting in a certain relationship. ,˖

-˖
 ˖9;6)

 ˖9;65

CAUTION: Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a .˖  ˖9;6)

/˖  ˖9;65
digital multi meter in this model, a judgment of the out- (;(&87( 2.
put must be made by checking the print image quality.

2) Select an item to be adjusted.

Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content 26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
range
machine machine machine
A +V1 F Transfer Standard W Between Single A-1: W, +V1 F (Between 0 - 255 5 5 5
bias paper papers papers), Standard paper
reference front surface
value (Single/Duplex)
B +V1 R Duplex A-2: W, +V1 R (Between 0 - 255 5 5 5
papers), Standard paper
back surface (Duplex)
C +V2 F Paper Single A-3: W, +V2 F, Standard 0 - 255 14 18 20
paper front surface
(Single/Duplex)
D +V2 R Duplex A-4: W, +V2 R, Standard 0 - 255 12 16 14
paper back surface
(Duplex)

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 5

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content 26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
range
machine machine machine
E +V1 S-F Transfer Standard N1jp Between Single B-1: N1jp, +V1 S-F 0 - 255 5 5 5
bias paper papers (Between papers),
reference Standard paper front
value surface (Single/Duplex)
F +V1 S-R Duplex B-2: N1jp, +V1 S-R 0 - 255 5 5 5
(Between papers),
Standard paper back
surface (Duplex)
G +V2 S-F Paper Single B-3: N1jp, +V2 S-F, 0 - 255 14 18 20
Standard paper front
surface (Single/Duplex)
H +V2 S-F Duplex B-4: N1jp, +V2 S-F, 0 - 255 14 18 20
Standard paper back
surface (Duplex)
I +V1 XS-F N2jp Between Single C-1: N2jp, +V1 XS-F 0 - 255 5 5 5
papers (Between papers),
Standard paper front
surface (Single/Duplex)
J +V1 XS-R Duplex C-2: N2jp, +V1 XS-R 0 - 255 5 5 5
(Between papers),
Standard paper back
surface (Duplex)
K +V2 XS-F Paper Single C-3: N2jp, +V2 XS-F, 0 - 255 14 18 20
Standard paper front
surface (Single/Duplex)
L +V2 XS-R Duplex C-4: N2jp, +V2 XS-R, 0 - 255 14 18 20
Standard paper back
surface (Duplex)
M +V1 THICK Heavy >LTR Between papers D-1: > LTR, +V1 THICK 0 - 255 5 5 5
paper (Between papers),
Heavy paper
N +V2 THICK Paper D-2: > LTR, +V2 THICK, 0 - 255 10 14 16
Heavy paper
O +V1 THICK S LTR Between papers E-1:  LTR, +V1 THICK S 0 - 255 5 5 5
(Between papers),
Heavy paper
P +V2 THICK S Paper E-2:  LTR, +V2 THICK 0 - 255 12 14 16
S, Heavy paper
Q +V1 THIN Thin >LTR Between papers D-7: > LTR, +V1 THIN 0 - 255 5 5 5
paper (Between papers),
Thin paper
R +V2 THIN Paper D-8: > LTR, +V2 THIN, 0 - 255 12 18 20
Thin paper
S +V1 THIN S LTR Between papers E-7:  LTR, +V1 THIN S 0 - 255 5 5 5
(Between papers),
Thin paper
T +V2 THIN S Paper E-8:  LTR, +V2 THIN S, 0 - 255 12 18 20
Thin paper
U +V1 LABEL Label >LTR Between papers D-3:  LTR, +V1 LABEL 0 - 255 5 5 5
sheet (Between papers),
Label sheet
V +V2 LABEL Paper D-4: > LTR, +V2 LABEL, 0 - 255 12 18 20
Label sheet
W +V1 LABEL S LTR Between papers E-3:  LTR, +V1 LABEL 0 - 255 5 5 5
S (Between papers),
Label sheet
X +V2 LABEL S Paper E-4:  LTR, +V2 LABEL 0 - 255 12 14 16
S, Label sheet
Y +V1 OHP OHP >LTR Between papers D-5: > LTR, +V1 OHP 0 - 255 5 5 5
(Between papers), OHP
Z +V2 OHP Paper D-6: > LTR, +V2 OHP, 0 - 255 8 14 16
OHP
AA +V1 OHP S LTR Between papers E-5:  LTR, +V1 OHP S 0 - 255 5 5 5
(Between papers), OHP
AB +V2 OHP S Paper E-6:  LTR, +V2 OHP S, 0 - 255 12 18 20
OHP

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 6

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content 26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
range
machine machine machine
AC +V1 POSTCARD Transfer Postcard/ >100mm Between papers D-9: > 100mm, +V1 0 - 255 5 5 5
bias Envelope POSTCARD (Between
reference papers),
value Postcard/Envelope
AD +V2 POSTCARD Paper D-10: > 100mm, +V2 0 - 255 16 26 26
POSTCARD,
Postcard/Envelope
AE +V1 POSTCARD S 100mm Between papers E-9:  100mm, +V1 0 - 255 5 5 5
POSTCARD S (Between
papers),
Postcard/Envelope
AF +V2 POSTCARD S Paper E-10:  100mm, +V2 0 - 255 16 26 26
POSTCARD S,
Postcard/Envelope

3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value), and press [OK] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified output is provided.

ADJ 3 Image lead edge position, 3-A Print image off-center automatic
adjustment (Print engine)
image loss, void area, image (Each paper feed tray)
off-center, image magnification 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
ratio adjustment


(Automatic adjustment) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with 2&$'- 63)$'-

SIM50-28. 6(78335,17$'- 5(68/7

'$7$
* ADJ 12
Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area, off-
center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 13
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 14
Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) 

* ADJ 15
Copy image position, image loss adjustment 2) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] with the key.
(Manual adjustment) 3) Select [ALL] with the key.
Menu in SIM50-28 mode


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Display/Item Content 7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image /($' 2))6(7
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) $//

SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image

magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)
SETUP/ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each paper
PRINT ADJ feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed



CAUTION: By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] key, the following

items can be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are
executed simultaneously.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 7

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.
3-B Copy mode image lead edge position,

 image loss, void area, image off-center, sub
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
&/26(
scanning direction image magnification
0)7 &6 &6 $'8 ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner)
&6 &6 (Document table mode)
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.



ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'- 63)$'-
6(78335,17$'- 5(68/7
'$7$

(;(&87( 

5) Press [EXECUTE] key.

The adjustment pattern is printed out.
6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
CAUTION: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide. 

In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed

adjustment pattern. 2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key.
3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key.
(Any paper size will do.)



ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6

(;(&87( 

4) Press [EXECUTE] key.

The adjustment pattern is printed out.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
The following item is automatically adjustment. CAUTION: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment guide.
* Print image off-center adjustment In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
adjustment pattern.
8) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 8

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 6) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press the [SPF ADJ] key.

 

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7 6,'( 6,'(
$//
12:(;(&87,1*

5(35,17 (;(&87( 

3) Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette

The following item is automatically adjustment.
used to print RSPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corre-
* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image sponding button:
off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
SIDE1: RSPF adjustment for the front side
automatic adjustment
SIDE2: RSPF adjustment for the back side
7) Press [OK] key.
ALL: RSPF adjustment for both the front and back sides
The adjustment result becomes valid.
4) Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print RSPF

 adjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.)
5) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts self-print of
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,08/$7,21&203/(7( RSPF adjustment patterns.
3/($6(386+&$.(<
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
self-printing RSPF adjustment patterns.
When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where you
can start RSPF adjustments.
6) RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF.
(Set so that the pattern surface faces up.)



3-C Copy mode image lead edge position,

image loss, void area, image off-center, sub
scanning direction image magnification
ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner)
(RSPF mode)
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.



ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'- 63)$'-
6(78335,17$'- 5(68/7
'$7$

* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cas-

sette selection screen and have the machine self-print
RSPF adjustment patterns again.
7) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts reading
RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front side).

* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
reading and calculating RSPF adjustment patterns (for the
front side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the front side) after it has read the patterns for the front side.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
amount for the front side, the next screen appears where
you can have the machine start reading RSPF adjustment
patterns (for the back side).

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 9

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Adjustment Item List
• RSPF original leading edge adjustment (front side) ADJ 4 Scan image distortion
• RSPF original off-center adjustment (front side) adjustment
• RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment (Document table mode)
(front side)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
8) RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF.
(Set so that the pattern surface faces down.) * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.

4-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass.
1) Remove the lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which are
fixing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. Release the scan-
ner unit A from the drive wire.

* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cas-

sette selection screen and have the machine self-print
RSPF adjustment patterns again.
9) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts loading
RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
reading RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
amount for the back side, the next screen appears where
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
you can view the results of the adjustments.
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
Adjustment Item List
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
• RSPF original leading edge adjustment (back side) the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
• RSPF original off-center adjustment (back side) proper.
• RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment
(back side)
10) The adjustment result screen appears.
This screen shows the current values along with the previous
values in parentheses.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cas-
sette selection screen and have the machine self-print
RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides)
again.
* To have the machine start re-reading the RSPF adjustment
patterns (front and back sides), press the [RESCAN] key.
* To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment val-
ues into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] key.
* To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA]
key.
11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.
return to the top menu, press the [OK] key.
* To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] key.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 10

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame 6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
side of the scanner unit B. edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.

4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce-
dures, perform the following procedures. 4-B Scan image (sub scanning direction)
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which distortion adjustment
is not in contact. 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner (Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear L
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.

L L

L = 10mm

2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-

ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.

30mm

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 11

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.
4-C Scan image (main scanning direction)
If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
distortion adjustment
La Lb 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)

L L

If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform

the following procedures.
4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will L = 10mm
do.)
L

2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-

ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right
angles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work is
completed.)

If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform

the following procedure.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand
5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
and right-hand side images distortions.
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan-
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner Lc Lc
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)
is satisfied. Copy A Copy B
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform ADJ 4A Scanner (reading) unit par-
allelism adjustment.
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld

If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.

(The distortions are balanced.)
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 12

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front 2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")
frame side. paper in RSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the RSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
• Check with one of the following methods.
Check Method 1

(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm

A B

a b

Check Method 2
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the 1.0mm.
right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the
image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted. 0 - 1.0mm
6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side, change the overall height.
7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check A
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.

ADJ 5 Scanner image skew

adjustment (RSPF mode) If the copy image is not in the above state, perform the pro-
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: cedure 3).
* The RSPF section has been disassembled. 3) Open the RSPF unit, and loosen the fixing screw of the hinge.
* When replacing the RSPF unit.
* The RSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks A and B to the
leading and trailing edges of the paper surface lead edge sec-
tion.

A Paper pass direction

4) Slide the RSPF unit in the arrow direction to make the skew
adjustment.
5) Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied test
chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a) - (b) =
 1mm or less) is satisfied.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 13

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale
length in terms of length.
* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
scanning direction from the following formula.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan- ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
(Example)
* U2 trouble has occurred. Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the
1) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖  %˖ ˖&&'68%

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1

'˖ ˖63)68%

100mm scale
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110
)˖ ˖63)%68%

1.0mm

2.
Copy image
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value). (1mm (1%)
10 20 90 100 110
shorter than
Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the the original)
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the
following procedures.
7) Remove the document table glass.
8) Remove the dark box cover.
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.

NOTE: MEMO: This procedure must be executed also when the

CCD unit is replaced.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 14

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
ADJ 7 Print lead edge image position
adjustment (Printer mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the
lead edge void area to greater than the standard value
(3mm) in the printer mode.
1) Enter the SIM 50-5 mode.



ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$˖ ˖'(1&
$˖  %˖ ˖'(1%
CAUTION: Never loosen the screws marked with X. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5

If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and '˖ ˖'(1%0)7

the angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to (˖ ˖'(1%&6
)˖ ˖'(1%&6
cause a problem, which cannot be adjusted in the mar- *˖ ˖'(1%&6
ket. In that case, the whole scanner unit must be +˖ ˖'(1%&6

replaced. ,˖ ˖'(1%$'8

-˖ ˖'(1%+9
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning .˖ ˖08/7,&2817

direction) to change the installing position. /˖  ˖ 3$3(5

When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
(;(&87( 2.

CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter

than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A. 10-key EXECUTE
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
EXECUTE End of print
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked 

in procedure 9). ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$˖ ˖'(1&
$˖  %˖ ˖'(1%

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5

'˖ ˖'(1%0)7

(˖ ˖'(1%&6
)˖ ˖'(1%&6

*˖ ˖'(1%&6
B +˖ ˖'(1%&6

,˖ ˖'(1%$'8
-˖ ˖'(1%+9
.˖ ˖08/7,&2817

/˖ ˖3$3(5

(;(&87( 2.

A
2) Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper
in it.
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100  1%, Setting
Display/Item Content Default
repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied. range
A DEN-C Printer lead edge image 1 - 99 30
CAUTION: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simu- position adjustment
lation 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnifica- B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
tion ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100  adjustment
1.0%) and the specified resolution is obtained based on C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20
the optical system structure. adjustment
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 57
area adjustment correction
value
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 57
adjustment correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 57
adjustment correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 57
adjustment correction value
I DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void area 1 - 99 60
adjustment correction value

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 15

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Setting
Display/Item Content
range
Default
ADJ 8 Image density adjustment
J DENB-HV Heavy paper correction 1 - 99 50
value Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
L PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-5 1 2 (CS1) 0326FC11), and check that they are proper.
selection paper feed Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density
CS1 Tray 1 2 To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ).
CS2 Tray 2 3 Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo
CS3 Tray 3 4 mode (Manual).
CS4 Tray 4 5
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustment
M DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
mode must be set to the default (center).
NO selection No 1
Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
The adjustment pattern is printed. the following conditions.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment CAUTION: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to check.
in the standard adjustment value range.
(Black-and-white copy)
Standard adjustment value: 4.0mm or less
Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

Patch 3 is copied.

Patch 1 is not copied.

4.0mm or less

If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.

5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
ment item DENC with the scroll key.
6) Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
[EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
by about 0.1mm.
Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 16

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Monochrome copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
1) There are 12 void areas.
2) The resolution of 4.0 (5 points) can be seen.
3) The density difference between the F and the R sides is not so great.
4) There are no white and black streaks.
5) The background density is not so light.
6) The black low-density gradation is copied slightly.

Void Void

Resolution Resolution

Density difference between the F and the R sides.

No white and black streaks

Resolution

Void Void

Low-density gradation

Background density

Resolution Resolution

Void Void

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 17

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
8-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment,
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: [EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
* When the CCD unit is replaced. [EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.
* When a U2 trouble is occurred.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. 

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6(77+(&+$5721'63)$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
(1) Note before adjustment
• Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens sur-
face are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
• Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of the
SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are free from
dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.

(2) Adjustment procedures
(;(&87(

1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to

the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu- NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC
ment table. Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet
rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature
the left side.
and low humidity.

If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
CAUTION: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the docu-
ment table.
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 18

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 8-B Copy / Image send / FAX image quality
adjustment (Individual adjustment)
a. General
This is used to execute a fine adjustment in each mode when there is a request from the user. Normally, however, there is no need to use it.
In this adjustment, the adjustment result may be applied to the image send mode and the FAX mode as well as the copy mode.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.

Copy MODE IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODE

Monochrome mode Color mode Monochrome mode
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
46-02 Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each   — — — — — —
monochrome copy mode) (separately for the low-
density area and the high-density area)
(No need to adjust normally)
46-04 Color image send mode image density adjustment — —   — — — —
(for each mode)
(No need to adjust normally)
46-05 Monochrome image send mode image density — — — —   — —
adjustment (for each mode)
(No need to adjust normally)
46-08 Image send mode RGB color balance adjustment — —   — — — —
(separately for the low-density area and the high-
density area)
(No need to adjust normally)
46-09 RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment        —
(No need to adjust normally)
46-19 Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode  — — —  —  —
document density scanning operation (exposure
operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
46-32 Document low density image density reproduction  — — —  —  —
adjustment in the automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/
FAX) mode (No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
46-37 Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document   — —    —
reproduction adjustment
(No need to adjust normally)
46-39 FAX send image sharpness adjustment — — — — — —  —
46-40 FAX send image density adjustment — — — — — —  —
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)
46-41 FAX send image density adjustment (Normal text mode) — — — — — —  —
46-42 FAX send image density adjustment (Fine text mode) — — — — — —  —
46-43 FAX send image density adjustment (Super fine mode) — — — — — —  —
46-44 FAX send image density adjustment (Ultra fine mode) — — — — — —  —
46-45 FAX send image density adjustment (600dpi mode) — — — — — —  —
46-47 Copy image, image send image, FAX send image        —
(JPEG) compression ratio setting
(Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
46-60 Color (Scan) mode sharpness adjustment — —  — — — — 
(No need to adjust normally)
46-61 Area separation recognition level adjustment       — —
(No need to adjust normally) (*1) (*1) (*1)
46-62 ACS, area separation, background image process, — —     — —
automatic exposure mode operation conditions setting
(Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
46-63 Scan low density image density adjustment (for each — —     — —
mode)
(No need to adjust normally)

*1: Text Printed Photo / Copy document, Text Printed Photo only

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 19

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
8-B (1)
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
Monochrome copy density adjustment "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
(for each monochrome copy mode) ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
(separately for the low-density area and the mode and change the adjustment value.
high-density area) When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
(No need to adjust normally) increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
density is decreased.
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually.
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the test mode
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
density and high density part at each copy density individually.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the test
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the
copy by each the copy mode individually.
copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the
copy mode individually.
* When there is request from the user. 8-B (2)
1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode. Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)


mode document density scanning
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( operation (exposure operation) conditions
setting (Normally no need to set)
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
$˖ ˖$872
$˖  %˖ ˖$872
Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;7
'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.
(˖ ˖7(;73+272
When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272

*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
ment, change the setting.
+˖ ˖0$3 This setting is required in the following cases.
* When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
automatic copy mode.
* When a document with images near its lead edge is copied.
/2: +,*+ 2.
* When a document with colored background is copied.
㪈㪇㪄㫂㪼㫐 1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode.

OK 
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$(
$(B02'( ˖ 02'( 02'(

 $(B6723B&23< ˖
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
7(67 &/26(
$(B6723B)$; ˖ 2)) 21
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
$(B6723B6&$1 ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$˖ ˖$872
$˖  %˖ ˖$872
$(B),/7(5 ˖ 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
$(B:,'7+ ˖ )8// 3$57
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;7
'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272

(˖ ˖7(;73+272
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272

*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+

+˖ ˖0$3



2) Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE

/2: +,*+ 2.
STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below.
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or
"PART", in some cases.
Setting
Display/Item Content Default
range Display/Item Content Set value Default
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50 AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE2
HIGH 1 - 99 50 AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50 Stop (for copy) STOP/PRESCAN
HIGH 1 - 99 50 AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON
ON/OFF
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 Stop (for FAX)
HIGH 1 - 99 50 AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 Stop (for scanner) STOP/PRESCAN
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 SHARP
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL PART
HIGH 1 - 99 50 PART
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
NOTE:
HIGH 1 - 99 50
MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 MODE2: Normal gamma

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 20

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 STOP:
Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of document, 8-B (3)
decides the output image density according to the density of that Document low density image density
part. (The output image density is constant at whole area.) reproduction adjustment in the automatic
REALTIME: monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
Reads the density of width of the document one by one, decides (No need to adjust normally) (Background
the output image density according to the density of each part of
density adjustment in the scanning section)
the document. (The output image density may be not constant at
whole area.) Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
density in monochrome auto copy mode.
PRESCAN:
Once the densities on the document surface are scanned, the out- This adjustment is required in the following cases.
put image density is determined according to the average of the * When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
scanned densities. (The output image density is even for all the document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
surface.) image of the document.
AE WIDTH FULL: * When there is request from the user.
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7 1) Enter the SIM 46-32 mode.
mm (leading edge of document) x Document width. No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE 

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
AE WIDTH PART: 7(67 &/26(
㩷/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7 $˖ ˖&23<˖2&
$˖ 
mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relationship %˖ ˖&23<˖563)

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1˖2&

to PRESCAN MODE '˖ ˖6&$1˖563)

Operation in monochrome auto copy mode: (˖ ˖)$;˖2&

)˖ ˖)$;˖563)
When the density of the document of the read area is light, output
image density is increased by control. When the density of the doc-
ument of the read area is dark, output image density is decreased
by control.

Document table/RSPF mode

2.

3 to 7mm
10-key

OK



AE WIDTH = FULL ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
$˖ ˖&23<˖2&
$˖  %˖ ˖&23<˖563)

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1˖2&

'˖ ˖6&$1˖563)

(˖ ˖)$;˖2&
)˖ ˖)$;˖563)

Document table mode

3 to 7mm

2.
100mm

2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.

AE WIDTH = PART
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
ground and the low density image is decreased.

RSPF mode Display/Item Content Set value Default

A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
3 to 7mm B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196

100mm AE WIDTH = PART

Document density detection area

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 21

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
8-B (4)
Copy/Scan low density image density Display/Item Content
Set
Default
adjustment (for each mode) value
A COLOR COPY : Text print (color copy) 1-9 3
(No need to adjust normally) (Effective only TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
for the color scan function) B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den- C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
sity area in the scanner mode. PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
image of the document. F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
* When there is request from the user. G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode. (color copy)
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5

 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text print (color copy)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( (COPY TO COPY)
%*5(029($'-8670(17 I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, Text 1-9 5
$˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
$˖ (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
 %˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272 J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5

'˖ ˖&2/25&23<3+272*5$3+ PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo
(˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;73+272 (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<0$3
K COLOR PUSH : TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3
*˖ ˖&2/25&23</,*+7
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
+˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
,˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23< L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
-˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23< M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5
.˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
/˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7
N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5
2.
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
10-key O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
OK P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5

* Items A - J are not used. (Changes do not affect the picture


 quality.)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
7(67
%*5(029($'-8670(17

$˖
$˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
 %˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272

background and the low density image is increased. When the
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<3+272*5$3+ adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
(˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;73+272 ground and the low density image is decreased.
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<0$3

*˖ ˖&2/25&23</,*+7

+˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<

,˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<

-˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<

.˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272

/˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7

2.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 22

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
8-B (5)
Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color Display/Item
Content
Adjustment
Default
document reproduction adjustment (Copy mode) range
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 63
(No need to adjust normally)
B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 877
Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow
image when printing color document that included the red/yellow 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
image in monochrome copy mode. When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased,
This adjustment is required in the following cases. copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment
* When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
image in case of making a color copy of the color document in When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased,
monochrome copy mode. copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment
* When there is request from the user. value is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased.
1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode. 4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode

 (manual), check the copy.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37
$˖ ˖55DWLR
$˖  %˖ ˖*5DWLR
mode and change the adjustment value.
˷̚˹
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

8-B (6)
RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following
10-key
cases, make changes to the setting:
DEFAULT
OK * When copy in RSPF mode differs from copy in document table
mode.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* When copy density in RSPF mode is low or too high.
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$˖ ˖55DWLR
* When the RSPF unit is replaced.
$˖  %˖ ˖*5DWLR
* When the RSPF unit is disassembled.
˷̚˹

* The CCD unit has been replaced.

* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
a. Adjustment procedure
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( 1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode.

EXECUTE NO 

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)

 $˖ ˖&23<˖/2:
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( $˖  %˖ ˖6&$1˖/2:
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
˷̚˹ C˖ ˖)$;˖/2:
$˖ ˖55DWLR
$˖ D˖ ˖&23<˖+,*+
 %˖ ˖*5DWLR
(˖ ˖6&$1˖+,*+
˷̚˹
F˖ ˖)$;˖+,*+

2.

'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

10-key
YES
OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 

$˖ ˖55DWLR ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$˖  %˖ ˖*5DWLR (;32685($'-8670(1763)

˷̚˹ $˖ ˖&23<˖/2:

$˖  %˖ ˖6&$1˖/2:

˷̚˹ C˖ ˖)$;˖/2:

D˖ ˖&23<˖+,*+

(˖ ˖6&$1˖+,*+
F˖ ˖)$;˖+,*+

'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

2.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 23

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 1) Enter the SIM 40-2 mode.
When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY
LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part, select "D 

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(COPY HIGH)". %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17

Setting 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

Item/Display Content Default

range
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (High density side) (;(&87(

E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53

adjustment (Low density side) EXECUTE
F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (High density side)


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
In case of increase of image density, input large numeric (;(&87,1*
value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small
numeric value.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy in the RSPF mode and check the copy.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-9 mode
and change the adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
(;(&87(

ADJ 9 Paper size sensor adjustment ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12

7(67


&/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
3$5326,7,21$'-8670(17

9-A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

sensor adjustment
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. (;(&87(

EXECUTE

Repeat the above procedure to adjust

the A5R width MIN POSITION.



ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&203/(7(

(;(&87(

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 24

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion. 9-B RSPF paper feed tray document size (width)
sensor adjustment
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The RSPF paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The RSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced.
1) Enter the SIM 53-6 mode.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)75$<$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17

35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

3) Press [EXECUTE] key.

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (;(&87(

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal

display. 2) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
The A4R size width position detection level of the manual tion.
paper feed guide is recognized.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis-
played.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
The maximum width detection level is recognized.
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
4) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
6) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The A5R width detection level is recognized.
8) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
When each of the above operations has been completed, the
"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations has
failed, the "ERROR" message appears.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 25

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 ADJ 10 Document size detection 10-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
sensor
adjustment 1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the original size sensor section has been disassembled. 
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* When the original size sensor section has been replaced. '2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783

* When U2 trouble has occurred. :,7+7+(25,*,1$/&29(523(1('7851217+((;(&87(

.(<:,7+7+(25,*,1$/217+(25,*,1$/7$%/(

* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.

* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.

10-A Document size sensor detection point

adjustment
1) Enter the SIM 41-1 mode.
(;(&87(


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
EXECUTE
3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6: 3' 3' 3'
3' 3' 3' 3'

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
6(7$1$6,=(h&23<3$3(5217+(25,*,1$/7$%/(
$1':,7+7+(2&23(1('7851217+((;(&87(.(<



(;(&87(
Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw
and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is Adjustment
returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit failed
Adjustment completed EXECUTE
top from the table glass is 20.2  0.25mm by slowly tilting the
document detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust. 
(If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the doc- ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
ument detection function may malfunction.) '2&80(176,=(3+2726(1625/(9(/,6$'-867('

(;(&87(


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
20.2 0.25mm 3+2726(1625(5525326,7,21
3'3'3'3'3'3'3'

(;(&87(

2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.

With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZE
PHOTO SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 26

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 ADJ 11 Touch panel coordinate setting ADJ 12 Print image position, void area,
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: off-center adjustment (Print
* The operation panel has been replaced. engine) (Manual adjustment)
* U2 trouble has occurred. NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automatic
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. adjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this
1) Enter the SIM 65-1 mode. adjustment.
In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a
satisfactory result is not obtained from the automatic
adjustment (ADJ 3).

12-A Print image print area adjustment

(Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis- * When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen. * When the registration roller section is disassembled.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen * U2 trouble has occurred.
again. * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is 1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode.
pressed.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such 
as a needle or a pin).
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783

$˖ ˖0$,10)7
$˖
 %˖ ˖0$,1&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6

)˖ ˖0$,1$'8
*˖ ˖68%0)7

+˖ ˖68%&6
,˖ ˖68%'6.

-˖ ˖68%$'8

.˖ ˖08/7,&2817

/˖ ˖3$3(5&6

(;(&87( 2.

EXECUTE EXECUTE

End of print


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783

$˖ ˖0$,10)7
$˖
 %˖ ˖0$,1&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6

(˖ ˖0$,1&6

)˖ ˖0$,1$'8
*˖ ˖68%0)7

+˖ ˖68%&6

,˖ ˖68%'6.
-˖ ˖68%$'8

.˖ ˖08/7,&2817

/˖ ˖3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.

2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5") paper to all the paper feed trays. Select an
adjustment item of the target paper feed tray among items A -
J and enter the adjustment value. Then select item "L" to
select the paper feed tray which is to be used for executing
test printing.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 27

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below 6) Select an adjustment item (DENA, DENB, FRONT/REAR) with
are in the range of the standard values. the scroll key, enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key.

Content Standard adjustment value Setting Default

Item/Display Content
X Lead edge void area 4.0mm or less range value
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0  2.0mm adjustment adjustment
DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
Z1
FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
2.0 2.0mm
REAR area adjustment
Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 57
scanning correction value
direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction value 1 - 99 50
print area DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction value 1 - 99 57
correction DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction value 1 - 99 57
value
DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction value 1 - 99 57
X
DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 60
4.0mm or less Y DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
2.0 - 5.0mm correction value

When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.
NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related
Z2 as follows:
2.0 2.0mm Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area

If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired

condition, execute the simulation 50-1. NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item
NOTE: Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.
(DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.
5) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode.
The adjustment item (DENB) have a effect on the paper of all
paper feed tray.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( That is, adjustment value of item (DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖55&$
adjustment item (DENB) for each paper tray.
$˖  %˖ ˖55&%&6 After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%'6.
check that the void area is within the specified range.
'˖ ˖55&%0)7
(˖ ˖55&%$'8 Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if
)˖ ˖/($' the lead edge void area is not within the specified range,
*˖ ˖6,'(
change the adjustment value of item (RRCB-XXX) in SIM 50-1.
+˖ ˖'(1$
,˖ ˖'(1% Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
-˖ ˖)52175($5
.˖ ˖2))6(7B2&

/˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B2& 12-B Print image off-center adjustment

2.
(Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
10-key
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
OK
* When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
$˖ ˖55&$
$˖  %˖ ˖55&%&6 * When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%'6.
'˖ ˖55&%0)7
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
(˖ ˖55&%$'8 * U2 trouble has occurred.
)˖ ˖/($'

*˖ ˖6,'(
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
+˖ ˖'(1$ * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
,˖ ˖'(1%
-˖ ˖)52175($5
.˖ ˖2))6(7B2&

/˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B2&

2.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 28

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 1) Enter SIM 50-10 mode. 6) Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
[EXECUTE] key.
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783

$˖ ˖0$,10)7
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
$˖
 %˖ ˖0$,1&6 printed.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
(˖ ˖0$,1&6 tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
)˖ ˖0$,1$'8
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
*˖ ˖68%0)7

+˖ ˖68%&6 When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
,˖ ˖68%'6.
changed by about 0.1mm.
-˖ ˖68%$'8

.˖ ˖08/7,&2817 Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5)

/˖ ˖3$3(5&6
are satisfied.
(;(&87( 2.

In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating

the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
7) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
End of print pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,
and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direc-

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783

$˖ ˖0$,10)7
$˖
 %˖ ˖0$,1&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6

(˖ ˖0$,1&6

)˖ ˖0$,1$'8
*˖ ˖68%0)7

+˖ ˖68%&6

,˖ ˖68%'6.
-˖ ˖68%$'8

.˖ ˖08/7,&2817

/˖ ˖3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.

2) Select the target paper feed tray (MAIN-XX) with the scroll key.

Display/Item Content Setting range

NO Not select 1

3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
cedure 2).
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
rect position.
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
all the following conditions are satisfied.

RV
2.0mm 2.0mm
NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automatic
adjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this
adjustment.
In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a
satisfactory result is not obtained from the automatic
adjustment (ADJ 3).

FV
2.0mm 2.0mm

RV: REAR VOID AREA

FV: FRONT VOID AREA
RV + FV  4.0mm
RV = 2.0  2.0mm
FV = 2.0  2.0mm
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 29

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
ADJ 13 Scan image magnification ratio Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
adjustment copy mode, and make a copy.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
(Manual adjustment) range (100  1.0%).
NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automatic If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
adjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.  1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
adjustment. procedure.
In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a 5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
satisfactory result is not obtained from the automatic When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
adjustment (ADJ 3). tion ratio is increased.
CAUTION: If the default adjustment value of the scan image magni- When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
fication ration adjustment (main scanning direction) of cation ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
SIM 48-1, copy image quality may be degraded. There- Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
fore, this adjustment must be executed only when there is within the specified range (100  1.0%).
is a special necessity.
13-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
13-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual
(main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
adjustment) (Document table mode) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image sub scan-
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan- ning direction is not properly adjusted.
ning direction is not properly adjusted. * When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When the scanner motor is replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred.
* U2 trouble has occurred. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced. 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing below.
position adjustment) must have been completed.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.

2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.



ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(

2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17

$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖  %˖ ˖&&'68%

 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( '˖  ˖63)68%
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
(˖  ˖63)%0$,1
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
)˖  ˖63)%68%
$˖  %˖ ˖&&'68%

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1

'˖  ˖63)68%

(˖  ˖63)%0$,1

)˖  ˖63)%68%

2.

2.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 30

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. 2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
Go to the copy mode, and make a copy. 3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
images.
Copy magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension)
cation ratio 100%
Original dimension
original
(Example 1)
Copy A
(Shorter than
the original)
10 20 90 100 110
copy
10 50 100 150 200 250

Scale 10 50 100 150 200 250

(Original) 10 20 90 100 110

4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following

formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(Example 2) (%)
Copy B
10 20 90 100 110
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
(Longer than
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
the original)
(100  0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified cedures.
range (100  1.0%). 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification 

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following 7(67
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
&/26(

procedure. $˖ ˖&&'0$,1

$˖ 
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. %˖ ˖&&'68%

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1

When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica- '˖  ˖63)68%

tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased. (˖  ˖63)%0$,1

)˖  ˖63)%68%
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.

Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is

within the specified range (100  1.0%).
2.

13-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment RSPF

(main scanning direction)
Setting Default
(Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) Item Display Content
range value
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.
adjustment (CCD)
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
* When U2 trouble occurs. magnification ratio
* When the copy magnification ratio of the RSPF mode copy adjustment (CCD)
image in the main scanning direction is not proper. C SPF(MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
* When the RSPF is disassembled. adjustment (Main scan)
a. Adjustment procedures D SPF(SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu- adjustment (Sub scan)
ment tray of the RSPF. E SPFB(MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. surface magnification ratio
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and adjustment (Main scan)
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
Paper pass direction
A4 size 6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with
the scroll key.

SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio

(Front surface)
SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Both the front surface
and the back surface) (Back surface)
10mm 10mm

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 31

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed 

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02%. 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17

8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. $˖

$˖ ˖&&'0$,1

 %˖ ˖&&'68%

Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1

obtained. '˖  ˖63)68%

(˖  ˖63)%0$,1

)˖  ˖63)%68%

13-D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(sub scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (RSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced. 2.

* When the EEPROM on the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.

* When U2 trouble occurs. Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
* When the copy magnification ratio of the RSPF mode copy
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
image in the sub scanning direction is not proper.
magnification ratio
* When the RSPF is disassembled. adjustment (CCD)
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu- B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
ment tray of the RSPF. magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
C SPF(MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and surface magnification ratio
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. adjustment (Main scan)
D SPF(SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
10mm surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
Paper pass direction E SPFB(MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
A4 size surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)

6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.

10mm SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio

(Front surface)
SPFB (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. (Back surface)
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original 7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-
images. key, and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
tion ratio is increased.
10

When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magni-

50

fication ratio is changed by 0.1%.

8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
100
10

Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is

obtained.
original
150
50

200
100

copy
150
200

4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following

formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
(100  0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 32

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3) Enter the SIM 50-12 mode.
ADJ 14 Scan image off-center


adjustment ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(

(Manual adjustment)
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖2&
$˖  %˖ ˖63)6,'(
NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automatic ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)6,'(

adjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.

Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this
adjustment.
In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a
satisfactory result is not obtained from the automatic
adjustment (ADJ 3).
2.
14-A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual
adjustment) (Document table mode) 4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. The entered value is set.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi-
* When a U2 trouble occurs. tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. 6) Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. Repeat the procedures of 1) - 6) until the above condition is satis-
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the fied.
adjustment mode (document table).
14-B Scan image off-center adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
A * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
A=B * When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the RSPF section is disassembled.
B
* When the RSPF unit is replaced.
CAUTION: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ
14A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table
mode) must have been properly adjusted.
2) Check the copy image center position. 1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
If A - B =  1.0mm, the adjustment is not required. Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur-
face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport
direction.

Paper transport direction

A'
Front surface Back surface

A' - B' = 1.0mm

(100%)

B'

If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedures. Draw a line at the center of the
front surface and the back surface
of paper in parallel with the paper
transport direction.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 33

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2) Set the adjustment chart to the RSPF. SIM50-6
3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the Setting Default
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the Item/Display Content
range value
front surface and the back surface of the copy paper. A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position adjustment
original copy (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
a document scan
position adjustment
(CCD)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
b amount amount setting
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount
setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
(SIDE1) edge image loss
If the difference is within the range of 0  2.7mmm there is no
amount setting
need to perform the adjustment.
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures. loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode. amount amount setting
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIM50-12 SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount

 setting
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂ
7(67 12 &/26( H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 40
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783 (SIDE2) edge image loss
$˖ ˖2&
$˖ amount setting
 %˖ ˖63)6,'(

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)6,'(

I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
front surface
magnification ratio
2.
adjustment (Sub
scan)
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
SIM50-6
back surface
 magnification ratio
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( adjustment (Sub
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
scan)
$˖ ˖6,'(
$˖
 %˖ ˖6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'( * Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
'˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'( timing is delayed.
(˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
)˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
*˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'( image loss is increased.
+˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
,˖ ˖2))6(7B63)

-˖ ˖2))6(7B63) * The SPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for
.˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
countermeasures against the case when shades are
produced.
/˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
2.

5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.

SIM50-12 SIM50-12

Setting Default SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode

Item Display Content SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode
range value
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50 SIM50-6
center adjustment
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50 OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode
center adjustment OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50 6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
center adjustment
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image (When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is
position is shifted to the rear frame side. shifted to the rear.)
1step = 0.1mm Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 34

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode.
ADJ 15 Copy image position and image

loss adjustment ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(

(Manual adjustment) /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(

$˖ ˖55&$
$˖  %˖ ˖55&%&6
NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automatic ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%'6.

adjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment. '˖ ˖55&%0)7

(˖ ˖55&%$'8
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this )˖ ˖/($'
adjustment. *˖ ˖6,'(

In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a +˖ ˖'(1$

,˖ ˖'(1%
satisfactory result is not obtained from the automatic -˖ ˖)52175($5

adjustment (ADJ 3). .˖ ˖2))6(7B2&

/˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B2&

2.
15-A Copy image position, image loss, and void
area adjustment (Manual adjustment) 10-key
(Document table mode) OK
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. 
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. $˖ ˖55&$
$˖ 
* When the registration roller section is disassembled. %˖ ˖55&%&6

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%'6.

* U2 trouble has occurred. '˖ ˖55&%0)7

(˖ ˖55&%$'8
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. )˖ ˖/($'

* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. *˖ ˖6,'(

+˖ ˖'(1$
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. ,˖ ˖'(1%

* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. -˖ ˖)52175($5
.˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that /˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B2&

the ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image position, image 2.

magnification ratio, void area adjustments has been com-

pleted normally. 3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
Setting Default
below. Item/Display Content
range value
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide edge edge reference
plate. adjust- position (OC)
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead B ment RRCB-CS12 Regis- Standard 1 - 99 50
edge can be seen. value tration Tray
C RRCB-DSK motor Desk 1 - 99 50
D RRCB-MFT ON Manual 1 - 99 50
timing paper feed
E adjust- ADU 1 - 99 50
RRCB-ADU ment
F Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
loss area loss area setting
G setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
value area adjustment
H Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 30
adjust- area adjustment
I ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
J FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR area adjustment
K Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment
ment
L Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio
ratio adjustment (CCD)
correction
M Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 57
scanning correction value
N direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
O correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 57
value value
P DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 57
value

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 35

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Setting Default
Item/Display Content 15-B Image scanning position adjustment
range value
Q Sub DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 57 (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
scanning value This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
R direction DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 60 * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
print area value
correction * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
S DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
value correction value * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
Shift to the copy mode, and make a copy at each of 100% and
200% in the document table mode. * When the RSPF section is disassembled.
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge * When the RSPF unit is replaced.
image from 4.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200% This simulation is to adjust the scanning position when scanning in
copy scale. the RSPF mode.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value. If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position is
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 4.0mm is not copied shifted from the specified position and a shade of the document
in either of different copy magnification ratios.) table may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image
in the RSPF mode.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained. 1) Make a copy in the RSPF mode, and check for any shade on
the lead edge section of the copy image.
Scale image 4.0mm position
Paper lead
edge
Papar lead edge


Image area
100%
5mm

Shadow image of RSPF

200%
5mm 10mm

If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge

section of the copy image, perform the following procedures.
5) Image loss adjustment
2) Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key.
When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in 

the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value, ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
change these adjustment items. $872 0$18$/

Paper lead edge

Copy area
Maginification ratio : 400%

1 2 3 4
5mm 10mm


3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.

Void area: 4.0mm, Image loss: 4.0mm When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
position to the RSPF scanning position is increased. When the
De- Standard
Item/
Content
Adjustment
fault adjustment
set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is changed by
Display range 0.1mm.
value value
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 40 4.0 Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
adjustment image loss  1.0mm obtained.
adjustment
CAUTION: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute
SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0
loss  1.0mm
ADJ 15C Copy image position, image loss, void area
adjustment adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode).

When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 36

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2) Enter the SIM 50-6 mode.
15-C Copy image position, image loss, void area
adjustment (Manual adjustment) 
(RSPF mode) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
&/26(

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: $˖

$˖ ˖6,'(

 %˖ ˖6,'(
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(

* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. '˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(

(˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(

* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. )˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(

* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. *˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(

+˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(

* When U2 trouble occurs. ,˖ ˖2))6(7B63)

-˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
* When the RSPF section is disassembled. .˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)

* When the RSPF unit is replaced. /˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)

2.
a. Adjustment procedures
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
Setting Default
The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce- Item/Display Content
range value
dures.
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and document scan
horizontally on the front and the back surfaces. position
At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge, adjustment (CCD)
the front end, and the rear end as well as the identification B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
marks of the front surface and the back surface.
position
adjustment (CCD)
R Front surface
FACE C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount amount setting
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
L T SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount
setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
Put the position (SIDE1) edge image loss
marks. amount setting
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
F loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
amount amount setting
Draw arrows. G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount
R Back surface setting
BACK
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 40
(SIDE2) edge image loss
amount setting
L
I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
T
document off-
center adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back 1 - 99 50
Put the position surface document
marks. off-center
adjustment
F K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
front surface
Draw arrows. magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub
scan)
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
back surface
magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub
scan)

* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan

timing is delayed.
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
image loss is increased.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
* The RSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for coun-
termeasures against the case when shades are produced.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 37

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Lead edge image loss adjustment 2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2)
1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
(SIDE1/SIDE2) on the front surface and the back surface to TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1):
the following values. Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
(Standard set value) TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2):
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1): Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
40 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface) (When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2): loss is increased.)
40 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface) (Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
increased.) obtained.
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step) Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment
2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to 1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to
confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 4.0  1.0mm on confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and the
the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead edge rear frame side are 2.0  2.0mm on the front surface and the
must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge. back surface.

Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be aligned with Paper F Image loss
the image lead edge. side edge 2.0 2.0mm

Copy image

Copy image

Copy image

Paper R Image loss

Image loss
4.0 1.0mm side edge 2.0 2.0mm

If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedure. procedure.
3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and 2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) /
press [OK] key. FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key.
Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre- FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1):
sumed image lead edge. Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2):
SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi- (When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image
tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.) loss is increased.)
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step) (Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
Perform the procedures of 2) - 3) until a satisfactory result is Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
obtained. obtained.

Rear edge image loss adjustment

1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to
confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the
front surface and the back surface.

Paper rear edge

Copy image

Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm

If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedure.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 38

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 ADJ 16 Finisher adjustments
(alignment, staple position)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the finisher is disassembled.
* When the finisher control PWB is replaced.
* When the alignment is improper.
* When the staple position is shifted.
1) Enter the SIM 3-10 mode.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),1,6+(5$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖)3$0$'-867
$˖  %˖ ˖)'5/0$'-867

˷̚˹

2.

2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.

Inner finisher
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A FPAM ADJUST Alignment width adjustment 40 - 60 50
B FDRLM ADJUST Paper exit roller descending 40 - 60 50
position adjustment

3) Enter an adjustment value and press [OK] key.

4) Cancel the simulation, make a copy in the mode including the
adjustment target, and check the adjustment result.

MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 39

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 [6] SIMULATION
MX-M264U
Service Manual

1. General and purpose

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes
in an earlier stage, and to efficiently setup and adjust the machine
for improved serviceability.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear.
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transport.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine.

2. Starting the simulation

Entering the simulation mode
1) Machine in Copy mode: Select Program key  Asterisk (*) key
 Clear key  Asterisk (*) key  Ready for input of main
code of simulation.
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key  START key ON.
Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel.
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key  START key ON.
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu-
lation operation.
To cancel the current simulation mode and change the main
code and the sub code, press [SYSTEM SETTING] key.

Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

1) Press [CA] key.

CAUTION: Do not turn OFF the power when the machine is in the
simulation mode.
If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simula-
tion mode, a malfunction may be result. In this case,
turn OFF/ON the main power source.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 1
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 START (Copy mode)

Press the Program key.

Press the asterisk (*) key.

Press the clear key.

Press the Program key.

Standby for entry of Press the SYSTEM

SIM code. SETTINGS key

Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.

The main code of SIM

is displayed.
NO

Press the START key.

YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
YES
In the power OFF/ON type
Standby for entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
Is there a sub code ?
sub code You have to exit message is
simulation mode Press the SYSTEM displayed by the
NO before entering into SETTINGS key SYSTEM
Enter SIM sub code with
this mode for self YES
SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
NO
Press the START key. item with the scroll key to perform another
and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE key
Operation check ?
and OK key.

NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?

YES Press the EXECUTE key

Operating conditions
check ? and OK key.

NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.

YES Press the EXECUTE key

Data clear ?
and OK key.

NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.

YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)

The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.

Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE key

adjustment values. and OK key.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 2
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. RSPF
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic document feeder section RSPF
and the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. RSPF
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk, and the control circuit of those. Desk
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk, and the control circuit of those. Desk
5 Used to check the operations of the paper feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC). Desk
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the Paper transport/Paper exit section
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others
90 Used to reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position) Scanner
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) RSPF
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control Process (Developing)
circuit.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the Process (Charging)
control circuit.
6 Used to check the output of the transfer charger output voltage. Process (Transport)
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) Duplex
and its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control circuit. Duplex
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Process (Developing)
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
14 - Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 troubles.
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)
2 Used to check the total number of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version, and
the counter list.
8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX
12 Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. RSPF
(When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge) and the Process
fusing unit
14 Used to display the use status of the toner cartridge. Process
18 Used to display the user data delete history.
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
40 Used to display the error code list and the contents.
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed.
(If the number of troubles of misfeed is considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the paper transport section.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 3
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Main Sub Functions Section
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
3 Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
12 Used to clear the document filing counter value.
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
30 Used to initialize the administrator (Admin) password.
31 Used to initialize the service mode password.
35 Used to clear the toner cartridge use status data.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing)
4 Used to display the operation data of the toner correction quantity. (Not used in the market.) Process
26 1 Used to set Yes/No of installation of the job separator. Paper exit
2 Used to set the paper size of the paper feed tray. Paper feed
(When the paper size is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor
(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.)
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards).
(For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)
32 Used to set the special functions.
35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There
are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
50 Used to set functions.
51 Used to set the specifications of the serial port operation. (For PCI)
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
56 Used to set ON/OFF of the Life Correction.
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
73 Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
79 Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display of user data delete result.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) Communication (RIC/MODEM)
(FSS function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry
number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
15 Used to display the FSS connection status.
16 Used to set the FSS alert send.
17 Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
18 Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry counter.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and the
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 4
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Main Sub Functions Section
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
4 Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode.
10 Used to set the postcard feed cycle
20 Used to perform the low-temperature, low-humidity (L/L) environment correction for the fusing temperature
setting of each paper (SIM43-01).
22 Used to perform the low-temperature, low-humidity (L/L) environment correction for the fusing temperature
setting of each paper (SIM43-04).
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum,
development)/Fusing/LSU
43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
46 2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the scan image density.
19 Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode
documents.
30 Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.
32 Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
37 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of monochrome mode color.
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and
the auto exposure mode.
63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner section
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
5 Used to perform the watermark update.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
2 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (This simulation is a simplified version of SIM
50-1.)
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (RSPF mode) RSPF
7 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (RSPF mode). RSPF
(This simulation is a simplified version of SIM 50-6.)
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
51 2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the RSPF
registration roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image
position on the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
9 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the separation voltage.
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the RSPF document size width sensor.
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF mode document scan position.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
10 Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan only)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 5
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Main Sub Functions Section
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SD Card, and HDD (including user authentication data and
address data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
5 Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.
11 Used to save the data in the SD card to the HDD temporarily.
12 Used to copy the SD card data saved temporarily in the HDD with SIM56-11 to the machine.
60 1 Used to check the memory operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power
62 1 Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and the watermark data)
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
8 Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the watermark data, and the system
area)
10 Used to clear the job completion list data.
11 Used to delete the document filing data.
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
13 Used to format the hard disk. (Operation Manual, watermark data only)
14 Used to initialize (remake) only the database file of the HDD. HDD
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading.
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
64 2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation panel section
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
66 1 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while checking FAX
with the LCD.
2 Used to enter a country code and set the default value for the country code. FAX
3 Used to check read/write of the EEPROM and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller and display the result. FAX
4 Used to send the selected signals to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: max.) FAX
5 Used to send the selected signal to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
(For the kinds of send signals, refer to SIM66-04.)
6 Used to print the confidential registration check table (BOX NO., BOX name, passcode. FAX
(If there is no confidential registration, no print is made.)
7 Used to output all image data saved in the image memory. (Confidential data are also outputted.) FAX
8 Used to send the selected sound messages to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
9 Used to send the selected sound message to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For details of sound messages, refer to the sound message table of SIM66-08.
10 Used to clear the FAX and image send image data. (The confidential data are also cleared.) FAX
11 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
12 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps, refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal table.
13 Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be registered.) FAX
14 Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
15 Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
16 Used to execute the DTFM signal send test and to adjust the send level. FAX
17 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
18 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
21 Used to print the selected items (system error, protocol monitor). FAX
22 Used to set the handset sound volume. (This simulation can be executed even though the handset setting FAX
is set to NO. When, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume cannot be checked.)
(Japan model only)
24 Used to clear the FAST save data. FAX
29 Used to initialize the telephone book data (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/Desktop expansion FAX
table, the group expansion table, the program registration table, the interface memory box table, the meta
data, InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table).
30 Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, The display is highlighted by status change. FAX
31 Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to TEL/LIU. FAX
32 Used to check the fixed data received from the line and to display the result. FAX
33 Used to execute detection of various signals with the line connected and to display the detection result. FAX
When a signal is detected, the display is highlighted.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 6
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Main Sub Functions Section
66 34 Used to execute the send test and display the time required for sending image data in the test. Used to FAX
execute send test and display. (Unit: ms)
36 Used to check send and receive data from the MODEM controller to the MFP controller or the data line or FAX
the command line individually.
39 Used to check and change the destination setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX. FAX
42 Used to rewrite the program to power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
43 Used to write the adjustment value into the power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
61 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
62 Used to import the FAX receive data into a USB memory in PDF file type. FAX
67 17 Printer reset Printer
45 Used to adjust the printer image filter and trapping. Printer

4. Details of simulation

1 Item/Display Operation mode Default value

OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(346.0mm/s) (346.0mm/s)
1-1
400DPI 400DPI
Purpose Operation test/check (259.5mm/s)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner 600DPI 600DPI
(173.0mm/s)
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
1200DPI 1200DPI
Section Scanner (reading) (86.5mm/s)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the
scan resolution (operation speed).
2
Item/Display Operation mode Default value 2-1
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
Purpose Operation test/check
(346.0mm/s) (346.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
(259.5mm/s) matic document feeder and the control cir-
600DPI 600DPI cuit.
(173.0mm/s) Section RSPF
1200DPI 1200DPI
Operation/Procedure
(86.5mm/s)
1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1-2 The RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
Purpose Operation test/check ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner ation speed).
(reading) section and the related circuits. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Section Scanner (reading)
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
Operation/Procedure (SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. (259.5mm/s) (259.5mm/s)
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi- 400DPI 400DPI
tion. (259.5mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(173.0 mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
1-5 (259.5mm/s) (259.5mm/s)
Purpose Operation test/check 400DPI 400DPI
(259.5mm/s)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner 600DPI 600DPI
(reading) unit and the control circuit. (173.0 mm/s)
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan
resolution (operation speed).
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 7
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2-2
Purpose Operation test/check 3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and the detectors in the automatic 3-2
document feeder section and the control Purpose Operation test/check
circuits.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
Section RSPF sors and the detectors in the finisher and
Operation/Procedure the control circuit.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- Section Finisher
played. Operation/Procedure
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
are highlighted. played.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
Display Content
are highlighted.
SPED SPF document empty sensor
SPPD1 SPF primary paper transport sensor Inner finisher (MX-FN23)
SPLS1 SPF document length sensor 1
Display Content
SPLS2 SPF document length sensor 2
FAPHPS_F Paper alignment plate HP sensor F
SOCD RSPF open/close sensor
FAPHPS_R Paper alignment plate HP sensor R
SPPD2 SPF secondary paper transport sensor
FDRPS Paper exit roller position sensor
SPPD3 SPF scan front sensor
FDTLLS Paper exit tray lower limit sensor
SPPD4 SPF scan rear sensor
FDTPD Delivery tray paper detector
SCOV RSPF cover open/close detector
FPHPS Punch unit home position sensor
SSET SPF installation detection
FPLD Paper height detector
STMPU SPF stamp UN installation detection
FPLS Paper surface sensor auxiliary detector
SWD_LEN SPF document guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)
FPMRS Punch motor rotation sensor
SWD_AD SPF document detection volume output AD value
FPPD1 Paper entry detector
CAUTION: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display. FPRD Compiler paper rear edge detector C
FSED Staple empty detector
2-3 FSHPS Staple HP sensor
FSLD Staple lead edge detector
Purpose Operation test/check FSSW Safety switch
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads FSTPD Staple tray paper detector
in the automatic document feeder and the FTPS Tray position sensor
control circuit.
Section RSPF 3-3
Operation/Procedure Purpose Operation test/check
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
key. the finisher and the control circuit.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Finisher
The selected load performs the operation.
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
Display Content
SPUM_F RSPF paper feed motor (normal rotation) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
SPUM_R RSPF paper feed motor (reverse rotation) The selected load performs the operation.
SPFM_F RSPF transport motor (normal rotation) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
SPFM_R RSPF transport motor (reverse rotation)
SPRS Pressure release solenoid (RSPF) Inner finisher (MX-FN23)
SRRC Registration roller clutch (RSPF) Display Content
STMPS Stamp solenoid FCF Cooling fan
FDRLM Paper exit roller lift motor
FPAM_F Paper alignment motor F
FPAM_R Paper alignment motor R
FPDM Paper exit motor
FPGS Paper gate solenoid
FPS Paddle solenoid
FPTM Paper transport motor
FSL Illumination of the staple unit
FSM Staple motor
FTLM Tray lift motor

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 8
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Inner finisher (MX-FN23)

Setting Default Change when the adjustment value is Change when the adjustment
Item/Display Content
range value increased or decreased value is changed by 1
A FPAM ADJUST Paper alignment width 40 - 60 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the 0.419mm
adjustment width of the alignment plate F/R during
alignment operation is decreased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the
width of the alignment plate F/R during
alignment operation is increased.
B FDRLM ADJUST Paper exit roller descending 40 - 60 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the 0.13mm
position adjustment descending position of the paper exit roller is
shifted to the compression side.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the
descending position of the paper exit roller is
shifted to the decompression side.

Desk
4 Display Content
CPFM Desk motor
4-2 PTRC1 Desk vertical transport clutch
C3LUM Cassette 3 lift-up motor
Purpose Operation test/check
C3PUC Cassette 3 paper feed clutch
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- C3PUS Cassette 3 paper feed solenoid
sors and detectors in the desk, and the C4LUM Cassette 3 lift-up motor
control circuit of those. C4PUC Cassette 4 paper feed clutch
Section Desk C4PUS Cassette 4 paper feed solenoid
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
4-5
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
are highlighted. Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
Desk
feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC).
Display Content Section Desk
C3PFD Cassette 3 paper entry sensor
Operation/Procedure
C3LUD Cassette 3 paper upper limit sensor
C3PED Cassette 3 paper empty sensor Check the ON operation
C3SS Cassette 3 installation sensor Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation.
DSW_C3 Cassette 3 door open/close sensor Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
C4PFD Cassette 4 paper entry sensor the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
C4LUD Cassette 4 paper upper limit sensor highlighted.
C4PED Cassette 4 paper empty sensor Check the OFF operation
C4SS Cassette 4 installation sensor
Press the highlighted button which is ON.
DSW_C4 Cassette 4 door open/close sensor
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
4-3 display is maintained.
Purpose Operation test/check
Button Content
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
DTRC Desk transport clutch
in the desk, and the control circuit of those.
Section Desk
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 9
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 5-3
5
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
5-1
lamp and the control circuit.
Purpose Operation test/check
Section Scanner (reading)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
Operation/Procedure
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
cuit. 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
Section Operation panel
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
The LCD is changed as shown below.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX 
MIN  the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
checked.
6
SIMULATION NO.05-01
6-1
TEST

Purpose Operation test/check

Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the paper transport system (clutches and
solenoids) and the control circuits.
Section Paper transport/Paper exit section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
TEST
SIMULATION NO.05-01
Load operation check method
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.

Section Item/Display Content

Transport/ MM Main motor
process POM_F*1 Paper exit reverse motor (normal rotation)
POM_R*1 Paper exit reverse motor (reverse
rotation)
OSM Shifter motor
PTRC2 Vertical transport clutch 2CS
RRC PS clutch
PSPS Process separation pawl solenoid
POGS1 Paper exit gate solenoid
5-2 POGS2 Right paper exit keep solenoid
Purpose Operation test/check Paper feed C1LUM Cassette 1 lift-up motor
C1PUC Cassette 1 paper feed clutch
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
C1PUS Cassette 1 paper feed solenoid
lamp and the control circuit.
C2LUM Cassette 2 lift-up motor
Section Fusing C2PUC Cassette 2 paper feed clutch
Operation/Procedure C2PUS Cassette 2 paper feed solenoid
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel MPFS Manual feed take-up solenoid
key.
*1: If "Normal rotation" and "Reverse rotation" of a same load are
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. displayed as different items, when the both are selected at the
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF. same time, "Normal rotation" is performed. In addition, a
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. change in the rotating direction is accepted only when the
operation is stopped.
HL_UM Main heater lamp (F) (Paper surface heat roller)
HL_US Sub heater lamp (F) (Paper surface heat roller)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 10
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 6-2 7-6
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging
motor and its control circuit. cycle.
Section Others Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel 1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
key. key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [OK] key.
The selected load performs the operation. The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. * The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
Load operation check method The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
7-8
Display Content
POFM Paper exit cooling fan motor
Purpose Operation display
(Drives POFM1 and POFM2 at the same time.) Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Section
FUFM Fusing fan motor
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key.
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
6-90 warm-up is displayed
Purpose Setting * Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the machine to the factory
setting. (The scanner is set to the lock
enable position) 7-12
Section Scanner Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. setting (for aging operation)
The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped. Section RSPF
Operation/Procedure
1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
7 (Setting range: 0 - 255)
2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
7-1 The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
Purpose Setting after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
aging.
Section Others
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.

AGING Aging operation setup

INTERVAL Intermittent operation setting
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection ignoring setting
FUSING DISABLE Fusing unit ignoring setting
WARMUP DISABLE Warming up ignoring setting
DV CHECK DISABLE Developing unit ignoring setting
SHADING DISABLE Shading correction operation omitting setting
CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment omitting setting

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 11
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 8
8-1 8-2
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the developing voltage in each print mode the main charger grid voltage in each
and the control circuit. printer mode and the control circuit.
Section Process (Developing) Section Process (Charging)
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select a mode with [TS_OFF] and [TS_ON] keys on the touch 1) Select a mode with [TS_OFF] and [TS_ON] keys on the touch
panel. panel.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys. 2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified
label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.) on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec. output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.

Adjustment Default Adjustment Default

Item/Display (Mode) Content Item/Display (Mode) Content
range value range value
TS_OFF A COPY Developing bias 0 - 650 450 TS_OFF A COPY Charging/grid 0 - 750 590
DVB set value in a GB bias set value in
copy job (Toner a copy job (Toner
save mode OFF) save mode OFF)
B PRINTER Developing bias 0 - 650 450 B PRINTER Charging/grid 0 - 750 590
FAX DVB set value in a FAX GB bias set value in
PRINT/FAX job a PRINT/FAX job
(Toner save (Toner save
mode OFF) mode OFF)
TS_ON A COPY Developing bias 0 - 650 320 TS_ON A COPY Charging/grid 0 - 750 460
DVB set value in a GB bias set value in
copy job (Toner a copy job (Toner
save mode ON) save mode ON)
B PRINTER Developing bias 0 - 650 250 B PRINTER Charging/grid 0 - 750 390
DVB set value in a GB bias set value in
print job (Toner a print job (Toner
save mode ON) save mode ON)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 12
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 8-6
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output of the transfer
charger output voltage.
Section Process (Transport)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.

Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content 26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
range
machine machine machine
A +V1 F Transfer Standard W Between Single A-1: W, +V1 F (Between 0 - 255 5 5 5
bias paper papers papers), Standard paper
reference front surface
value (Single/Duplex)
B +V1 R Duplex A-2: W, +V1 R (Between 0 - 255 5 5 5
papers), Standard paper
back surface (Duplex)
C +V2 F Paper Single A-3: W, +V2 F, Standard 0 - 255 14 18 20
paper front surface
(Single/Duplex)
D +V2 R Duplex A-4: W, +V2 R, Standard 0 - 255 12 16 14
paper back surface
(Duplex)
E +V1 S-F Standard N1jp Between Single B-1: N1jp, +V1 S-F 0 - 255 5 5 5
paper papers (Between papers),
Standard paper front
surface (Single/Duplex)
F +V1 S-R Duplex B-2: N1jp, +V1 S-R 0 - 255 5 5 5
(Between papers),
Standard paper back
surface (Duplex)
G +V2 S-F Paper Single B-3: N1jp, +V2 S-F, 0 - 255 14 18 20
Standard paper front
surface (Single/Duplex)
H +V2 S-F Duplex B-4: N1jp, +V2 S-F, 0 - 255 14 18 20
Standard paper back
surface (Duplex)
I +V1 XS-F Standard N2jp Between Single C-1: N2jp, +V1 XS-F 0 - 255 5 5 5
paper papers (Between papers),
Standard paper front
surface (Single/Duplex)
J +V1 XS-R Duplex C-2: N2jp, +V1 XS-R 0 - 255 5 5 5
(Between papers),
Standard paper back
surface (Duplex)
K +V2 XS-F Paper Single C-3: N2jp, +V2 XS-F, 0 - 255 14 18 20
Standard paper front
surface (Single/Duplex)
L +V2 XS-R Duplex C-4: N2jp, +V2 XS-R, 0 - 255 14 18 20
Standard paper back
surface (Duplex)
M +V1 THICK Heavy >LTR Between papers D-1: > LTR, +V1 THICK 0 - 255 5 5 5
paper (Between papers),
Heavy paper
N +V2 THICK Paper D-2: > LTR, +V2 THICK, 0 - 255 10 14 16
Heavy paper
O +V1 THICK S LTR Between papers E-1:  LTR, +V1 THICK S 0 - 255 5 5 5
(Between papers),
Heavy paper
P +V2 THICK S Paper E-2:  LTR, +V2 THICK 0 - 255 12 14 16
S, Heavy paper

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 13
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content 26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
range
machine machine machine
Q +V1 THIN Transfer Thin >LTR Between papers D-7: > LTR, +V1 THIN 0 - 255 5 5 5
bias paper (Between papers),
reference Thin paper
R +V2 THIN value Paper D-8: > LTR, +V2 THIN, 0 - 255 12 18 20
Thin paper
S +V1 THIN S LTR Between papers E-7:  LTR, +V1 THIN S 0 - 255 5 5 5
(Between papers),
Thin paper
T +V2 THIN S Paper E-8:  LTR, +V2 THIN S, 0 - 255 12 18 20
Thin paper
U +V1 LABEL Label >LTR Between papers D-3:  LTR, +V1 LABEL 0 - 255 5 5 5
sheet (Between papers),
Label sheet
V +V2 LABEL Paper D-4: > LTR, +V2 LABEL, 0 - 255 12 18 20
Label sheet
W +V1 LABEL S LTR Between papers E-3:  LTR, +V1 LABEL 0 - 255 5 5 5
S (Between papers),
Label sheet
X +V2 LABEL S Paper E-4:  LTR, +V2 LABEL 0 - 255 12 14 16
S, Label sheet
Y +V1 OHP OHP >LTR Between papers D-5: > LTR, +V1 OHP 0 - 255 5 5 5
(Between papers), OHP
Z +V2 OHP Paper D-6: > LTR, +V2 OHP, 0 - 255 8 14 16
OHP
AA +V1 OHP S LTR Between papers E-5:  LTR, +V1 OHP S 0 - 255 5 5 5
(Between papers), OHP
AB +V2 OHP S Paper E-6:  LTR, +V2 OHP S, 0 - 255 12 18 20
OHP
AC +V1 POSTCARD Postcard/ >100mm Between papers D-9: > 100mm, +V1 0 - 255 5 5 5
Envelope POSTCARD (Between
papers),
Postcard/Envelope
AD +V2 POSTCARD Paper D-10: > 100mm, +V2 0 - 255 16 26 26
POSTCARD,
Postcard/Envelope
AE +V1 POSTCARD S 100mm Between papers E-9:  100mm, +V1 0 - 255 5 5 5
POSTCARD S (Between
papers),
Postcard/Envelope
AF +V2 POSTCARD S Paper E-10:  100mm, +V2 0 - 255 16 26 26
POSTCARD S,
Postcard/Envelope

9-3
9
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
9-2
the paper reverse section (duplex section)
Purpose Operation test/check and its control circuit.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Section Duplex
sors and detectors in the paper reverse
Operation/Procedure
section (duplex section) and its control cir-
cuit. 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
Section Duplex
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure
The selected load performs the operation.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
played.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active Display Content
are highlighted. ADUM ADU motor

Display Content
APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 14
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 10 16
10-1 16--
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
supply mechanism (toner motor) and the Section MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
related circuit.
Operation/Procedure
Section Process (Developing) 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. 17
CAUTION: This simulation must be executed without installing the
toner cartridges. 17--
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the develop-
ing unit, resulting in overtoner. Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.

If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner Section

cartridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by Operation/Procedure
making a few black background copy in the copy mode. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Display Content
TNM Toner motor

21
13 21-1
Purpose Setting
13--
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Operation/Procedure
Section
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance
Operation/Procedure counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean-
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. clarify.
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
14 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Setting Default
14-- Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.) A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: 26CPM: 75K
COUNTER counter (Total) Default 31/35CPM:
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 (TOTAL) 1 – 300: 100K
troubles. 1K – 300K
Section 999: Free
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 15
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 22-4
22
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
22-1
tory.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/
Section
Check
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each
section and each operation mode. The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.) (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)

Section
Operation/Procedure
22-5
Change the display page with scroll key on the touch panel.
Purpose Others
Item Display Content Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each
Total TOTAL OUT Total output All prints including unit (section).
output quantity of black jams
Section Firmware
quantity and white
Total use TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper Operation/Procedure
quantity of black and white (including self print, The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.
excluding jams) When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
Copy COPY Black and white Billing target check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
copy counter (excluding self print)
Print PRINT Black and white Billing target S/N Serial No. (The codes for November and December are
print counter (excluding self print) "X" and "Y" respectively.)
Document DOC FIL Black and white Billing target ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section)
filing document filing (excluding self print) ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
print counter ICU (SUB) ICU (Sub section) (ARM9)
Other OTHER Black and white Self print quantity LANGUAGE Language support data version
other counter
GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
PCI PCI OPE- PCI counter PCI accumulated
PCL (MAIN) PCL (Main section)
TIME operation time (H)
PCU PCU
SCU SCU
FAX1 (MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section)
22-2 FINISHER Finisher
NIC NIC
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check POWER-CON Power controller
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total number of misfeed E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
and troubles. (When the number of total (except 20cpm machine)
jam is considerably great, it is judged as WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage)
necessary for repair.) ESCP ESCP font ROM
Section PDL PDL font ROM
PCI PCI
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.

MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter 22-6

RSPF JAM RSPF JAM counter
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
TROUBLE Trouble counter
Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data
(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the
firmware version, and the counter list.
22-3 Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the * When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
misfeed count of each position. the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this (Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
data is possible. 1) Select the print list mode with 10-key.
Section
Operation/Procedure Print list
Item/Display Print content
mode
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one A 1 Firmware version,
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) DATA PATTERN counter data, etc.
2 Data related to the process control

2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step

1).

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 16
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 22-8 SECURITY MX-FR37U Data security kit (commercial version)
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
(counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
and the scan (reading) unit. SD *****MB SD Card capacity
Section NIC STANDARD NIC
BARCODE MX-PF10 Bar code font
Operation/Procedure
INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
The counter values of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scanner ACM(*) MX-AMX2 Application communication module
related counters are displayed. EAM(*) MX-AMX3 External account module
PCI NOTE PCI generating unit
SPF Document feed quantity
CONNECT
(The number of sheets of discharged documents)
RIGHT TRAY MX-TE10 Paper exit tray unit
SCAN Number of times of scan
STAPLER Staple counter (*) Displayed only in the OSA models.
STAMP Stamp counter
COVER Document cover open/close counter
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
22-11
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
(* hour * minutes) Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/
22-9 receive) of FAX.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check (Only when FAX is installed)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print Section FAX
quantity) of each paper feed section. Operation/Procedure
Section Paper feed, ADU The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
Operation/Procedure are displayed.
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed. FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1)
FAX SEND FAX send counter
TRAY1 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 1)
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
TRAY2 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 2)
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
TRAY3 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 3)
SEND TIME FAX send time
TRAY4 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 4)
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope) 22-12
ADU ADU paper feed counter (Paper reverse section)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions
and the number of misfeed at each posi-
22-10 tion. (When the number of misfeed is con-
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check siderably great, it can be judged as
necessary for repair.)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration
(option, internal hardware). Section RSPF
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
The system configuration is displayed.
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
played.)

MACHINE MX-M264U Main unit

MX-M314U
MX-M354U
MX-M264N
MX-M314N
MX-M354N
RSPF MX-RP15 Reversing single pass feeder
STANDARD
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
DESK MX-DE17 First stage paper feed tray
MX-DE18 Second state paper feed tray
FINISHER MX-FN23 Inner finisher
MX-TR11/ Job separator
STANDARD
FAX1 MX-FX11 Facsimile expansion kit
PRINTER MX-PB15 Printer expansion kit (PCL)
STANDARD
PS MX-PK11 PS expansion kit

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 17
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 22-13
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge) and the fusing unit
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process
section are displayed.

Number of
Number of Life meter
Item/Display Content Counter RPM remaining
use days (Unit: 1%)
days
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
PRESSURE ROLLER Pressure roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
SEPARATE PAWL Separation pawl Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
CLEANING ROLLER Cleaning roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
TC ROLLER Transfer roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
OZONE FILTER Ozone filter Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG(K) Developer cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG(K) Drum cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER(K) Main charger K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE(K) Drum blade K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
TONER CTRG(K) Toner cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) Not displayed

22-14
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use status of the toner
cartridge.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.

Accumulated No. of Accumulated No. of near Accumulated No. of Remaining quantity

Display item Content installed cartridges (Unit) near end (Unit) end (Unit) (Unit: %)
INSTALL NN END END RESIDUAL
TONER (K)*1 Toner number counter (K) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510 0-25%
LARGE*2 Toner number counter 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 25-50%
(K LARGE) 50-75%
SMALL*2 Toner number counter 75-100%
(K SMALL)

*1: The sum total of LARGE/SMALL is displayed. For the remaining amount, it is common to LARGE/SMALL.
*2: Displayed only in the domestic specifications. The remaining amount is not displayed.

22-18
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the user data delete history.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed.

Display item
Content
Item name Date
START Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
of operation start)
END Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
of operation end)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 18
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 22-19 22-90
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
related to the scan - image send. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Change the display with scroll key.
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner 2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
Change the display with scroll key. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.

Item/Display Content All setting list (*) ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
Network NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
scanner ORG_B/W counter (B/W scan job) PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
ORG_CL counter (Color scan job)
PS FONT LIST
Internet INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
PS KANJI FONT LIST (Japan)
FAX OUTPUT
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page
NIC PAGE
SEND OUTPUT
Address registration list (*) INDIVIDUAL LIST
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE GROUP LIST
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX send PROGRAM LIST (Output Disable)
SEND MEMORY BOX LIST
E-Mail MAIL Number of times of E-MAIL send ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
COUNTER Document filing list (*) DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE
TRIAL Trial mode counter SEND)
MODE_B&C (B/W & COLOR scan job) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
HDD_B/W ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
HDD_CL (COLOR) Receive rejection number table ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
Receive rejection/allow ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
address
domain table
22-40 To E-mail INBOUND ROUTING LIST
Transfer table list
Purpose Error contents display
To administrator Transfer list DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
Function (Purpose) Used to display the error code list and the Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
contents. Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
Section
* When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
Operation/Procedure
model, this setting is invalid.
1) Select the main error code.
The sub error code and the contents are displayed.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 19
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 23 24
23-2 24-1
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of ble counter. (After completion of mainte-
troubles of misfeed is considerably great, nance, clear the counters.)
the judgment is made that repair is Section
required.)
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
3) Press [YES] key.
The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed.
The target counter is cleared.

23-80 MACHINE Machine JAM counter

Purpose Operation test/check SPF RSPF JAM counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed
and paper transport in the paper feed sec-
tion and the paper transport section. Used
to output the list of the operation status of 24-2
the sensor and the detectors in the paper
Purpose Data clear
feed section and the paper transport sec-
tion. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
Section Paper feed, Paper transport
Operation/Procedure Section
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and Operation/Procedure
paper transport is outputted. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
in the paper feed and transport section. 3) Press [YES] key.
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the The target counter is cleared.
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed.
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen- TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ. TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
SECTION Operation content (Trigger name - Detection operation MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
or load operation name) MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
STANDARD Reference value (ms) MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
CURRENT (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the final MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
paper ADU ADU paper feed counter
PREVIOUS (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job on the
final paper
MAXIMUM (*1) Max. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs
MINIMUM (*1) Min. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs 24-3

*1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the list Purpose Data clear
has no relation to the operation timing. It is not used in the market. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the
scan (reading) unit counter.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.

SPF RSPF document feed counter

(No. of discharged sheets)
SCAN Scan counter
STAPLER Staple counter
STAMP Stamp counter
COVER Document cover open/close counter
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 20
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 24-4 24-5
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After
printer counters of the transport unit and replacement of developer, clear the
the fusing unit. (After completion of mainte- counter.)
nance, clear the counters.) Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
The target counter is cleared.
NOTE: The "Developer cartridge life meter" counter displayed in
SIM22-13 is not displayed in this simulation, but it is
Item/Display Content
cleared in conjunction with this simulation.
Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter)
ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
Developer cartridge print counter (K)
(Number of use days)
K Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (K)
Fusing FUSING Fusing roller (Counter)
Number of day that used developer (Day) K
ROLLER Fusing roller (Number of use days)
Fusing roller
(Accumulated number of rotations) 24-6
PRESS Pressure roller (Counter) Purpose Data clear
ROLLER Pressure roller (Number of use days)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.
Pressure roller
(Accumulated number of rotations) Section
Separation SEPARATE Separation pawl (Counter) Operation/Procedure
PAWL Separation pawl (Number of use days) 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Separation pawl
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(Accumulated number of rotations)
CLEAN Cleaning roller (Counter) 3) Press [YES] key.
ROLLER Cleaning roller (Number of use days) The target counter is cleared.
Cleaning roller
(Accumulated number of rotations) COPY BW Copy counter (B/W)
Transfer TC ROLLER Transfer roller (Counter)
Transfer roller (Number of use days) 24-9
Transfer roller
Purpose Data clear
(Accumulated number of rotations)
Drum DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge (K) (Counter) Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter
Drum cartridge (K) (Number of use and the self print mode print counter.
days) Section
Drum cartridge (K) (Accumulated
Operation/Procedure
number of rotations)
Main MAIN Main charger (K) (Counter) 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
charger CHARGER K Main charger (K) (Number of use days) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Main charger (K) (Accumulated number 3) Press [YES] key.
of rotations)
The target counter is cleared.
Drum blade DRUM BLADE Drum blade K (Counter)
K Drum blade K (Number of use days) PRINT BW Print counter (B/W)
Drum blade K (Accumulated number of OTHER BW Other counter (B/W)
rotations)
Other OZONE FILTER Ozone filter (Counter)
Ozone filter (Number of use days)
24-10
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter.
(Only when FAX is installed)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.

FAX OUTPUT FAX Print quantity counter

FAX SEND FAX send counter
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter
SEND TIME FAX send time
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 21
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 24-12 24-30
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the document filing counter Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator (Admin)
value. password.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [YES] key. The administrator password is initialized.
The target counter is cleared.

DOC FIL (BW) Black-white document filing print counter 24-31

Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode pass-
24-15 word.
Purpose Data clear Section
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the Operation/Procedure
scan mode and the image send. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section 2) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure Used to initialize the service mode password.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key. 24-35
The target counter is cleared. Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the toner cartridge use status
Division Item/Display Content
data.
Network NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read
scanner quantity counter (B/W scan job) Section
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read Operation/Procedure
quantity counter (COLOR scan job)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Internet INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
Fax OUTPUT
2) Press [YES] key.
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared.
SEND OUTPUT page
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX
SEND
Number of internet FAX send
25
E-mail MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send 25-1
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send
Purpose Operation test/check
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
scan job) oping section.
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) Section Process (Developing section)
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity
Operation/Procedure
(COLOR)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis-
played.

Sensor name (Display) Sensor name

TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 22
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 25-2
26
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
26-1
density when replacing developer. (Auto-
matic adjustment) Purpose Setting
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- Function (Purpose) Used to set Yes/No of installation of the Job
ing) separator.
Operation/Procedure Section Paper exit
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
The developing motor rotates and the toner density sensor makes 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
sampling of the toner density, displaying the detected level. 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
After stopping the developing motor, it is set as the reference toner This setting is required to use the Job separator.
density control level.
Item/Display Content
CAUTION: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
A 0 YES Job separator provided
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
1 NO Job separator not provided
error code of EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the refer-
ence toner density level is not set normally.
CAUTION: Do not execute this simulation except when new devel-
oper is supplied. If it is executed in other cases, under- 26-2
toner or overtone may occur, causing a trouble. Purpose Setting

Display Default Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the paper feed
Item/Display Content tray. (When the paper size is changed, this
range value
AT DEVE ADJ Automatic development 1 - 255 128 simulation must be executed to change the
adjustment value paper size in software.)
Section Paper feed
Display during execution of the simulation
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content
Select a paper size and a weight system to be changed.
TCS Toner sensor output value
Item Setting value Content
Error content
LEGAL SET 0 8.5 x 14
Display Error name Error content 1 8.5 x 13.4
EE-EL EL abnormality The sensor output level is less than 78. 2 8.5 x 13.5
EE-EU EU abnormality The sensor output level exceeds 178. G/LBS SET 0 GRAM
1 LBS

Setting value
25-4 Destination
LEGAL SET G/LBS SET
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check U.S.A 8.5 x 14 LBS
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the CANADA 8.5 x 14 LBS
toner correction quantity. (Not used in the INCH 8.5 x 14 LBS
market.) JAPAN 8.5 x 14 GRAM
AB_B 8.5 x 14 GRAM
Section Process
EUROPE 8.5 x 14 GRAM
Operation/Procedure U.K. 8.5 x 14 GRAM
The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed. AUS. 8.5 x 14 GRAM
AB_A 8.5 x 14 GRAM
Display CHINA 8.5 x 14 GRAM
Item/Display Content
range
TONER DEN_LT Current toner density sensor output 1 - 255
value (final value)
TONER DEN_ST Current toner density reference 1 - 255
value display (the value including all
the correction values)
AUTO DEVE Automatic development adjustment 1 - 255
value
ALL All correction reference value 1 - 255
LIFE Life correction value -128 - 127
ENV Environment correction value -128 - 127
DUPLEX Duplex correction value -128 - 127
PRINT RATE Print ratio correction value -128 - 127
AREA Area correction value -128 - 127
AUTO DEVE AREA Area in the auto development -128 - 127
adjustment
CURRENT AREA Current area -128 - 127

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 23
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Default
26-3 Item/Display Content
value
Purpose Setting COUNTUP FUSER_IN Mode in which the detection EXIT_
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor. TIMING timing of the paper lead OUT
(Setting must be made according to the edge by the sensor after the
paper passes the fusing
auditor use conditions.)
section is used as the
Section Auditor money charging timing.
Operation/Procedure FUSER_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
edge by the sensor after the
paper passes the fusing
Default
Item/Display Content section is used as the
value
money charging timing.
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
EXIT_OUT Mode in which the detection
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
timing of the paper rear
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
edge by the paper exit
AUDITOR vendor is used.
sensor of the right paper
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode exit tray or of the after
(Only the copy mode can process unit is used as the
be controlled.) money charging timing.
P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which
signals for the intercard (*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.
connected to the PCU are (*2) Details of the vendor mode
used for communication in
parallel I/F. Details of the vendor mode
P OTHER Mode for an external Completion Insufficient money during Completion
auditor connected to the of the copy job of the
SCU. specified specified
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC BW BW
quantity. quantity.
(*1) (no money (money
(Money (No money
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job remaining) remaining)
remaining) remaining)
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
document filing print MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3
OFF No support for the auditor in
document filing print Operation 1:
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
performed in the duplex which can be changed in the system setting.
print mode.
If the remaining money Operation 2:
expires during continuous Auto clear is not made.
printing, the sheets in the Operation 3:
machine are discharged The display is shifted to the initial screen.
without being printed on the
back surfaces.
OFF Continuous printing is not
performed in the duplex 26-5
print mode. (The remaining Purpose Setting
amount is checked for
printing every surface in all Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total
the printing process.) counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/
If the remaining money 11x17 size)
expires during printing, the
Section
sheet is discharged without
printing on the back Operation/Procedure
surface. 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE 2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.

Item/Display Content Default value

A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 1
(Japan)
2
(Except Japan)
B MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
C DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 24
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 26-6 26-30
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination. sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
Section standards). (For slow start to drive the fus-
ing heater lamp)
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The selected set content is saved.
0 Control allowed
U.S.A. United States of America
1 Control inhibited
CANADA Canada
INCH Inch series, other destinations 2) Press [OK] key.
JAPAN Japan
The set value in step 1) is saved.
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations
EUROPE Europe * Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
U.K. United Kingdom to the power frequency, etc.
AUS. Australia
U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported)
AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
CHINA China
INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)
AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)
26-10
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network 26-32
scanner. Purpose Setting
Section Function (Purpose) Used to set the special functions.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The set value in step 1) is saved. 2) Press [OK] key.
TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting The set value in step 1) is saved.
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default)
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A CLEANING The screen of the 0 YES 1(NO)
PRINT SET cleaning mode self print
26-18 execution is displayed.
Purpose Setting (ON)
The screen of the 1 NO
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
cleaning mode self print
save mode operation.
execution is not
(For the Japan and the UK versions.) displayed. (OFF)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
26-35
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Setting
3) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
The set value in step 2) is saved.
trouble history when a same trouble
Default occurred repeatedly. There are two display
Item Display Content modes: display as one trouble and display
value
A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode is inhibited. as several series of troubles.
0
1 Copy toner save mode is allowed Section
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is inhibited. Operation/Procedure
0
1 Printer toner save mode is allowed.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.

0 Only once display.

1 Any time display.

2) Press [OK] key.

The set value in step 1) is saved.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 25
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (*2)
26-38
Purpose Setting Target Target paper setting
paper 0 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the
Inner Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
maintenance life is reached.
finisher envelope 10 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
Section discharged continuously. When, stopped when
Operation/Procedure however, different kinds of the paper exit
sheets are mixed and tray is full or
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
discharged and 10 or less when 250
2) Press [OK] key. sheets of a kind are sheets
The set value in step 1) is saved. continuously discharged, the (35.5mm thick)
operation is stopped by the are discharged.
Default paper exit tray full detection.
Item/Display Content
value Label The operation is stopped when
A MAINTENANCE 0 Setting of Print Continue/ 0 sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are
LIFE OVER Stop when the maintenance tab sheet, discharged continuously. When,
(0: CONTINUE life is over (Print Continue) OHP however, different kinds of
1: STOP) 1 Setting of Print Continue/ sheets are mixed and
Stop when the maintenance discharged and 100 or less
life is over (Print Stop) sheets of a kind are
continuously discharged, the
operation is stopped by the
paper exit tray full detection.

26-50
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set functions. 26-51
Section Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the serial
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch port operation. (For PCI)
panel. Section
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the PCI is installed, setting is made to 1 or 2.
Default
Item/Display Content 2) Press [OK] key.
value
A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer
Setting Default
1 BW reverse copy Enable to *1 Item/Display Content
range value
B FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0
A PCI Serial port PCI mode OFF 0 0
FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer
SETTING (For connecting the serial (Serial
limited. to *2
port vendor) port PCI
1 Finisher special paper mode
Serial port PCI mode ON
The number of paper exit is OFF)
(JOB status LED: MODE1)
not limited.
Serial port PCI mode ON
C FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
(JOB status LED: MODE2)
COLOR ON during paper feed
1 Paper feed tray color display MODE1: Red LED is light/blink/OFF, MODE2: Red LED always
OFF during paper feed OFF
D LONG SIZE PRINT 0 Long size print disable 0
1 Long size print enable CAUTION: When "PCI SETTING" is changed from "0" to "1" or "2,"
E WIRELESS SET 0 Wireless LAN disable 0 if SIM26-03 "OUTSIDE AUDITOR" is set to
1 Wireless LAN enable "S_VENDOR," "OUTSIDE AUDITOR" is changed to
"NONE."
(*1) Default values for each destination of item A

Destination Item A
26-52
USA 1
CANADA 1 Purpose Setting
INCH 1 Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
JAPAN 1 (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
AB_B 1 or not.
EUROPE 1
Section
UK 0
AUS 1 Operation/Procedure
AB_A 1 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
CHINA 1
0 Count up
1 No count up

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 26
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2) Press [OK] key.
26-65
The set value in step 1) is saved.
Purpose Setting
Destination Default Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
U.S.A 0 (Counted)
Section
CANADA 0 (Counted)
INCH 0 (Counted)
Operation/Procedure
JAPAN 1 (Not counted) Use the touch key to set.
AB_B 0 (Counted)
EUROPE 0 (Counted) Set Setting Default
Item Content NOTE
value range value
U.K. 0 (Counted)
LIMIT ON Number of ON or ON
AUS. 1 (Not counted)
COPIES sets of OFF
AB_A 0 (Counted)
stapling:
CHINA 0 (Counted) Max. 50 sets
OFF Number of
sets of
stapling:
26-56 Not Limited
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF of the Life Correction.
Section 26-69
Operation/Procedure Purpose Setting
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. toner near end.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Section
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
range value
A AUTO1 Life correction of Auto 1 is 0-1 1 1 (ON) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
turned ON.
3) Press [OK] key.
Life correction of Auto 1 is 0
turned OFF.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
B AUTO2 Life correction of Auto 2 is 0-1 1 1 (ON)
Setting Default
turned ON. Item/Display Content
range value
Life correction of Auto 2 is 0
A TONER 0 The toner 0-1 List of
turned OFF.
PREPARATION preparation Default
C TEXT Life correction of Text is 0-1 1 0 (OFF)
(0:YES 1:NO) message is values and
turned ON.
displayed. set values
Life correction of Text is 0 for each
1 The toner
turned OFF. destination
preparation
D TEXT/ Life correction of Text/Printed 0-1 1 0 (OFF) message is not
PRINTED Photo is turned ON. displayed.
PHOTO Life correction of Text/Printed 0 B REMAINING 0.05 0 Toner 0-9 4
Photo is turned OFF. TONER preparation at
E TEXT/ Life correction of Text/ 0-1 1 0 (OFF) LEVEL remaining toner
PHOTO Photograph is turned ON. level of 5%
Life correction of Text/ 0 0.1 1 Toner
Photograph is turned OFF. preparation at
F PRINTED Life correction of Printed 0-1 1 1 (ON) remaining toner
PHOTO Photo is turned ON. level of 10%
Life correction of Printed 0 0.15 2 Toner
Photo is turned OFF. preparation at
G PHOTOG Life correction of Photograph 0-1 1 1 (ON) remaining toner
RAPH is turned ON. level of 15%
Life correction of Photograph 0 0.2 3 Toner
is turned OFF. preparation at
H MAP Life correction of Map is 0-1 1 0 (OFF) remaining toner
turned ON. level of 20%
Life correction of Map is 0 0.25 4 Toner
turned OFF. preparation at
remaining toner
level of 25%
0.3 5 Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 30%
0.35 6 Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 35%
0.4 7 Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 40%

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 27
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Setting Default Contents of set items
Item/Display Content
range value A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display.
B REMAINING 0.45 8 Toner 0-9 4 B: The toner remaining quantity at which the toner preparation
TONER preparation at
message is displayed.
LEVEL remaining toner
level of 45% C: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
0.5 9 Toner when the toner near end status is reached.
preparation at D: Machine operation at toner end
remaining toner
E: Number of allowable copy/print/FAX when the toner near end
level of 50%
message is displayed. (Range: 0 - 160 sheets)
C TONER NEAR END 0 The toner near 0-1 List of
(0:YES 1:NO) end message is Default The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the
displayed. values and assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 6%.
1 The toner near set values (The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
end message is for each size and the print ratio.)
not displayed. destination
CAUTION: When item A is set to "0" and item E is properly set,
D TONER END 1 Operation setup 1-3 –
printing can be made after toner near end. However,
1
improper phenomena such as insufficient density, thin
2 Operation setup
2 spots, or improper color balance may result depending
3 Operation setup on the using conditions. When item E is set to "1" print-
3 ing is disabled after toner near end. In this case, toner
E TONER END Setting of the 1-5 4 end display is made in the toner near end status, and
COUNT number of copy/print/ copy/print/FAX outputs are disabled.
FAX outputs Enable
after TONER NEAR
END.
26-73
F TONER E-MAIL 0 Low status send 0-1 1
ALERT of E-mail alert Purpose Setting
(When the toner
Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide
preparation
copy mode image loss (shade delete quan-
message is
displayed) (in tity) adjustment
near near toner Section
end)
Operation/Procedure
1 Low status send
of E-mail alert
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
(near toner end) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
Item E (TONER END COUNT) setting value and printable quan-
tity When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
(shade delete quantity) is increased.
Setting value Printable quantity at A4/6% equivalent conversion
1 0 Setting
Item/Display Content Default value
2 20 range
3 40 A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
4 80 SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
5 160 (M) (shade delete amount:
quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
List of Default values and set values for each destination B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
SHADOW ADJ (S) loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
Setting value delete quantity) amount:
Destination Toner preparation adjustment 0.1mm/step)
Toner near end message
message
U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 26-74
JAPAN 0 (Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed)
Purpose Setting
AB_B 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
U.K. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) Section
AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) Operation/Procedure
AB_A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
2) Press [OK] key.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A OSA TRIAL MODE 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
(0: YES 1: NO) OSA trial mode.
1 OSA trial mode is
canceled.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 28
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 26-78
27
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
27-1
operation panel.
Purpose Setting
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica-
Operation/Procedure
tion error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)
Section
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW".
Operation/Procedure
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [SET] key. 0 Not detection
1 Detection

2) Press [OK] key.

26-79
The set value in step 1) is saved.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display
of user data delete result.
27-2
Section
Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
ber and the HOST server telephone num-
The value for the display operation specification after comple- ber. (FSS function)
tion of user data delete is set.
Section
2) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
Default 1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
Item/Display Content Setting range
value [USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
A DISP SET User data delete result YES 1 0 (NO) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
pop-up display ON
3) Press [SET] key.
User data delete result NO 0
pop-up display OFF The set value in step 2) is saved.

USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)

SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
• If the connection process is not completed
normally when registering the FSS, calling to the
HOST may be continuously made every time
when the power is turned ON (from OFF) or
rebooted.
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
HOST.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 29
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content Remarks
range value
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send in NE-B mode 0-3 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
NFB1 Exclusive for send in NE-F mode 2 For convenience
stores
NFB2 Send/Receive in NE-F mode 3 For convenience
stores
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 0: No retry
C TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 0: No retry
E TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F FAX RETRY Resend number setting when FAX initial connection 0 - 15 2 Unit: Number of times
G TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(K) NEAR_END timing setting (K) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
H TEMP HISTORY CYCLE Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity history 1 - 1440 60 Unit: min.
I LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Log output capacity 0 - 50 30 Unit: [KB]

27-5 27-6
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func- Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call.
tion allows the host computer to check the (FSS function)
machine tag No.) (FSS function) Section
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.
0 Allow (Default)
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”.
1 Inhibit
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. 2) Press [OK] key.
2) Press [SET] key. The set value in step 1) is saved.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 30
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 27-7 27-10
Purpose Setting Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history
(FSS function) information. (FSS function)
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [OK] key. The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Target history Serial communication retry history
Setting Default Scanner gain adjustment retry history
Item/Display Content Paper transport time between sensors
range value
A FUNCTION FSS function enable 0 1 (NO)
(0:YES 1:NO) FSS function disable 1
B ALERT Alert call enable (*1) 0 0 (YES)
(0:YES 1:NO) Alert call disable 1 27-11
C CONNECTION FAX connection enable 0 0 (FAX) Purpose Others
(0: FAX Not used. 1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
1: No Use HTTP connection enable 2
2: HTTP)
retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
ment retry number history. (FSS function)
*1 Alert send timing Section
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert Operation/Procedure
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached. The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
Service call When pressing Service call. gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
reached. Display Item
Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for Occurrence date Retry Content
Item name
a new product) (Display) number
Alert resend LSU1 Year/month/day 8 digits Serial
hour: min.: sec. communication
LSU2 Year/month/day 8 digits retry number
27-9 hour: min.: sec. history display
Purpose Setting DESK1 Year/month/day 8 digits
hour: min.: sec.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
DESK2 Year/month/day 8 digits
ing YES/NO threshold value and shading
hour: min.: sec.
gain adjustment retry number.
FINISHER1 Year/month/day 8 digits
(FSS function)
hour: min.: sec.
Section FINISHER2 Year/month/day 8 digits
Operation/Procedure hour: min.: sec.
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 Year/month/day 8 digits Scanner gain
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
hour: min.: sec. adjustment retry
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. SCAN GAIN ADJ2 Year/month/day 8 digits history
3) Press [OK] key. hour: min.: sec.
The set value in step 2) is saved. SCAN GAIN ADJ3 Year/month/day 8 digits
hour: min.: sec.
Setting Default SCAN GAIN ADJ4 Year/month/day 8 digits
Item/Display Content
range value hour: min.: sec.
A FEED TIME1 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%) SCAN GAIN ADJ5 Year/month/day 8 digits Scanner gain
transport time between hour: min.: sec. adjustment retry
sensors (Machine) history
B FEED TIME2 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%)
transport time between
sensors (SPF)
C GAIN Threshold value of the gain 0 - 20 11
ADJUSTMENT adjustment retry number (TIMES)
RETRY
D JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 1 - 100 10
judgment threshold value (TIMES)
(Alert judgment threshold
value for continuous JAM's)
(Setting of the number of
JAM's continuously made
at which it is judged as an
alert.)

* Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;

100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
retry is actually not registered.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 31
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 27-13
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with scroll key.

Code between Reference

Item/Display Content Occurrence date Passing time
sensors passing time
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME4 History of paper transport time between sensors 4 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME5 History of paper transport time between sensors 5 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME6 History of paper transport time between sensors 6 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME7 History of paper transport time between sensors 7 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME8 History of paper transport time between sensors 8 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME9 History of paper transport time between sensors 9 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME10 History of paper transport time between sensors 10 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
hour: min.: sec.
RSPF FEED TIME1 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 1 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME2 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 2 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME3 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 3 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME4 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 4 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME5 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 5 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME6 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 6 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME7 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 7 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME8 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 8 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME9 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 9 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME10 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 10 hour: min.: sec.

27-14 27-15
Purpose Setting Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection Function (Purpose) Used to display the FSS connection status.
test mode. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure The FSS operating status is displayed.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
0 Disable (Default) value
1 Enable FSS CONNECTION Used to display the 0 Not 0
FSS connection operated
2) Press [OK] key. status. 1 Operated
The set value in step 1) is saved.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 32
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Item/ Setting Default
27-16 Content NOTE
Display range value
Purpose Setting A3: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS alert send. FIRST number setting (A3) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
Section sheets)
Operation/Procedure A4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. FIRST number setting (A4) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set.
sheets)
2) Press [OK] key. B4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
FIRST number setting (B4) 10000 sheets for the
Setting Default (Number of used first time
Item/Display Content
range value sheets)
A MAINTENAN Maintenance Alert send 0 0 B5: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
CE ALERT alert send Enable FIRST number setting (B5) 10000 sheets for the
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1 (Number of used first time
Disable sheets)
B TONER Toner order Alert send 0 0
ORDER alert send Enable
ALERT Enable setting Alert send 1
(0:YES 1:NO) Disable 27-18
C TONER Toner Alert send 0 0
Purpose Data clear
CTRG ALERT cartridge Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) replacement Alert send 1 Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry
alert send Disable counter.
Enable setting
Section
D JAM ALERT Continuous Alert send 0 0
(0:YES 1:NO) JAM alert Enable Operation/Procedure
send Enable Alert send 1 1) Select an item to be cleared.
setting Disable 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
E TROUBLE Trouble alert Alert send 0 0
3) Press [YES] key.
ALERT send Enable Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) setting Alert send 1 The target counter is cleared.
Disable
Item/Display Content
F PAPER Paper order Alert send 0 0
ORDER alert send Enable TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed retry counter
ALERT Enable setting Alert send 1 TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed retry counter
(0:YES 1:NO) Disable TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed retry counter
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed retry counter
MFT Manual paper feed retry counter

27-17
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS paper order alert. 30
Section
Operation/Procedure 30-1
1) Select an item to be set.
Purpose Operation test/check
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification sors and the detectors in other than the
is set. paper feed section and the control circuits.
3) Press [SET] key.
Section
Item/ Setting Default Operation/Procedure
Content NOTE
Display range value The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
PAPER Setting of paper kind 0-2 0 0: Standard played.
TYPE for paper order alert paper and
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
SET recycled paper
lighted.
1: Standard
paper only
PPD1 Registration front detector
2: Recycled
POSD Paper exit branch detector
paper only
POD1 Paper exit detector 1
A3 Paper order number 500 - 1250 Unit: No. of
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box POD2 Paper exit detector 2
sheets] (A3) POD3 Paper exit detector 3
A4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of TFD1 Paper exit tray full detector 1
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box TFD2 Paper exit tray full detector 2
sheets] (A4) TFD3 Paper exit tray full detector 3
B4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of SHPOS Shifter home positions sensor
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box DSW_R Front/side cover open/close detector
sheets] (B4) DSW_POC Paper exit cover open/close detector
B5 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
sheets] (B5)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 33
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 30-2 40-7
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
sors and the detectors in the paper feed manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
section and the control circuits. Section Paper feed
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
played.
3) Press [OK] key.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
The set value in step 2) is saved.
lighted.
Default
C1PFD Cassette 1 paper entry detector Item/Display Content
value
C1LUD Cassette 1 paper upper limit detector A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 235
C1PED Cassette 1 paper empty detector B P1 (A4R) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width 143
C1SS Cassette 1 detector (A4R)
C2PFD Cassette 2 paper entry detector C P2 (A5R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 78
C2LUD Cassette 2 paper upper limit detector (A5R)
C2PED Cassette 2 paper empty detector D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 27
C2SS Cassette 2 installation detector
DSW_C2 Cassette 2 door open/close detector
MPED Manual feed paper empty detector
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detector 1
MPLD2 Manual feed paper length detector 2 41
MTOP1 Manual feed tray detector 1
MTOP2 Manual feed tray detector 2
41-1
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
40 Section
Operation/Procedure
40-2
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
Purpose Adjustment/Setup played.
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
adjustment. lighted.
Section Paper feed
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
Operation/Procedure Close: Highlighted
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX). PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. sensor status Document present: Highlighted

The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.

3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4R).
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 41-2
The P1 width (A4R) detection level is recognized. Purpose Adjustment
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A5R). Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. detection level.
The P2 width (A5R) detection level is recognized. Section
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN). Operation/Procedure
8) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized. place a document on the document table.
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is The sensor level without document is recognized.
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. 2) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table, and press
[EXECUTE] key.
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.
P1(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4R)
P2(A5R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A5R)
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed.
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
Sensor Setting Defaul
Content
name range t value
PD1 - 7 Document detection sensor 1 - 7 0 - 255 128

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 34
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 41-3
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)

Item/Display Content Detection level range

OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255
PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255
PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255
PD4 Document detection 4 0 - 255
PD5 Document detection 5 0 - 255
PD6 Document detection 6 0 - 255
PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255

43
43-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.

26cpm machine
Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content Group A Group B Group C Group D
range
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM READY Ready standby TH_UM set value 70 - 220 175 175 175 175 180 180 180 180
B HL_US READY Ready standby TH_US set value 70 - 220 170 170 170 170 175 175 175 175
C HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_UM 70 - 220 175 180 175 180 185 190 185 190
set value
D HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_US 70 - 220 175 180 175 180 185 190 185 190
set value
E WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T Fusing motor pre-rotation start 0 - 200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TH_US set value
F WARMUP FUMOFF HL_UM T Fusing motor previous rotation 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
complete time
G WARMUP END TIME Warm-up complete time 0 - 20 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
H HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 220 190 190 190 190
I HL_US HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_US set value 70 - 220 190 190 190 190
J HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 220 175 175 185 185
K HL_US OHP PAPER OHP-TH_US set value 70 - 220 175 175 185 185
L HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 70 - 220 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
M HL_US E-STAR Preheating TH_US set value 70 - 220 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
N HL_UM PRE-JOB TH_UM set value when recovery 70 - 220 130 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
from Warm-Up
O HL_UM WARMUP_120L TH_UM set value when Warm-Up 70 - 220 130 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
at 120C or below
P HL_US WARMUP_120L TH_US set value when Warm-Up 70 - 220 130 170 170 170 170 170 170 170
at 120C or below
Q LO_WARMUP_TIME O, P applying time (Timer from 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
completion of Ready)
R HL_UM WARMUP_120H TH_LM set value when Warm-Up 70 - 220 130 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
at 120C or above
S HL_US WARMUP_120H TH_US set value when Warm-Up 70 - 220 130 170 170 170 170 170 170 170
at 120C or above

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 35
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content Group A Group B Group C Group D
range
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
T HI_WARMUP_TIME R, S applying time (Timer from 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
completion of Ready)
U HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM prior rotation start TH_US 0 - 220 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
above
V HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time when 0 - 60 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Warm-Up at alpha C or above
W HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 1 Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 30 - 220 130 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
above
X HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to which U - 1 - 119 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
W is applied
Y LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 1 Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 70 - 220 130 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
below
Z JOBEND_FUMON_TIME After rotating time when a job is 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
completed
AA HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 Job enable TH_UM temperature 2 70 - 220 130 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
above
AB LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 Job enable TH_UM temperature 2 70 - 220 130 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
below

Code descriptions

TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group A JAPAN – – – –
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –
Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A
Group D CHINA – – – –

31cpm machine
Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content Group A Group B Group C Group D
range
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM READY Ready standby TH_UM set value 70 - 220 185 185 185 185 190 190 190 190
B HL_US READY Ready standby TH_US set value 70 - 220 180 180 180 180 185 185 185 185
C HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_UM 70 - 220 185 195 190 195 195 200 195 200
set value
D HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_US 70 - 220 185 195 190 195 195 200 195 200
set value
E WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T Fusing motor pre-rotation start 0 - 200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TH_US set value
F WARMUP FUMOFF HL_UM T Fusing motor previous rotation 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
complete time
G WARMUP END TIME Warm-up complete time 0 - 20 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
H HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 220 200 200 200 200
I HL_US HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_US set value 70 - 220 200 200 200 200
J HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 220 190 190 195 195
K HL_US OHP PAPER OHP-TH_US set value 70 - 220 190 190 195 195
L HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 70 - 220 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
M HL_US E-STAR Preheating TH_US set value 70 - 220 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
N HL_UM PRE-JOB TH_UM set value when recovery 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
from Warm-Up
O HL_UM WARMUP_120L TH_UM set value when Warm-Up 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
at 120C or below
P HL_US WARMUP_120L TH_US set value when Warm-Up 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
at 120C or below
Q LO_WARMUP_TIME O, P applying time (Timer from 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
completion of Ready)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 36
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content Group A Group B Group C Group D
range
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
R HL_UM WARMUP_120H TH_LM set value when Warm-Up 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
at 120C or above
S HL_US WARMUP_120H TH_US set value when Warm-Up 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
at 120C or above
T HI_WARMUP_TIME R, S applying time (Timer from 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
completion of Ready)
U HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM prior rotation start TH_US 0 - 220 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
above
V HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time when 0 - 60 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Warm-Up at alpha C or above
W HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 1 Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 30 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
above
X HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to which U - 1 - 119 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
W is applied
Y LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 1 Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
below
Z JOBEND_FUMON_TIME After rotating time when a job is 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
completed
AA HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 Job enable TH_UM temperature 2 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
above
AB LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 Job enable TH_UM temperature 2 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
below

Code descriptions

TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group A JAPAN – – – –
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –
Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A
Group D CHINA – – – –

35cpm machine
Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content Group A Group B Group C Group D
range
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM READY Ready standby TH_UM set value 70 - 220 185 185 185 185 190 190 190 190
B HL_US READY Ready standby TH_US set value 70 - 220 180 180 180 180 185 185 185 185
C HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_UM 70 - 220 195 200 195 200 195 200 195 200
set value
D HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_US 70 - 220 195 200 195 200 195 200 195 200
set value
E WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T Fusing motor pre-rotation start 0 - 200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TH_US set value
F WARMUP FUMOFF HL_UM T Fusing motor previous rotation 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
complete time
G WARMUP END TIME Warm-up complete time 0 - 20 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
H HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 220 200 200 200 200
I HL_US HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_US set value 70 - 220 200 200 200 200
J HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 220 195 195 195 195
K HL_US OHP PAPER OHP-TH_US set value 70 - 220 195 195 195 195
L HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 70 - 220 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
M HL_US E-STAR Preheating TH_US set value 70 - 220 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
N HL_UM PRE-JOB TH_UM set value when recovery 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
from Warm-Up
O HL_UM WARMUP_120L TH_UM set value when Warm-Up 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
at 120C or below

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 37
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content Group A Group B Group C Group D
range
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
P HL_US WARMUP_120L TH_US set value when Warm-Up 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
at 120C or below
Q LO_WARMUP_TIME O, P applying time (Timer from 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
completion of Ready)
R HL_UM WARMUP_120H TH_LM set value when Warm-Up 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
at 120C or above
S HL_US WARMUP_120H TH_US set value when Warm-Up 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
at 120C or above
T HI_WARMUP_TIME R, S applying time (Timer from 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
completion of Ready)
U HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM prior rotation start TH_US 0 - 220 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
above
V HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time when 0 - 60 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Warm-Up at alpha C or above
W HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 1 Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 30 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
above
X HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to which U - 1 - 119 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
W is applied
Y LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 1 Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
below
Z JOBEND_FUMON_TIME After rotating time when a job is 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
completed
AA HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 Job enable TH_UM temperature 2 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
above
AB LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 Job enable TH_UM temperature 2 70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
when Warm-Up at alpha C or
below

Code descriptions

TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group A JAPAN – – – –
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –
Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A
Group D CHINA – – – –

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 38
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 43-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in
each mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.

26cpm machine
Default value (SW-A) Default value (SW-B)
Setting
Item Display Content Group Group Group Group Group Group Group Group
range
A B C D A B C D
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper 70 - 220 175 175 185 185 175 175 185 185
DUP duplex TH_UM set value
B HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper 70 - 220 175 175 185 185 175 175 185 185
DUP duplex TH_US set value
C PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black and white plain paper 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
APP CNT duplex applying number of sheets
D HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW Black and white heavy paper 70 - 220 175 175 185 185 175 175 185 185
DUP duplex TH_UM set value
E HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW Black and white heavy paper 70 - 220 175 175 185 185 175 175 185 185
DUP duplex TH_US set value
F HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black and white heavy paper 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
APP CNT duplex applying number of sheets

Code descriptions

TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group A JAPAN – – – –
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –
Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A
Group D CHINA – – – –

31cpm machine
Default value (SW-A) Default value (SW-B)
Setting
Item Display Content Group Group Group Group Group Group Group Group
range
A B C D A B C D
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper 70 - 220 185 190 195 195 185 190 195 195
DUP duplex TH_UM set value
B HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper 70 - 220 185 190 195 195 185 190 195 195
DUP duplex TH_US set value
C PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black and white plain paper 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
APP CNT duplex applying number of sheets
D HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW Black and white heavy paper 70 - 220 185 190 195 195 185 190 195 195
DUP duplex TH_UM set value
E HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW Black and white heavy paper 70 - 220 185 190 195 195 185 190 195 195
DUP duplex TH_US set value
F HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black and white heavy paper 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
APP CNT duplex applying number of sheets

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 39
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Code descriptions

TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group A JAPAN – – – –
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –
Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A
Group D CHINA – – – –

35cpm machine
Default value (SW-A) Default value (SW-B)
Setting
Item Display Content Group Group Group Group Group Group Group Group
range
A B C D A B C D
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper 70 - 220 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195
DUP duplex TH_UM set value
B HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper 70 - 220 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195
DUP duplex TH_US set value
C PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black and white plain paper 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
APP CNT duplex applying number of sheets
D HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW Black and white heavy paper 70 - 220 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195
DUP duplex TH_UM set value
E HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW Black and white heavy paper 70 - 220 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195
DUP duplex TH_US set value
F HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black and white heavy paper 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
APP CNT duplex applying number of sheets

Code descriptions

TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group A JAPAN – – – –
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –
Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A
Group D CHINA – – – –

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 40
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 43-10
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the postcard feed cycle
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
A POSTCARD CYCLE Postcard feed cycle 1 - 99 50

43-20
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the low-temperature, low-
humidity (L/L) environment correction for
the fusing temperature setting of each
paper (SIM43-01).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
A HL_UM READY LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55
B HL_US READY LL Correction value for TH_US set value in ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55
C HL_UM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
D HL_US PLAIN BW LL Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
E WARMUP FUMON HL_US T LL Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 50
F WARMUP FUMOFF LL Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under LL environment 1 - 99 50
G WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment 1 - 99 50
H HL_UM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
I HL_US HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
J HL_UM OHP LL Correction value for OHP-TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
K HL_US OHP LL Correction value for OHP-TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
L HL_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
M HL_US E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
N HL_UM PRE-JOB LL Correction value for the set value of TH_UM when restoring from preheating under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
O HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120C or below under LL environment 1 - 99 55
P HL_US WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120C or below under LL environment 1 - 99 55
Q LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value for O, P applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL environment 1 - 99 50
R HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120C or above under LL environment 1 - 99 55
S HL_US WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120C or above under LL environment 1 - 99 55
T HI_WU_TIME_LL Correction value for R, S applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL environment 1 - 99 50
U HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_UM in Warm-Up at alpha C or above under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
V HI_WU_END_TIME_LL Correction value for Warm-Up completion time in Warm-Up at alpha C or above under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
W HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (1) when Warm-Up at alpha C or above 1 - 99 50
under LL environment
X HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL Correction value for the threshold value alpha applying SIM43-1-U - W under LL environment 1 - 99 50
Y LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (1) when Warm-Up at alpha C or below 1 - 99 50
under LL environment
Z JOBEND_FUMON_TIME LL Correction value for the after rotation time when completing a job under LL environment 1 - 99 50
AA HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 LL Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (2) when Warm-Up at alpha C or above 1 - 99 50
under LL environment
AB LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 LL Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (2) when Warm-Up at alpha C or below 1 - 99 50
under LL environment

* WARMUP END TIME LL: 1 count = 1s change

Other correction values: 1 count = 1C change
* Items C/D: Correction of "–5" is made for item C and Item D in the case of B5 size

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 41
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Code descriptions

TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

• Correction value: (-49 - +49), Input value: Actual input value (1 - 99)

Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49

Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99

43-22
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the low-temperature, low-
humidity (L/L) environment correction for
the fusing temperature setting of each
paper (SIM43-04).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for the upper TH_UM black and white plain paper duplex under the LL 1 - 99 55
environment
B HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for the upper TH_US black and white plain paper duplex under the LL 1 - 99 55
environment
C PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white plain paper duplex under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
D HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for the upper TH_UM set value of black and white heavy paper duplex under the 1 - 99 55
LL environment
E HL_US HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for the upper TH_US set value of black and white heavy paper duplex under the 1 - 99 55
LL environment
F HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white heavy paper duplex under LL 1 - 99 50
environment

* PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL: 1 count = 1s change

Other correction values: 1 count = 1C change

Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

• Setting value: Target value (-49 - +49), Input value: (Actual input value) 1 - 99

Setting value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49

Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 42
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 44
44-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
tion in the image forming (process) section.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
CAUTION: Set the items to the default values unless a change is
specially required.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value NOTE

MD_VG Membrane decrease (GB) Enable/Disable setting Black text on Enable
MD_DV_LIFE DV life correction (GB, DVD) Enable/Disable setting white Enable
MD_ENV Environment correction (GB, DVD) Enable/Disable setting background Enable
MD_DUPLEX Duplex print correction (GB, DVD) Enable/Disable setting (Inhibit: 0=NO) Enable
White text on
MD_LD Membrane decrease life correction (laser power) Enable/Disable setting Enable
black
MD_LD_ENV Environment correction (laser power) Enable/Disable setting Enable
background
TN_LIFE Enable/Disable setting of the toner density life correction (Allow: 1=YES) Enable
TN_ENV Enable/Disable setting of the toner density environment correction Enable
TN_DUPLEX Toner density duplex print correction Enable/Disable setting Enable
TN_COV Enable/Disable setting of the toner density print ratio correction Enable
TN_AREA Enable/Disable setting of the toner density area correction Enable
TN_DRIP Enable/Disable setting of the toner density correction unconditional supply Enable
TC Enable/Disable setting of the transfer output correction Enable

44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.

Item/Display
Default
Mode Page number (*: Correction Content Display range
value
value)
CPY/ 1/2 (PROCESS) REF (TS_OFF) Left GB *** GB/DVB default value when TS is OFF 0 - 750 590
PRN*1 Right DVB *** 0 - 650 450
ALL (TS_OFF) Left GB *** GB/DVB value after addition or 0 - 750 590
Right DVB *** subtraction of the correction amount 0 - 650 450
when TS is OFF
REF (TS_ON_C) Left GB *** Copy GB/DVB default value when TS is 0 - 750 460
Right DVB *** ON 0 - 650 320
ALL(TS_ON_C) Left GB *** GB/DVB value after addition or 0 - 750 460
Right DVB *** subtraction of the correction amount 0 - 650 320
when Copy TS is ON.
REF (TS_ON_P) Left GB *** Printer GB/DVB default value when TS is 0 - 750 390
Right DVB *** ON 0 - 650 250
ALL (TS_ON_P) Left GB *** GB/DVB value after addition or 0 - 750 390
Right DVB *** subtraction of the correction amount 0 - 650 250
when Printer TS is ON
MD_VG Left GB *** Drum membrane decrease correction 0 - 255 0
amount GB value
MD_DV_LIFE Left GB *** Process developer life correction amount –127 - +127 0
Right DVB *** GB/DVB value –127 - +127 0
MD_ENV Left GB *** Environment correction amount GB/DVB –127 - +127 0
Right DVB *** value –127 - +127 0
MD_DUPLEX Left GB *** Duplex print correction amount GB/DVB 0 - 255 0
Right DVB *** value 0 - 255 0

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 43
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Item/Display
Default
Mode Page number (*: Correction Content Display range
value
value)
CPY/ 2/2 (LD) REF (TS_OFF) Left LD (CP) Laser power default value when TS is 0 - 255 For default
PRN*1 Right LD (PRT) OFF (CP/PRT) 0 - 255 values refer
ALL (TS_OFF) Left LD (CP) Laser power value after addition or 0 - 255 to "Default
Right LD (PRT) subtraction of the correction amount 0 - 255 values for
when TS is OFF (CP/PRT) each item".
REF (TS_ON_C) Left LD (CP) Laser power default value when TS is ON 0 - 255
Right LD (PRT) (CP/PRT) 0 - 255
ALL (TS_ON_C) Left LD (CP) Laser power value after addition or 0 - 255
Right LD (PRT) subtraction of the correction amount 0 - 255
when Copy TS is ON (CP/PRT)
MD_LD Left LD (CP) Drum membrane decrease laser power –127 - +127 0
Right LD (PRT) correction amount (CP/PRT) –127 - +127 0
MD_LD_ENV Left LD (CP) Environment laser power correction –127 - +127 0
Right LD (PRT) amount (CP/PRT) –127 - +127 0
OTHER 1/2 TN_TMP_AREA *** Toner control display temperature/ 1-8 4
(TN/TC/MD) humidity area
TN_TMP_DATA *** Toner control display temperature AD 0 - 1023 0
value
TN_HUD_DATA *** Toner control display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC_TMP_AREA *** Transfer display temperature/humidity 1-8 4
area
TC_TMP_DATA *** Transfer display temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC_HUD_DATA *** Transfer display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MD_VG_AREA *** Membrane decrease drum traveling 1 - 15 1
distance area
MD_DV_LIFE_AREA *** Developer life area for process 0 - 15 1
MD_ENV_AREA *** Environment correction area 1-8 1
MD_DUPLEX_COUNTER *** Duplex counter 0 - 300 0
MD_LD_AREA *** Laser power area 0 - 15 1
MD_LD_ENV_AREA *** Laser power environment area 0-8 4
2/2 DESTINATION Left xx Machine side management CRUM – –
(CRUM/CNT) destination
MODEL TYPE xx Model type of the machine 0-1 0
CRUM DEST_K Right xx Crum destination – –

*1: The left of the correction amount indicates the execution result, and the right indicates the reference value.
Default values for each item

Default value
Mode Item/Display
35cpm machine 31cpm machine 26cpm machine
CPY/ REF (TS_OFF) LD (CP) 181 163 145
PRN LD (PRT) 181 163 145
ALL (TS_OFF) LD (CP) 181 163 145
LD (PRT) 181 163 145
REF (TS_ON_C) LD (CP) 181 163 145
LD (PRT) 181 163 145
ALL (TS_ON_C) LD (CP) 181 163 145
LD (PRT) 181 163 145

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 44
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
44-14 To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
Purpose Operation data display mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem- in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
perature and humidity sensor. adjustment value.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
LSU
sity is decreased.
Operation/Procedure
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine Setting Default
Item/Display Content
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed. range value
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
Item/ Content Display range HIGH 1 - 99 50
Display B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main Temperature: HIGH 1 - 99 50
detection temperature 0 - 255C (1C) C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
Fusing upper thermistor main AD value: 0-1023 HIGH 1 - 99 50
detection temperature A/D value
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub Temperature: PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
detection temperature 0 - 255C (1C)
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50
Fusing upper thermistor sub AD value: 0-1023
Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50
detection temperature A/D value
TH_RA Temperature thermistor Temperature: F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
Temperature thermistor A/D value –40.0-60.0C (0.1C) HIGH 1 - 99 50
AD value: 0-123 G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HUD_RA Humidity sensor Humidity: HIGH 1 - 99 50
Humidity sensor A/D value 5.0-90.0% (0.1%) H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
AD value: 0-1023 HIGH 1 - 99 50

44-43 46-4
Purpose Data display Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa- Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
tion of the developing unit. send mode.
Section Developing system Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
The identification number and the identification signal level of the 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
developing unit are displayed. panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Display
Item/Display Content NOTE * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
range
A DVCH K developing unit 1-9 The model item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
KIND K identification identification number of 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
number the developing unit
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
which is backed up in
increased, and vice versa.
the EEPROM of the
machine.
Setting Default
B DV_TYP_ K developing unit 0-1 0 = High (Open) Mode Item/Display Content
range value
SEL_K identification 1 = Low (GND)
LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
detection
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C DVCH_ K developing unit 0 - 255 AD value of the
AD_K identification AD developing unit C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
value identification voltage PHOTO
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
46 HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
46-2 PHOTO
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode) D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
mode.
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 45
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
46-5
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode) mode, and the fax mode.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
send mode. increased, and vice versa.
Section
Setting Default
Operation/Procedure Item/Display Content
range value
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
panel. adjustment (Low density side)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each adjustment (Low density side)
C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
adjustment (Low density side)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is adjustment (High density side)
increased, and vice versa. E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (Low density side)
Setting Default F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53
Mode Item/Display Content
range value adjustment (high density)
LOW A AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
46-19
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Purpose Setting
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 density scanning (exposure) of mono-
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 chrome auto copy mode documents.
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
Section
HIGH A AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 Select an item to be set with touch panel.
PHOTO When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 saved.
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 Default
Item/Display Content Set value
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50 value
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE2
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
46-8
Stop (for copy) STOP/
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) PRESCAN
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
Stop (for FAX)
balance RGB.
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Section Stop (for scanner) STOP/
Operation/Procedure PRESCAN
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL
panel.
SHARP
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART PART
panel.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. NOTE:
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images)
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
MODE 2 Normal gamma
area and the high density area.
STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the scanned, and the output image density is determined
target color is increased, and vice versa. according to the scanned density. (The output image density
is even for all the surface.)
Default REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned
Item/Display Content
value sequentially, and the output image density is determined
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50 according to the density in each area of document. (The
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50 output image density may not be even for all the surface.)
PRESCAN The densities of the all surface of document are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is determined
46-9
according to the average of the scanned densities. (The
Purpose Adjustment (RSPF mode) output image density is even for all the surface.)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density. AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome auto
FULL mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the document
Section width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
Operation/Procedure AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome auto
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch PART mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x 100mm
panel. width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.

2) Enter the set value with 10-key.

* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 46
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 46-30 46-37
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
scanning direction in the copy mode. of monochrome mode color.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre- 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
sponding to the resolution mode with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
4) Press [YES] key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow
range value
A SCAN Scan resolution Mode1 0-1 0 0 images when copying color documents with red and yellow images
RESOLUTION selection Mode2 1 in the monochrome mode.
SW (COPY: COLOR) Applied to the copy mode only.

Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI) Setting Default

Item/Display Content
Scan 25-99% 100-200% 201-400% range value
Mode A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 63
mode [Magnification [Magnification [Magnification
ratio] ratio] ratio] B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 877
Mode1 OC 600 600 1200
RSPF 600 600 – B-Ratio Gray making setting (B)
Mode2 OC 300 600 1200 (1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)
RSPF 400 600 –
* B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from
the formula below.
1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio
46-32 When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
Purpose Adjustment/Setup values (Default).
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased,
density reproducibility in the monochrome the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment
auto copy mode. value is decreased, the density is increased.
Section When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased,
Operation/Procedure the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjust-
ment value is decreased, the density in also decreased.
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
46-39
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
images.
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background Section
and the low density image is decreased. Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
range value
A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 numeric value to decrease moire.
D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 range value
A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone OFF
B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone OFF
C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone ON
D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone OFF
E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone ON
F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone OFF
G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone ON
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone OFF
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone ON

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 47
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 46-40 46-42
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Collective adjustment of all the modes) (Fine)
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.

Setting Default Setting Default

Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX send 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50
LEVEL(ALL) image density. (Collective B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
adjustment of all the modes) C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
46-41 G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Halftone
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
Halftone
(Normal)
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
Section Halftone
Operation/Procedure J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
1) Set the document on the document table. Halftone
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Halftone
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set Halftone
and the scanned document image is outputted. M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1
MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 12 2 (AUTO)
Setting Default Exposure 1
Item/Display Content
range value EXP2 Fine/ 3
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 Exposure 2
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 EXP3 Fine/ 4
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 Exposure 3
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 EXP4 Fine/ 5
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 Exposure 4
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 EXP5 Fine/ 6
Exposure 5
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1
MODE mode Exposure 1 (AUTO) AUTO Fine/ 7
EXP1 2
H_TONE Automatic/
EXP2 Exposure 2 3
halftone
EXP3 Exposure 3 4
EXP1 Fine/ 8
EXP4 Exposure 4 5 H_TONE Exposure 1/
EXP5 Exposure 5 6 Halftone
EXP2 Fine/ 9
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu-
H_TONE Exposure 2/
ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F, Halftone
and press [EXECUTE] key. EXP3 Fine/ 10
H_TONE Exposure 3/
Halftone
EXP4 Fine/ 11
H_ONE Exposure 4/
Halftone
EXP5 Fine/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5/
Halftone

To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-

ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 48
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 46-43 46-44
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Super Fine) (Ultra fine)
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.

Setting Default Setting Default

Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
Exposure 1 C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
Exposure 2 E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
Exposure 3 G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 Halftone
Exposure 4 H EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 1/Halftone
Exposure 5 I EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 2/Halftone
Auto/Halftone J EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 3/Halftone
Exposure 1/Halftone K EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 4/Halftone
Exposure 2/Halftone L EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 5/Halftone
Exposure 3/Halftone M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
Exposure 4/Halftone EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 1
Exposure 5/Halftone EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 3
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine/ 1- 1 1 Exposure 2
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO) EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 4
EXP1 Super Fine/ 2 Exposure 3
Exposure 1 EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 5
EXP2 Super Fine/ 3 Exposure 4
Exposure 2 EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 6
EXP3 Super Fine/ 4 Exposure 5
Exposure 3 AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7
EXP4 Super Fine/ 5 H_TONE Auto/
Exposure 4 Halftone
EXP5 Super Fine/ 6 EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 8
Exposure 5 H_TONE Exposure 1/
AUTO Super Fine/ 7 Halftone
H_TONE Auto/ EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 9
Halftone H_TONE Exposure 2/
EXP1 Super Fine/ 8 Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 1/ EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 10
Halftone H_TONE Exposure 3/
EXP2 Super Fine/ 9 Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 2/ EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 11
Halftone H_TONE Exposure 4/
EXP3 Super Fine/ 10 Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 3/ EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 12
Halftone H_TONE Exposure 5/
EXP4 Super Fine/ 11 Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 4/
Halftone To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
EXP5 Super Fine/ 12 ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
H_TONE Exposure 5/ and press [EXECUTE] key.
Halftone

To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-

ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 49
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 46-45 46-47
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy
(600dpi). and scan images (JPEG).
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [OK] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set The set value is saved.
and the scanned document image is outputted.
Operation Setting Default
Item/Display Content
Setting Default mode range value
Item/Display Content
range value FILLING A FILLING LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50 (COLOR) (C) compression
B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 (COLOR (Color)
C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 mode)*1 MIDDLE Medium 1
D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 compression
(Color)
E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
HIGH High 2
F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
compression
G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
(Color)
Halftone 1
FILLING B FILLING LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
(GRAY) (G) compression
Halftone
(Mono- (Gray)
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50 chrome MIDDLE Medium 1
Halftone halftone compression
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50 mode)*1 (Gray)
Halftone
HIGH High 2
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50 compression
Halftone (Gray)
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50 PUSH C SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
Halftone SCAN (C) *1 1 compression (MIDDLE
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/ 1- 1 1 (COLOR) mode 1 2)
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO) (Scanner Low
EXP1 600dpi/ 2 (Color compression
Exposure 1 mode)) MIDDLE Medium 1
EXP2 600dpi/ 3 2 compression
Exposure 2 mode 2
EXP3 600dpi/ 4 Medium
Exposure 3 compression
EXP4 600dpi/ 5 MIDDLE Medium 2
Exposure 4 3 compression
EXP5 600dpi/ 6 mode 3
Exposure 5 High
AUTO 600dpi/ 7 compression
H_TONE Auto/ PUSH D SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
Halftone SCAN (G) *2 1 compression (MIDDLE
EXP1 600dpi/ 8 (GRAY) mode 1 2)
H_TONE Exposure (Scanner Low
1/Halftone (Mono- compression
EXP2 600dpi/ 9 chrome MIDDLE Medium 1
H_TONE Exposure halftone 2 compression
2/Halftone mode)) mode 2
EXP3 600dpi/ 10 Medium
H_TONE Exposure compression
3/Halftone MIDDLE Medium 2
EXP4 600dpi/ 11 3 compression
H_TONE Exposure mode 3
4/Halftone High
compression
EXP5 600dpi/ 12
H_TONE Exposure
*1: Disable without HDD.
5/Halftone
*2: Setting of compression rate for images when the image
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- compression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode.
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity
and press [EXECUTE] key.
in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other
hand, however, the image quality of some documents may
be remarkably reduced.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 50
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 46-60 46-61
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni-
auto copy mode. tion level.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. 1) Select an adjustment mode.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
3) Press [OK] key. panel.
The set value is saved. 3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content The set value is saved.
range value
A SCREEN H Sharpness Strong 1 3 (Auto) CAUTION: This must be set to the default unless any change is
FILTER (filter) emphasis specially required.
LEVEL L adjustment Soft 2 When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly dif-
of dot emphasis ferent from the default value, image quality trouble may
AUTO pattern Auto 3 occur for some documents.
image in
auto copy
Item/Display Content
mode
COLOR AUTO [Color/Gray] Auto
B CPY SOFT Sharpness SOFT 1 2
PUSH (filter) (CENTER)
TPP [Color/Gray] Manual (Text print)
CENTER CENTER 2
AUTO adjustment MONO AUTO [Monochrome] Auto
HIGH HIGH 3
FILTER for the TPP [Monochrome] Manual (Text print)
LEVEL automatic
push scan
Setting Default
mode Item/Display Content
range value
(Text,
A SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
Printed
[TXT ON SCR] Text on dot
Photo /
Printed B SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
Photo [LINE SCR] line screen
images) C SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
C B/W OFF Soft filter OFF 0 1 (ON) [SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area
COPY ON applying ON 1 D SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
setting in [HIGH LPI] High line number
monochro judgment select
me copy E SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
mode [TXT ON SCR IMAGE Text on image send
D COLOR OFF Soft filter OFF 0 1 (ON) SEND] dots
PUSH : ON applying ON 1 F SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
RGB setting to [BK TXT 1] adjustment: Black text
image in 1
push scan G SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
color mode [CL TXT 1] adjustment: Color text
E B/W OFF Soft filter OFF 0 1 (ON) 1
PUSH ON applying ON 1 H SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
setting to [BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2] adjustment: Black text
image in 2, Color text 2
push scan I SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
monochro [TXT ON SCR 1] adjustment: Text 1 on
me mode dots
F B/W OFF Setting of OFF 0 0 (OFF) J SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
PRINT ON ON/OFF of ON 1 [TXT ON SCR 2] adjustment: Text 2 on
soft filter dots
application K SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
to [TXT ON SCR AREA] adjustment: Detection
monochro area of text on dots
me print L SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
images [HIGH LPI] adjustment: High line
number judgment
M SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[BK] adjustment: No
chrome judgment
N SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[CL] adjustment: Chrome
judgment
O SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON BG] adjustment: Text on
background
P SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
[SCR 1 HIGH] adjustment: High
density dots

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 51
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
Q SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25 L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5
[SCR 1 MIDDLE] adjustment: Medium LV_C detection level
density dots adjustment (chroma)
R SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25 M AE_ ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
[SCR 1 LOW] adjustment: Low ONOFF_ OFF OFF switch: OFF 1
density dots CC For color copy
S SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8 N AE_ ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
[SCR 2] adjustment: Dot 2 ONOFF_ OFF OFF switch: OFF 1
T SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8 MC For mono-
[SCR 3] adjustment: Dot 3 chrome copy
U SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25 O AE_ ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
[LINE HALFTONE] adjustment: line ONOFF_ OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
screen CS For color scan
P AE_ ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
ONOFF_ OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
MS For mono-
46-62 chrome copy
Q BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
LV_L adjustment (value)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the R BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
ACS, the area separation, the background LV_C adjustment (chroma)
image process, and the auto exposure S MODE0_UNDER Mode 0 developing 0-6 0
mode. paper mode select
T MODE1_UNDER Mode 1 developing 0-6 0
Section
paper mode select
Operation/Procedure U MODE5_UNDER Mode 5 developing 0-6 0
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch paper mode select
panel. V MODE6_UNDER Mode 6 developing 0-6 0
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. paper mode select

3) Press [OK] key.

The set value is saved.
CAUTION: This must be set to the default unless any change is 46-63
specially required. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly dif- Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low
ferent from the default value, image quality trouble may density section.
occur for some documents. Section
Setting Default Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content
range value 1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
A SW_ACS ACS judgment reference 0-1 1 panel.
area select
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
B TEXT_IMAGE Text/Image judgment 0-6 3
priority level adjustment 3) Press [OK] key.
C TEXT_BLANK Text/Blank judgment 0-6 4 The set value is saved.
priority level adjustment When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1 background and the low density image is increased. When the
threshold value adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
adjustment
and the low density image is decreased.
E AE_AREA_LV Color AE judgment target 0-6 3
area adjustment Setting Default
F AE_LV_CC AE background detection 0-8 4 Item/Display Content
range value
division result A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3
adjustment: TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
For color copy
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3
G AE_LV_MC AE background detection 0-8 4
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
division result
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
adjustment:
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
For monochrome copy
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
H AE_LV_CS AE background detection 0-8 4
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
division result
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
adjustment:
For color scan F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
I AE_LV_MS AE background detection 0-8 4 G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
division result (color density)
adjustment: H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
For monochrome scan TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Character print
J AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0-4 0 (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
LV_L_U density threshold value I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, 1-9 5
adjustment (lower limit) (COPY TO COPY) Character
K AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 0 (color copy)
LV_L_O density threshold value J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
adjustment (upper limit) PRINTED PHOTO (COPY Printed photo
TO COPY) (color copy)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 52
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Setting Default
Item/Display Content 48-5
range value
K COLOR PUSH : Text print 1-9 3 Purpose Adjustment
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH) Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi-
L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3 cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5
Section Scanner section
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5 Operation/Procedure
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH) 1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 3 panel.
TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-
48 fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
this adjustment.
48-1 When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
Purpose Adjustment
is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica- the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
and the sub scanning direction). Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Section
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
panel. D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (High speed)
3) Press [OK] key. E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(Reference speed)
The set value is saved.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification
ratio is increased.
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre-
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio. 49
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corre-
sponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio. 49-1
Setting Default Purpose
Item/Display Content
range value Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update.
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
Section
magnification ratio adjustment
(CCD) Operation/Procedure
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 1) Save the firmware to the USB memory.
magnification ratio adjustment
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the
(CCD)
operation panel section.)
C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment 3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel.
(Main scan) 4) Select a target firmware.
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50 Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.
magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scan)
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50 6) Press [YES] key.
magnification ratio adjustment The selected firmware is updated.
(Main scan)
When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is
F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is dis-
magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scan)
played.

Error display in
Item/Display Content
case of abnormality
ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section ICUM
ICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main ICUBM
ICU (BOOTCN) ICU Boot section CN ICUCN
ICU (SUB) ICU Sub section (ARM9) ICUS
LANGUAGE Language support data LANG
program
GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD GRAPH
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD SLIST
PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section PCUB
PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section PCUM
FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher boot section FINB
FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher main section FINM

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 53
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Error display in 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display Content
case of abnormality
SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section SCUB Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
SCU (MAIN) SCU Main section SCUM
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section FAXB
edge edge reference
FAX (MAIN) FAX1 Main section FAXM
adjust- position (OC)
ANIMATION Animation data ANIME ment
B RRCB- Regis- Standard 1 - 99 50
WEB HELP WEB help WEBHP value CS12 tration Tray
C RRCB-DSK motor Desk 1 - 99 50
D RRCB-MFT ON Manual 1 - 99 50
timing paper
49-3 adjust- feed
Purpose E RRCB-ADU ment ADU 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the F Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
HDD. loss area loss area setting
G setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
Section value area adjustment
Operation/Procedure H Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 30
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. adjust- area adjustment
I ment DENB Rear edge void 1 - 99 30
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E-
area adjustment
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is
J FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1. REAR area adjustment
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis- K Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.) adjust- OC center adjustment
The current version and the update version are displayed. ment
L Magnificat SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ion ratio SPEED_ magnification ratio
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes correction OC adjustment (CCD)
active from gray out. M Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 57
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is scanning correction value
updated. N direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis- correction
O DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 57
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed. value value
P DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 57
value
49-5 Q DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 57
value
Purpose
R DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 60
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the watermark update. value
Section S DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
correction value
Operation/Procedure
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark the image lead edge reference is adjusted. ([Link]/step)
update. * When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. the value is increased, the timing is delayed.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. B - E. (RRC-B) The timing to turning ON the registration roller after
5) Press [YES] key. receiving the registration signal is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
The selected watermark is updated. * When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the
value is increased, the timing is advanced.
F. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step)

50 * When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.

G. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted.
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
50-1
(0.1mm/step)
Purpose Adjustment H. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust- step)
ment * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
Section I. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
Operation/Procedure step)
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
panel. J. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
default.
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
SIDE: Side image loss adjustment

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 54
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Setting Default
50-2 Item/Display Description
range value
Purpose Adjustment E Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and adjustment adjustment (When the
the image loss. (This simulation is a simpli- adjustment value is
increased, the void is
fied version of SIM 50-1.)
increased.)
Section F DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
Operation/Procedure adjustment (When the
adjustment value is
1) Set item A (L1) and item B (L2) to 0.
increased, the void is
2) Place a rule on the left edge of the document table, and make increased.)
a copy at a magnification ratio of 400%. G FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
3) Measure the length of L1 and L2 on the copied image in the REAR amount adjustment
unit of 0.1mm (referring to the figure below). Enter the adjust- (When the adjustment
ment values of L1 x 10 and L2 x 10. Be sure to enter the both value is increased, the
void is increased.)
adjustment values of L1 and L2.
L1: Distance from the lead edge of the copied image to 10mm Same as the adjusted items of SIM50-01 except for A and B.
scale. The values adjusted with A and B are reflected to the document
L2: Distance from the paper lead edge to the copy image lead lead edge reference position (RRC-A) of SIM50-01 and all the
edge. paper lead edge positions (RRCB-**).
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change

L1

Paper lead
edge

L2
400% enlargement copy

Fig. 1

4) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)

5) Make a copy at the magnification ratio of 100%, and adjust the
rear edge void.

Setting Default
Item/Display Description
range value
A Actual L1 Distance from the 0 - 999 -
measurem image lead edge to
ent value the scale of 10mm.
(Platen 400%, 0.1mm
increment)
B L2 Distance from the 0 - 999 0
paper lead edge to the
image lead edge
(0.1mm increment)
C Image loss LEAD Lead edge image loss 0 - 99 40
area amount setting (When
setting the adjustment value
value is increased, the
image loss is
increased.)
D SIDE Side edge image loss 0 - 99 20
amount setting (When
the adjustment value
is increased, the
image loss is
increased.)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 55
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 50-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
position. (PRINTER MODE)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the
touch panel.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 4.0mm or less
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print lead edge image 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the
position. printer. When the adjustment value of this item is
(PRINTER MODE) decreased by 1, the printer print start position in the paper
transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
B DEN-B Rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the
adjustment value of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the
print area adjustment value in the sub scanning direction
for the paper transport direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 - 99 20 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and
right edges of paper. When the adjustment value is
increased, the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 57
correction value
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 57
correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 57
correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 57
correction value
I DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria adjustment 1 - 99 60
correction value
J DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value 1 - 99 50
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
L PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
M DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1

When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 56
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 50-6 50-7
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
the image loss. (RSPF mode) the image loss (RSPF mode). (This simula-
Section RSPF tion is a simplified version of SIM 50-6.)
Operation/Procedure Section RSPF
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch Operation/Procedure
panel. 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. panel.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 2) Set item A (L4) and item B (L5) to 0.
3) Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and make a copy in the
Setting Default RSPF duplex mode.
Item/Display Content
range value
4) Measure the size of the printed image. Enter the actual mea-
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
surement value of distance a (RSPF) to L4 and L5 in the unit of
document scan
position 0.1mm.
adjustment (CCD) (Adjustment value "1" for 0.1mm)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 L4: Distance a (RSPF front surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm)
document scan L5: Distance a (RSPF back surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm)
position
adjustment (CCD)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount amount setting
setting
SIDE1
D Image FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) image loss amount
amount setting
E setting TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
SIDE1 (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount setting
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
amount amount setting
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount
setting Distance "a"
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 40
(SIDE2) edge image loss
amount setting
I OFSET_SPF1 SPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off- 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
center adjustment
J OFSET_SPF2 SPF back surface 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
document off- range value
center adjustment A L4 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50 0.1mm unit) from the front
front surface surface image lead edge to
magnification ratio the scale of 10mm.
(Sub scan) B L5 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50 0.1mm unit) from the back
back surface surface image lead edge to
magnification ratio the scale of 10mm.
(Sub scan) C LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing D FRONT_REAR Front surface side image 0 - 99 20
is delayed. (SIDE1) loss amount setting
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 40
is increased. (SIDE1) image loss amount setting
F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
G FRONT_REAR Back surface side image 0 - 99 20
Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change (SIDE2) loss amount setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 40
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting

Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss

is increased.
Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
Items C - H are linked with items C - H of SIM50-06.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 57
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
fication ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value NOTE

A MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value (Manual paper feed) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment Item
B MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 50 List
C MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 50
D MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 50
E MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 50
F MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (Duplex) 1 - 99 50
CAUTION: If the adjustment items A - F are not properly adjusted,
this adjustment cannot be executed properly.
G SUB-MFT Registration motor ON timing adjustment Manual paper feed 1 - 99 50
H SUB-CS12 Standard cassette 1 - 99 50
I SUB-DSK DESK 1 - 99 50
J SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern
L PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-5 1 2 (CS1) print conditions
CS1 Tray 1 2 setting
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
M DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1

Item A - F: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to
the rear frame side. 1 step = 0.1mm change

50-12
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center
position adjustment. (The adjustment is
made separately for each scan mode.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
1step = 0.1mm

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A OC Document table image off-center adjustment 1 - 99 50
B SPF (SIDE1) SPF front surface image off-center adjustment 1 - 99 50
C SPF (SIDE2) SPF back surface image off-center adjustment 1 - 99 50

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 58
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 50-27
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
of scanned images in the FAX or image
send mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]
key.
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
B amount setting FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
C OC TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
E amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
When A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
image B amount setting FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
send mode C OC TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
(Except for D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
FAX and amount setting
E FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
copy) SPF SIDE1
F TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)

A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm

50-28 Item/Display Content Section

Purpose Adjustment OC ADJ MFT Document lead Image loss off- Scanner
CS1 edge center sub scanning
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image direction image
CS2
loss, void area, image off-center, and image Document off- magnification ratio
magnification ratio. center adjustment
Sub scanning (Document table
Section
magnification ratio mode)
Operation/Procedure
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
Item/Display Content Section
SIM50-28.
SPF ALL SIDE1 MFT Document Image loss Scanner
* ADJ 12 Print image position, image magnification ratio, void ADJ (Front lead edge off-center
area, off-center adjustments (Manual adjustments) (RSPF) surface) sub
* ADJ 13 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual SIDE2 CS1 Document scanning
(Back CS2 off-center direction
adjustment)
surface) Sub image
* ADJ 14 Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) scanning magnifica-
* ADJ 15 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image magnifica- tion ratio
loss (Manual adjustments) tion ratio adjustment
Document (RSPF
1) Select an adjustment item with the menu button.
lead edge mode)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed. Document
3) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. off-center
Sub
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
scanning
5) Press [OK] key. magnifica-
tion ratio

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 59
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Item/Display Content Section
SETUP/ ALL LEAD MFT Print off Print lead Engine
PRINT CS1 center edge
ADJ CS2 adjustment,
OFFSET ADU Print lead image off-
edge center
CS3
(each paper
CS4
feed tray,
duplex
mode)
adjustment

RESULT Adjustment result display

DATA Adjustment operation data display

51
51-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
the RSPF registration roller. (This adjust-
ment is performed when there is a consid-
erable variation in the print image position
on the paper or when paper jams frequently
occur.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) (When RSPF model)
Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
[ENGINE] keys.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Setting Default
Mode Display/Item Content
range value
SIDE1 A NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
SIDE2 A NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
ENGINE A TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 25
(Plain paper/Small size) or less
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 25
(Plain paper/Large size) or above
C TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 50
(Plain paper/Small size) or less
D TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 50
(Plain paper/Large size) or above
E MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 40
or less

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 60
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Setting Default
Mode Display/Item Content
range value
ENGINE F MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 40
or above
G MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 70
(Heavy paper/Small size) or less
H MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 70
(Heavy paper/Large size) or above
I MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 30
J MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope) - 1 - 99 40
K ADU PLAIN PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 50
(Plain paper/Small size) or less
L ADU PLAIN PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 50
(Plain paper/Large size) or above
M DESK (S) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Small size) or less
N DESK (L) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 25
(Plain paper/Large size) or above

Note on “Large size” and “Small size”

Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter than the LT size (216mm).
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer than the LT size (216mm).
Adjustment value
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp amount is
decreased.
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)

6) Press [EXECUTE] key.

51-9
The A5R width detection level is recognized.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
7) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
separation voltage.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
Section
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is
Operation/Procedure displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally,
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key. "COMPLETE" is displayed.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
Setting Default 3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
Item Display Content 4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
range value
A SHV ON Separation voltage ON/OFF 25 - 90 50
timing adjustment *1
B SHV OFF Separation voltage OFF timing 50 - 90 75
adjustment *2 53-7
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
*1: Transfer V2ON reference
(Synchronized with the adjustment value of 50) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the RSPF document size
width sensor.
*2: Transfer V2OFF reference
(Synchronized with the adjustment value of 50) Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
53 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
53-6
Setting Default
Purpose Adjustment Item/Display
range value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 84
RSPF document width. B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 509
C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 808
Section
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 961
Operation/Procedure
1) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The maximum width detection level is recognized.
3) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
5) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 61
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 53-8 55-10
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref- Function (Purpose) Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan
erence and the RSPF mode document only)
scan position. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key.
Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key. 2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key.
AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
(Auto adjustment)
1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document Setting Default
Item/Display Content
table. range value
A 1ST DIGIT First digit (left edge) 1 - 90 1
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
B 2ND DIGIT Second digit
adjustment value is saved.)
C 3RD DIGIT Third digit 32 [blank:
20H]
Setting Default
Item/Display Content D 4TH DIGIT Fourth digit 65 - 90
range value
[Alphabet:
MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
41H("A) -
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit)
5AH("Z")]
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
E 5TH DIGIT Fifth digit 48 - 57
reference position
[Numeral:
MANUAL: RSPF mode document scan position adjustment 30H("0") -
39H("9")]
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
F 6TH DIGIT Sixth digit (right
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) edge)
G COLOR K Color specification 0 0
Setting Default C input 1
Item/Display Content
range value
M 2
A ADJUST RSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 5
Y 3
VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
R 4
stop position adjustment)
G 5
• When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi- B 6
tion in the RSPF mode is shifted to the right. H TYPE PATTERN Print Edging 0 1
1 com- type
• When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
PATTERN posing OR 1
shifted by 0.1mm.
2 method process
type
PATTERN No- 2
55 3 delete-
compo-
sition type
55-1
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially Input value
required.) Print Blank A B C E F G
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine Input value 32 65 66 67 69 70 71
control operations. (SOFT SW)
Print H I J K L M N
Section
Input value 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
Operation/Procedure
Print O P Q R T U V
55-2 Input value 79 80 81 82 84 85 86
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.) Print W X Y Z 0 1 2
Input value 87 88 89 90 48 49 50
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
ner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Print 3 5 6 7 8 9
Section Input value 51 53 54 55 56 57
Operation/Procedure

55-3
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
ler operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 62
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Data list outside the backup targets
56 EEPROM/SD Card

PWB Type Content NOTE

56-1
Controller Machine serial No.
Purpose Backup Product key information
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP Various counter Copy counter/FAX
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the send counter etc.
PWB.) Trouble history
PCU Machine serial No.
Section
Various counter Maintenance counter
Operation/Procedure Machine adjustment execute
1) Select a target content of data transfer. history
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key. Trouble history
SCU Various counter Maintenance counter
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
Trouble history
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. HDD

EEPROM  HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD Classifi-

Content NOTE
HDD  EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM cation
Japanese User dictionary
FEP
Job end list Job end list display data
56-2 (The image send series include
the preserved job list.)
Purpose Data backup
Log Job log Read from WEB is
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. enable.
SD Card, and HDD (including user authen- New N/A • Print history information
tication data and address data) to the USB • JAM history information
memory. (Corresponding to the device • Trouble history information
cloning and the storage backup.) • Same position continuous jam
count value
Section • Charging information
Operation/Procedure • Life information
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. Operation E-manual
manual
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
<IMPORT>
56-3
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SD Card HDD
Purpose Data backup
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD To USB MEMORY Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. the USB memory.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed Section
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is Operation/Procedure
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Machine with the DSK installed 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. <IMPORT>
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card, HDD
• IMPORT <EXPORT>
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card HDD
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
• EXPORT
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
3) Enter the password with 10-key.
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
4) Press [SET] key.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. 56-4
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
Purpose Data backup
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
USB memory.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 63
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 56-5
60
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB
60-1
memory in the TEXT format.
Purpose Operation test/check
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to check the memory operations
Operation/Procedure
(read/write) of the MFP PWB.
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Section
2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.
Start the test.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. Result display Description
OK Success
NG Fail
56-11 NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble)
INVALID Execution disable
Purpose Data copy
Function (Purpose) Used to save the data in the SD card to the
SLOT Description
HDD temporarily.
ICU SLOT-1 ICU standard memory DIMM1
Section ICU SLOT-2 ICU expansion memory DIMM2
Operation/Procedure PCL SLOT-1 Printer standard memory DIMM3
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. PCL SLOT-2 Printer expansion memory DIMM4
The data are saved temporarily to the HDD. ACRE SLOT Enhanced compression kit memory -

When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is

displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
61
Error display Content
COMPLETE Normal completion
61-1
WARNING HDD unmounting
ERROR (HDD ACCESS ERROR) HDD access disable Purpose Operation test/check
ERROR (LOW LEVEL BLOCK Low level block IO error: write Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
WRITE ERROR) tion and laser detection.
ERROR (LOW LEVEL BLOCK Low level block IO error: read
Section LSU
READ ERROR)
ERROR (NO DATA ADJUSTMENT) Inconsistent data Operation/Procedure
TROUBLE (U2-42) U2-42 occurrence 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.

56-12 Display Content

Purpose Data copy LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
Function (Purpose) Used to copy the SD card data saved tem-
porarily in the HDD with SIM56-11 to the
machine.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
The set values are copied from the HDD to the SD card.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.

Error display Content

COMPLETE Normal completion
WARNING SD/HDD unmounting
NO DATA No data
ERROR (EXPORT DATA ILLEGAL) Export data illegal
ERROR (LOW LEVEL BLOCK Low level block IO error: read
READ ERROR)
ERROR (NO DATA ADJUSTMENT) Inconsistent data (Error at the verify
check)
ERROR (SD ACCESS ERROR) SD access error (File IO error)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 64
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 61-3
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY], [PR600/
FAX], [PR1200] on the touch panel.
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
line images are increased.

Default value
Setting Destination
Mode Item/Display Content 26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
range linkage
machine machine machine
COPY A LASER POWER (BW) Laser power setting/BW 0 - 255 145 163 181 ✕
B LASER POWER TS (BW) Laser power setting toner save/BW 0 - 255 145 163 181 ✕
PR600/FAX A LASER POWER (BW) Laser power setting/BW 0 - 255 145 163 181 ✕
B LASER POWER TS (BW) Laser power setting toner save/BW 0 - 255 145 163 181 ✕
PR1200 A LASER POWER (BW) Laser power setting/BW 0 - 255 145 163 181 ✕
B LASER POWER TS (BW) Laser power setting toner save/BW 0 - 255 145 163 181 ✕

62-6
62
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the
62-1
hard disk.
Purpose Data clear
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (HDD:
Operation/Procedure
Excluding the Operation manual and the
watermark data) 1) Select the self diag area.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section
The self diag operation is performed.
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. NOTE: E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD,
use this simulation to cheek the HDD.
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the HDD format. SHORT S.T Partial area diag
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the EXTENDED S.T All area diag
normal display.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
Normal completion  "OK (RESULT:0)" is displayed.
62-2
Abnormal end  "NG (RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
Purpose Operation test/check * If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec-
(partial). tion.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 62-7
2) Press [YES] key. Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics
error log.
62-3 Section
Purpose Operation test/check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(all areas). ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and
Section the result is printed.
Operation/Procedure When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
Read/write operations are performed.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 65
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 62-8 62-13
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Operation
Excluding the Operation Manual, the water- Manual, watermark data only)
mark data, and the system area) Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
2) Press [YES] key. The operation manual data are deleted.
Used to execute the hard disk format. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
normal display.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA) 62-14
NG" is displayed.
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize (remake) only the data-
base file of the HDD.
62-10
Section HDD
Purpose Data clear
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the job completion list data.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section
2) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure
The database file is initialized
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
2) Press [YES] key. normal display.
Used to delete the job log data.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
63
62-11
63-1
Purpose Data clear
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction
Section result.
Operation/Procedure Section Scanner
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key. 1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
Used to delete the document filing data. panel.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display. Item/
Content NOTE
Display
GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value
(odd number)
62-12 GAIN EVEN Gain adjustment value
Purpose Setting (Even number)
OFFSET Offset value
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format ODD (odd number)
in a hard disk trouble. OFFSET Offset value
Section EVEN (even number)
Operation/Procedure SMP AVE Reference plate
ODD sampling average
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. value (ODD)
2) Press [OK] key. SMP AVE Reference plate
The set value is saved. EVEN sampling average
value (EVEN)
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system
TARGET Target value
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system VALUE
data storage area is cleared. BLACK Black output level
LEVEL
A 0 Enable
1 Disable (Default)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 66
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Item/
Content NOTE 63-4
Display
ERROR Error code 0 No error Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
CODE (0, 1-14) 1 Loop number over Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
(for debug) 2 The target value is under
Section
the specified value.
3 The gain set value is
Operation/Procedure
negative. 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
4 END is not asserted. the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
(Gain adjustment) ment table.
5 (reserve) 2) Select a target color of data display with [R] [G] [B] keys, and
6 Underflow press [OC] key.
7 Black shading error
3) Select a data display mode.
8 Other error
9 END is not asserted. GAMMA THROUGH SIT chart scan data
(White shading)
COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the SIT chart
10 END is not asserted. scan data
(Black shading)
SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of the SIT
11 END is not asserted. chart scan data
(Light quantity correction)
SIT CHECK SIT chart scan data/Check result
12 END is not asserted.
(Scan) 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
13 Register check error.
The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.
(When booting/
Before gain) When the operation is completed, data are displayed on the
14 Register check error. initial screen.
(Before light quantity
correction) 63-5
RSPF First scan
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
WHITE RSPF white reference
LEVEL 1ST level Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color
RSPF Second scan balance and gamma default setting.
WHITE RSPF white reference Section
LEVEL 2ND level
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [SIDE A(OC)] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key
63-2
3) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
Purpose Adjustment default.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) (When RSPF model)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
Used to perform shading.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.

63-3
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color bal-
ance and gamma auto adjustment.
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-
ument table.
2) Select a target color of data display with [R] [G] [B] keys, and
press [OC] key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per-
formed.
When the operation is completed, data are displayed on the initial
screen.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 67
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 64
64-2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Change the set values with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 - 58 1
(1, 2, 17 - 19) (* For details, refer to the description below.) (Printable only 1, 2, 17 - 19)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 254
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (DOT1>=2 IF A:2) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) CHAR/PIC specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17-19: 2-8 2 (STANDARD
CHAR/PRPIC Text/ Photograph except above: 1-8) 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-5 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1 (NO)
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-6 1 1
HEAVY Heavy paper 2 (PLAIN)
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4

Print pattern of Item A

Pattern generating
Pattern No. Content NOTE
section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC • Print is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
• Writing regardless of void. The first one is fixed to LD1.
2 Dot print –
17 All background (halftone) Halftone (IMG-ASIC –
18 256 gradations pattern rear process) • 16 gradations are printed in the main scan direction, and the following 16 gradations
(Other dither) are printed in the next line. (16 x 16 patch print)
• Printing is started at 5mm from the paper lead edge.
• Printing is made from 255 gradation, and 0 - 254 gradations are printed.
19 256 gradations pattern –
(For text dither)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 68
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 64-4
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Change the set values with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-3 3
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray selection Manual paper feed 1 3
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS2)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
E PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

Print pattern of Item A

Pattern No. Content
1 256 gradations pattern (B/W)
2 Halftone pattern (B/W)
3 Background dot print

64-5
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Change the set values with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-2 2
B MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
C PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
D PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1 (PLAIN)
E TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)

Print pattern of Item A

Pattern No. Content
1 B/W
2 Service chart (B/W)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 69
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 64-6
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Change the set values with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 1
B MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
C PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
D PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1 (PLAIN)
E TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)

Print pattern of Item A

Pattern No. Content
1 B/W

65-2
65
Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis-
65-1
play section) detection coordinates.
Purpose Adjustment
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis-
Operation/Procedure
play section) detection coordinates.
Touch the touch panel.
Section Operation panel section
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of
Operation/Procedure the touched position is displayed in real time.
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen. 

When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to  ;< 
the simulation sub number entry menu.  


In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu.

        




 
 



MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 70
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 65-5 66-2
Purpose Operation check/test Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key Function (Purpose) Used to enter a country code and set the
input. default value for the country code.
Section Section FAX
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-02, the following
the screen. screen is displayed.
If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key * When [DEST CODE] button is pressed, the display is shifted
is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE" to the country code list screen.
is displayed. * The currently set country code is displayed in the column of
<Check target key> "PRESENT:".
2) Enter the country code (8 digits) with 10-key([0]/[1]). The
JOB STATUS
entered country code is displayed in the column of "NEW:" and
SYSTEM SETTINGS
[SET] key becomes active.
HOME
* When [C] key is pressed, the column of “NEW:” is cleared.
1
2 3) When [SET] button is pressed after entering the country code,
3 [EXECUTE] button becomes active. The country code is dis-
4 played in the column of "PRESENT:", and the column of
5 "NEW:" is cleared.
6 4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
7 [YES] and [NO] buttons become active. The country name is
8 displayed on the tile line.
9 5) When [YES] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the soft SW
AUDIT CLEAR corresponding to the country code is initialized.
0
6) After completion of initialization of the soft SW, [EXECUTE],
PROGRAM
[YES], and [NO] buttons become inactive.
CLEAR
Operation/Procedure (Shifting to the country page)
STOP
CLEAR ALL/RESET * When [DEST CODE] button is pressed on the initial screen, the
START (MONO) display is shifted to the country code list screen.
Use scroll keys to select the country select page.
Country code list
JAPAN 00000000
66 U.S.A. 10110101
AUSTRALIA 00001001
U.K. 10110100
66-1 FRANCE 00111101
Purpose Setting GERMANY 00000100
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 SWEDEN 10100101
- 150) on the LCD to allow changing the NEWZEALAND 01111110
soft SW while checking with the LCD. CHINA 00100110
SINGAPORE 10011100
Section FAX
TW 11111110
Operation/Procedure MIDDLEANDNEAREAST 11111101
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key. SLOVAKIA 11111100
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value of [SW NO] is OTHER3 11111011
cleared. FINLAND 00111100
NORWAY 10000010
2) Press [DATA] button.
DENMARK 00110001
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
NETHERLANDS 01111011
* When [SW NO] button is pressed, the display returns to the ITALY 01011001
initial screen. SWITZERLAND 10100110
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with AUSTRIA 00001010
10-key. INDONESIA 01010100
* [1]  [0] THAILAND 10101001
MALAYSIA 01101100
[0]  [1]
INDIA 01010011
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
PHILIPPINES 10001001
setting is saved.
HONGKONG 01010000
After saving the setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the nor- RUSSIA 10111000
mal display. SOUTHAFRICA 10011111
SPAIN 10100000
PORTUGUESE 10001011
LUXEMBURG 01101001
BELGIUM 00001111
CZECH 00101110
HUNGARY 01010001

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 71
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 GREECE 01000110 Signal send table
POLAND 10001010
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34
BRAZIL 00010110
26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33
66-3 12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t
Purpose Operation test/Check
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the EEPROM 0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT
and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller
and display the result.
DP MAKE DP BRK NO MSG
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-03, the following
screen is displayed. 66-5
* Select the page of memory check item with the scroll key. Purpose Operation test/Check
2) When the memory check item button is selected, the display is Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal to the line
shifted to the memory check screen. and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the SW setting) (For the kinds of send signals,
memory check of the selected item is started. refer to SIM66-04.)
4) After completion of memory check, [EXECUTE] button returns Section FAX
to the normal display and the result of memory check is dis- Operation/Procedure
played. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-05, the following
Memory check status screen is displayed.
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
NO CHECK No check
CHECKING During checking 2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-
OK Check complete OK lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal
NG A## Check complete NG Error occurring address or data display.
line is displayed for each item. 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nals are sent.
Check item
4) To end signal send:
Check memory item Remark * When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
1 All Memory Device Check (once) All the items are checked signal send is interrupted.
once.
2 MODEM EEPROM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1
3 MODEM EEPROM <1> (repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
4 MODEM SDRAM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1 66-6
5 MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat) Repeat check in LINE1 Purpose Data output/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to print the confidential registration
The number in < > indicates the line.
check table (BOX NO., BOX name, pass-
code. (If there is no confidential registra-
66-4
tion, no print is made.)
Purpose Operation test/Check
Section FAX
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signals to the Operation/Procedure
line and the main unit speaker. (Send level:
1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
max.)
confidential checkable is printed.
Section FAX
* If there is no confidential registration, no print is made even
Operation/Procedure though [EXECUTE] key is pressed.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-04, the screen on the 2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
right is displayed. (Default, left upper selected.) normal display.
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-
lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal 66-7
display.
Purpose Data output/Check
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
Function (Purpose) Used to output all image data saved in the
nals are sent.
image memory. (Confidential data are also
4) To end signal send: outputted.)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
Section FAX
nal send is interrupted.
Operation/Procedure
1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
image data saved in the image memory are outputted.
2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 72
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 66-8 66-11
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound mes- Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
sages to the line and the speaker. (Send to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
level: Max.) Max.)
Section FAX Section FAX
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-08, the following 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-11, the following
screen is displayed. screen is displayed.
2) When the sound message button to be sent is selected, it is 2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
display. display.
<Sound message table> 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a
sound message is sent.
NONE (Mute) PAUSE (Pause MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2
melody) (Message 1) (Message 2) 4) To end signal send:
MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE6 When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
(Message 3) (Message 4) (Massage 5) (Message 6) nal send is interrupted.
ALARM (Alarm) RINGER [Link]
300bps send signal table
(Ringing sound ER (External
(Speaker)) telephone call) NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000
010101 00001

66-12
66-9
Purpose Operation test/Check
Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound message
to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
Soft SW setting)
Soft SW setting)
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps,
* For details of sound messages, refer to
refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal
the sound message table of SIM66-08.
table.
Section FAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-09, the following
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-12, the following
screen is displayed.
screen is displayed.
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
display.
display.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a
sound message is sent.
sound message is sent.
4) To end signal send:
4) To end signal send:
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nal send is interrupted.
nal send is interrupted.

66-13
66-10
Purpose Setting
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX and image send 14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be
image data. (The confidential data are also registered.)
cleared.)
Section FAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-13, the following
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. screen is displayed.
2) Press [YES] button. * The number saved in the memory is displayed in the column
3) After completion of clearing, press [CA] key to reboot the of [PRESENT:]. (If there is no data, [-------] is displayed.)
machine. 2) Enter a number with 10-key.
The entered number is displayed in the column of [NEW:].
After entering 20 digits, 10-key is disabled (no response). Only
[C] key is enabled. (10-key [0] to [9], [*], [#], [C] key (back by
one digit))
3) When [SET] key is pressed after completion of entry, the
entered number is displayed (registered) in the column of
[PRESENT:]. The column of [NEW:] becomes blank.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 73
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 66-14 66-18
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
send test and to adjust the make time. and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW set-
Section FAX ting)
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-14, the following Operation/Procedure
screen is displayed. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-18, the following
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the screen is displayed.
dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time. 2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The but- the previously set button returns to the normal display.
ton returns to the normal display and the test is terminated. 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nals are sent.
4) To stop signal sending:
66-15 When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal
Purpose Adjustment display and signal sending is interrupted.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS)
send test and to adjust the make time.
66-21
Section FAX
Purpose Check
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-15, the following Function (Purpose) Used to print the selected items (system
screen is displayed. error, protocol monitor).
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the Section FAX
dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time. Operation/Procedure
* The dial pulse in this example is up to 20 digits registered 1) When an item button to be printed is selected, it is highlighted
with SIM66-13. and the previously set button returns to the normal display.
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The but- 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
ton returns to the normal display and the test is terminated. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and printing is started.
3) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
66-16 normal display.
Purpose Adjustment FAX information print content table
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the DTFM signal send test
PROTOCOL LINE 1 SYSTEM ERROR LINE 1
and to adjust the send level.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-16, the following 66-22
screen is displayed. Purpose Setting
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the Function (Purpose) Used to set the handset sound volume.
dial pulse signal is sent from the line by the setting of high/low (This simulation can be executed even
group of the signal send level. though the handset setting is set to NO.
3) To terminate the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button. The button When, however, the handset is not
returns to the normal display and the test is terminated. installed, the sound volume cannot be
checked.) (Japan model only)
66-17 Section FAX
Purpose Operation test/Check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line 1) When the machine enters the simulation, the number of the set
and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) sound volume is displayed. (In this example, MIDDLE is set as
the default sound volume.)
Section FAX
2) Use 10-key to set the handset sound volume. (0: MIN 1:MID-
Operation/Procedure
DLE 2:MAX)
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-17, the following
3) Press [EXECUTE] button to deliver the selected on-hold tone.
screen is displayed.
* If, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume
2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
cannot be checked. Execution is possible.
the previously set button returns to the normal display.
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and deliv-
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
ery of the on-hold tone is stopped.
nals are sent.
4) To stop signal sending:
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal
display and signal sending is interrupted.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 74
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 66-24 66-32
Purpose Data clear Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAST save data. Function (Purpose) Used to check the fixed data received from
Section FAX the line and to display the result.
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] button. 1) Press [EXECUTE] button to check the fixed data received from
the line. At that time, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted.
The FAST save data are cleared.
* Fixed data check procedure
3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. • The data received from the line is checked of the following
fixed data status for minutes, then if they are in accord with
66-29 “OK” is displayed on LCD, if not “NG” is displayed.
• The judgment is made in 2 minutes.
Purpose Clear
Receive speed: 300BPS
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the telephone book data
(the one-touch registration table, the FTP/ Receive data: 00H
Desktop expansion table, the group expan- Judgment data: 100byte
sion table, the program registration table, 2) After completion of check, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
the interface memory box table, the meta normal display. The result is displayed as "OK" or "NG."
data, InboundRouting, and the Documen-
tAdmin table).
Section FAX 66-33
Operation/Procedure Purpose Operation test/Check
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. Function (Purpose) Used to execute detection of various sig-
2) Press [YES] button. nals with the line connected and to display
The telephone book data area cleared. the detection result. When a signal is
3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns detected, the display is highlighted.
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-30 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-33, the following
Purpose Operation test/Check screen is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, 2) The signal to be checked can be selected from the two
The display is highlighted by status change. options: "FNET" and "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF."
Section FAX 3) When a signal is detected, "FNET" and "BUSY TONE CNG
CED DTMF" are highlighted. When a signal is not detected,
Operation/Procedure
they are normally displayed.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-30, the following
Signal used for signal detection check
screen is displayed.
2) HS1, HS2, RHS, and EXHS are highlighted when the signal is (When "FNET" is selected)
detected, and displayed normally when the signal is not FNET
detected.
(When "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF" is selected)
TEL/LIU status change item description
BUSY TONE CNG CED DTMF
HS1 Polarity inversion signal
HS2 Polarity inversion signal
RHS Handset hook SW
EXHS External telephone hook SW
66-34
Purpose Operation test/Check
66-31
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the send test and display
Purpose Setting
the time required for sending image data in
Function (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to the test. Used to execute send test and dis-
TEL/LIU. play. (Unit: ms)
Section FAX Section FAX
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-31, the following 1) FAX send is performed.
screen is displayed. 2) Enter the SIM 66-34 mode.
2) Change the port setting. The send time in procedure 1) is displayed.
When a port is set to ON, the port display is highlighted.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the changed setting is
reflected to the port which outputs to TEL/LIU.
4) To terminate the process, press [EXECUTE] button again.
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
Port which outputs to TEL/LIU
CION MR EC S.

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 75
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 66-36 66-43
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check send and receive data from Function (Purpose) Used to write the adjustment value into the
the MODEM controller to the MFP control- power control installed in the FAX BOX.
ler or the data line or the command line Section FAX
individually.
Operation/Procedure
Section FAX
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-43, the following
Operation/Procedure screen is displayed.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-36, the following * Use scroll keys to select the select item of the power control
screen is displayed. adjustment value.
2) Operation check 2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and writing
Select an item to be checked on the screen. to the power control is executed. When writing is normally
completed, "OK" is displayed. When it is failed, "NG" is dis-
MFP controller I/F check item table
played.
MFP  MDMC (DATA once) MFP  MDMC (DATA once)
3) After completion of writing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
Data line Once Data line Once
mal display.
MFP  MDMC (DATA repeat) MFP  MDMC (DATA repeat)
Data line Repeat Data line Repeat Set range and default value of each set value
MFP  MDMC (CMD once) MFP  MDMC (CMD once)
Item Set range Default value
Command line Once Command line Once
A CI_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 6
MFP  MDMC (CMD repeat) MFP  MDMC (CMD repeat)
B CI_CYCLE_MIN 1 to 254 10
Command line Repeat Command line Repeat
C CI_CYCLE_MAX 2 to 255 142
D CI_COUNT 2 to 15 3
E RES_3.3V_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 15
F EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 225 240
66-39
G RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 2
Purpose Setting H SON_TIMEOUT 1 to 127 20
Function (Purpose) Used to check and change the destination
setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
Section FAX
66-61
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Setting
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the currently set des-
tination button is highlighted. (In the default state, JAPAN is set Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW
as the destination.) (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing
2) Select a destination button to set the destination. (In this the soft SW while checking with the LCD.
example, USA/CANADA is selected.) The selected button is Section FAX
highlighted and the previously selected button returns to the Operation/Procedure
normal display.
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
* When the destination button is changed, the new destination
2) Press [DATA] button.
setting is saved to EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
Destination setting table
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
JAPAN U.S.A/CANADA EUROPE AUSTRALIA 10-key.
CHINA ASIA&OTHERS * [1]  [0]
[0]  [1]
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
66-42 setting is saved.

Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to rewrite the program to power con-
66-62
trol installed in the FAX BOX.
Purpose Backup
Section FAX
Function (Purpose) Used to import the FAX receive data into a
Operation/Procedure
USB memory in PDF file type.
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.[EXECUTE] button is highlighted
Section FAX
and YES] and [NO] buttons become active.
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] button.
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
The power control program is rewritten.
2) Select data to be imported.
3) When rewriting of the power control program is normally com-
pleted, "OK" is displayed and [EXECUTE] button returns to the 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
normal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. Execute import of data selected in procedure 2).
When the operation is completed normally, [COMPLETE] is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, [ERROR] is displayed.

Error display Content

ERROR: NO USB MEMORY DEVICE No USB memory installed
ERROR: NO IMAGE DATA No image data
ERROR Other errors

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 76
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 67
67-17
Purpose Reset
Function (Purpose) Printer reset
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the
NIC setting.)
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.

67-45
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the printer image filter and
trapping.
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
A SHARPNESS: Monochrome 0-4 2 The greater
B/W PRINT print the set value
is, the
stronger the
filer
enhancement
is. The smaller
the set value
is, the
stronger the
filter
smoothness
is.
(0: Soft High,
1: Soft Low, 2:
Center, 3:
Sharp Low, 4:
Sharp High)

MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 77
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 [7] TROUBLESHOOTING
MX-M264U D. Self diag
Service operation
Manual
The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
1. Error code and troubleshooting displays the trouble message.
A. General A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- nearly expired or is expired.
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user may not be stopped.
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the the LCD and lamp.
machine to minimize the damage. Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
B. Function and purpose ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
tion.
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
trouble.)
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is sages must be cleared by a simulation.
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair, Monitors the machine
conditions.
improving the repair efficiency.)
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This Detects/analyzes
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con- the content.
sumable part.)

C. Self diag message kinds

Warning
࠙࣬
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below. Trouble/Warning
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬

Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the

user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration, Trouble
Πρήσ
etc.)
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
൲ै೪গ
The machine is stopped.
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others -
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a ඤယͬນা
The content is displayed.
consumable part, etc.)
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Others - Warning No
࠙࣬ A consumable OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime

Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬ಺औ the cause. ક࿍ΩȜΜ࢐۟¦༞‫ݯ‬
the consumable part.

ਘၑ
Repair

Cancel the self-diagnostic

ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠ΋ζϋΡȫ
message with the
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ૷౯ιΛΓȜΐ
diagnostic (test
ٜੰcommands).

Reset
໘‫ܦ‬

Standby
ఞ‫ેܥ‬ఠ state

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 1
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 E. Breakdown sequence
(1) Error code and operatable mode

Trouble Operatable mode

code
Judg- Copy scan FAST
(26cpm/ Scan-
Trouble content ment (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX Notifi-
31cpm/ To Print
block interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation
35cpm) HDD
tion) to host
machine)
FAX board trouble • FAX board MFP F6 (00, 01,       – – –
breakdown 04, 21, 30,
97, 98)
HDD trouble • SD card E7 (07) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
• HDD breakdown E7 (03) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
• HDD-ASIC E7 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
Scanner • SCU A0 (02) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
communication communication E7 (80)
trouble error
Engine • PCU A0 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
communication communication E7 (90)
trouble error
Option • ACU A0 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
communication communication
trouble error
Backup battery • Backup battery U1 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
voltage fall trouble voltage fall
Operation disable • Controller fan L4 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble 1 motor trouble
Operation disable • External serial I/F U7 (50, 51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
trouble 2 communication
error (RIC)
• Memory error U2 (00, 05, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 15
(included not 10, 11, 24,
installed the 40, 41, 42)
expansion RAM)
• Connection trouble A0 (10, 11, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(Model data 15, 20)
discrepancy) E7 (60, 61,
(MFPC detection) 65)
• Serial number data U2 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
error
• HDD registration U2 (50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
data check sum
error
Operation disable • Memory check E7 (96) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
trouble 3 error when booting
• Image memory E7 (01, 49, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
trouble, decode 91, 92, 93,
error 94)
Operation disable • Personal counter PC (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
trouble 4 connection trouble
Power controller • Power controller L8 (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
trouble error
Special function • Watermark data U2 (60)         
trouble error P1 (00, 01,
02)
Laser trouble • LSU breakdown PCU E7 (20, 21, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
28) *10
L6 (10)
Engine trouble 1 • Connection trouble A0 (21) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(Model data E7 (50, 55)
discrepancy) (PCU F1 (50, 95)
detection)

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 2
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Trouble Operatable mode
code
Judg- Copy scan FAST
(26cpm/ Scan-
Trouble content ment (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX Notifi-
31cpm/ To Print
block interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation
35cpm) HDD
tion) to host
machine)
Engine trouble 2 • PCU troubles PCU F2 (40, 64, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
(motor, fusing, etc.) 70, 74) *10
H2 (00, 01)
H3 (00, 01)
H4 (00, 01)
H5 (01)
L4 (01, 11,
31, 32, 35,
43, 44, 56)
L8 (01, 02)
U2 (90, 91)
Paper feed tray 1 • Paper feed tray 1 F3 (12) 3    3 3  3 
trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray 2 • Paper feed tray 2 F3 (22) 3    3 3  3 
trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray 3 • Paper feed tray 3 F3 (32, 42) 3    3 3  3 
trouble breakdown *10
Staple trouble • Staple breakdown F1 (10) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 
*10
Finisher trouble • After-process F1 (00, 03, 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 
breakdown 15, 19, 20, *10
37)
Other troubles • Other troubles EE (EL, EU)         
Process control • Process control F2 (39, 58)         
trouble breakdown (PCU *11
detection)
Operation disable • Connection trouble SCU A0 (22) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble (Model data
discrepancy) (SCU
detection)
SCU CPT ASIC • SCU CPT ASIC UC (02) 9 9 9 9   9  
trouble error
SCU ASIC trouble • SCU ASIC error UC (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
(SCU detection) (SCU detection)
Scanner trouble 1 • SCU EEPROM U2 (80, 81) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
error
Scanner trouble 2 • Scanner section L1 (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
breakdown (mirror L3 (00)
motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD trouble • CCD breakdown E7 (10, 11, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
(shading, etc.) 14)

: Operation enabled ✕: Operation disabled

1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.
3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section. * However, it is valid
only when the escape tray setting has been made.
9: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
*10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
*11: The trouble display is "Display to a 2-line message." (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
15: FAST notification function (When in U2-22, trouble notification cannot be made. If there is no abnormality in the FAX software or the
FAST data in U2-23, trouble notification can be made.)

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 3
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (2) Trouble detection sequence and trouble cancel sequence when turning on the power

MFP event Each block

manager

(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, F3 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is preformed in each block, check is made in each block.
and the result is sent to the MFP. Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
F3-12, 22 Saved in the PCU

(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 16 sim task

SIM13: U1 trouble cancel

SIM14: H3, H4, H5
(Color mode inhibition) cancel
SIM16: U2 trouble cancel
Trouble cancel
Trouble cancel command
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
Trouble cancel status
is communicated.

The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the MFP.
When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is displayed.

Process sequence Error code Content

U2 60 Watermark check error
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error (SD card when no HDD is installed)
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
First
(Low priority) 24 MFPC PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error
10 MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error
 A0 15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)
 U2 11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error
00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
Last E7 96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error
(High priority)
U1 01 Battery trouble
E7 60 MFP connection trouble
A0 04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM error

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 4
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 F. Error code list
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP 
02 SCU PWB ROM error MFP 
04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM error MFP 
10 Color profile error MFP 
11 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU) MFP 
15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware MFP 
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFP 
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU 
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU 
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP 
03 HDD trouble MFP 
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP 
07 SD card error MFP 
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU 
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU 
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU 
20 LSU laser detection error PCU 
21 LSU LD deterioration trouble PCU 
28 LSU control Asic connection error PCU 
49 Water Mark data error MFP 
50 PCU connection trouble PCU 
55 PCU PWB information sum error PCU 
60 MFP connection trouble MFP 
61 MFP connection trouble (PCU) MFP 
65 MFP EEPROM check sum error MFP 
80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error MFP 
90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error MFP 
91 FAX reception image data error MFP 
92 Copy image data error MFP 
93 Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print image data process error MFP 
94 Image file data process error (when importing file data) MFP 
96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error MFP 
EE EL Auto developer adjustment trouble (Over-toner abnormality) PCU 
EU Auto developer adjustment trouble (Under-toner abnormality) PCU 
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU 
03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU 
10 Staple operation trouble PCU 
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU 
19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU 
20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU 
29 Finisher cooling fan motor abnormality MFP 
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU 
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU 
95 Paper exit option configuration error PCU 
F2 39 Process thermistor trouble PCU 
40 Toner density sensor trouble PCU 
58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble (HUD_M/TH_M) PCU 
64 Toner supply operation trouble PCU 
70 Improper toner cartridge detection PCU 
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error PCU 
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU 
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU 
32 Paper feed tray 3 lift operation trouble
42 Paper feed tray 4 lift operation trouble
F6 00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication trouble MFP 
01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write error FAX 
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble FAX 
21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU PWB and FAX soft switch MFP 
30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (FAX detection) MFP 
97 Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the main machine MFP 
98 Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB destination and the main MFP 
machine destination
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM) PCU 
01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) PCU 
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU 
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU 

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 5
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU 
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU 
H5 01 5-time continuous jams of POD1, POD2, or PPD2 PCU 
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU 
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU 
L4 01 Main motor lock trouble PCU 
11 Shift motor trouble PCU 
30 MFP fan motor trouble MFP 
31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble PCU 
32 Power source cooling fan trouble PCU 
35 Fusing cooling fan trouble PCU 
43 Paper exit cooling fan 2 trouble PCU 
44 Power cooling fan 2 trouble PCU 
56 Fusing cooling fan 2 trouble PCU 
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU 
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU 
02 Full wave signal width abnormality PCU 
20 Power controller communication trouble MFP 
P1 00 PCI communication error MFP 
01 PCI fan error MFP 
02 Plasma generating device error MFP 
PC - Personal counter not detected MFP 
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP 
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP 
05 SD/MFPC PWB SRAM contents inconsistency MFP 
10 MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP 
11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP 
24 MFPC PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error MFP 
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP 
40 SD card system storage data area error MFP 
41 HDD system storage data area error MFP 
42 Machine adjustment data (system storage data area) error MFP 
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error MFP 
(SD card when no HDD is installed)
60 Watermark check error MFP 
80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU 
81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error SCU 
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU 
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU 
U7 50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine communication error MFP 
51 Vendor machine error MFP 
UC 02 CPT - ASIC error SCU 
20 DOCC ASIC error SCU 

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 6
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 G. Details of error codes and countermeasures

A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (MFP)
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by Detail MFP
interruption of the power during the version-up
Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and
operation, etc.
the EEPROM data version.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
procedure again.
Replace the PCU PWB.
A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (PCU)
A0-02 SCU PWB ROM error
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail MFP Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by the EEPROM data version.
interruption of the power during the version-up Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
operation, etc.
SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
procedure again. version (SCU)
Replace the SCU PWB.

Trouble content
A0-04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) Detail SCU
Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and
(ACRE) ROM error the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM data E7-01 MFP image data error
error.
An error occurs during firmware upgrading for some
reasons. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Perform firmware upgrading again. Detail MFP
Cause Image data transfer error in the MFPC PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble.
A0-10 Color profile error Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
of the MFPC PWB.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
Trouble content Color profile error
Detail MFP
Cause The content of the color profile is abnormal. E7-03 HDD trouble
Combination error between the MFPC PWB firmware
and the color profile
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware collectively.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Detail MFP
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFPC
PWB and HDD.
HDD (error file management area) data abnormality
A0-11 Firmware version inconsistency (FAT breakage).
(MFP - PCU) MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
Trouble content of the MFPC PWB and HDD.
Detail MFP Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of the
HDD.
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
Replace the HDD.
the PCU.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
Check & Remedy Install the firmware in the all-firmware version-up
mode.
E7-04 HDD-ASIC error
A0-15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program
Trouble content
firmware
Detail MFP
Cause HDD-ASIC trouble. (MFPC PWB trouble.)
Trouble content An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
Detail MFP booting.
Cause Installation of the normal firmware was performed Check & Remedy Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
with a security kit enable.
Check & Remedy Stop installation of the normal firmware.

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 7
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 E7-07 SD card error E7-21 LSU LD deterioration trouble

Trouble content Trouble content Laser trouble

Detail MFP Detail PCU
Cause SD card trouble or contact error Cause Laser deterioration, power reduction
MFPC PWB trouble. Disconnection or improper connection of harness and
Check & Remedy Replace the SD card. connector between LD PWB and MFPC PWB.
Check the SD card socket. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Check connection of the harness of each PWB inside
the LSU.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
E7-10 Shading error (Black correction) Replace the LSU.

Trouble content
E7-28 LSU control Asic connection error
Detail SCU
Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the
scanner lamp is turned OFF. Trouble content Access error between the CPU in the PCU PWB and
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit. the LSU control ASIC.
CCD unit abnormality. Detail PCU
SCU PWB abnormality. Cause Improper connection of the communication connector
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. between the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB
Check the CCD unit. (interface PWB).
Check the SCU PWB. Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the
MFPC PWB (interface PWB)
PCU PWB or MFPC PWB (interface PWB) trouble.
E7-11 Shading error (White correction) Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
between the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB
(interface PWB).
Trouble content Replace the MFPC PWB.
Detail SCU Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit. E7-49 Water Mark data error
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.
Scanner lamp lighting trouble.
Scanner lamp drive PWB trouble Trouble content
CCD unit abnormality. Detail MFP
SCU PWB abnormality. Cause Watermark data trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. HDD trouble.
Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp * When the wartermark data is not installed, U2-60
unit. error occurs in booting.
Check or replace the scanner lamp. Check & Remedy Use SIM62-02/SIM62-03 to check HDD read/write.
Check or replace the scanner lamp drive PWB. If the result is NG, a remedy corresponding to E7-03
Clean or replace the mirror, the lens, and the is required.
reference white board. Use SIM49-05 to update the watermark data.
Check or replace the CCD unit. (Reinstallation)
Check or replace the SCU PWB.

E7-50 PCU connection trouble

E7-14 CCD-ASIC error
Trouble content Unknown PWB identification information is detected
Trouble content in the PCU PWB.
Detail SCU Detail PCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble. Cause A PWB/firmware which does not comply with the
Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB. machine specifications is connected.
Replace the SCU PWB. Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
LSU connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
E7-20 LSU laser detection error LSU trouble.

Trouble content
E7-55 PCU PWB information sum error
Detail PCU
Cause Laser optical axis misalignment
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode Trouble content PCU EEPROM PWB information sum error
trouble. Detail PCU
LSU harness, connector trouble Cause PCU EEPROM sum check error.
LSU trouble PCU EEPROM trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. PCU EEPROM contact trouble.
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the LSU harness. Replace the PCU EEPROM.
Replace the LSU.

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 8
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 E7-60 MFP connection trouble E7-91 FAX reception image data error

Trouble content Unknown PWB identification information is detected Trouble content An error of FAX reception image data process occurs.
in the MFPC PWB. Detail MFP
Detail MFP Cause Image data process abnormality
Cause A PWB/firmware which does not comply with the HDD trouble
machine specifications is connected. SD card trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware. Image compression data corruption
MFPC PWB trouble. MFPC PWB trouble
DIMM memory trouble or contact error
FAX control PWB trouble
E7-61 MFP connection trouble (PCU) Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
the memory.
Replace the HDD.
Trouble content MFP connection trouble Replace or check installation of the SD card.
Compatibility trouble between MFP - PCU Replace the MFPC PWB.
Detail MFP Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Cause Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the Replace the FAX control PWB.
PCU.
Check & Remedy Check the MFPC PWB.
Check the combination between the MFPC PWB and E7-92 Copy image data error
the PCU.

Trouble content An error of copy image data process occurs.

(In Non ERDH)
E7-65 MFP EEPROM check sum error
Detail MFP
Cause Image data process abnormality
Trouble content EEPROM PWB information check sum error HDD trouble
Detail MFP Image compression data corruption
Cause EEPROM device trouble. MFPC PWB trouble
EEPROM device contact trouble. DIMM memory trouble or contact error
Device access error due to noises. Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB. the memory.
Replace the HDD.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
E7-80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.

Trouble content E7-93 Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print

Detail MFP
Cause SCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
image data process error
SCU PWB trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble. Trouble content An image data process error occurs in the following
Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCU PWB and the MFPC operation mode:
PWB. • Copy (in ERDH)
Check the ground. • Copy composing system function (Water mark)
Replace the SCU PWB. • When in image send
Replace the MFPC PWB. • When filing documents
• When displaying the preview
• When printing with the GDI/PCL printer
E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error • Copy composing system function (Water mark)
• When printing FAX send result table
Detail MFP
Trouble content
Cause Image data process abnormality
Detail MFP HDD trouble
Cause PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble. Image compression data corruption
PCU PWB trouble. MFPC PWB trouble
MFPC PWB trouble. DIMM memory trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB and the MFPC Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
PWB. the memory.
Check the ground. Replace the HDD.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 9
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 E7-94 Image file data process error F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting
(when importing file data) operation trouble

Trouble content File image process error (backup restore error) when Trouble content
importing filing data Detail PCU
Detail MFP Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble
Cause Image data process abnormality Harness and connector connection trouble
HDD trouble Home position sensor trouble
Image compression data corruption Finisher control PWB trouble
MFPC PWB trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
DIMM memory trouble or contact error roller lift motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
the memory. position sensor.
Replace the HDD. Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory. Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.

E7-96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error

F1-10 Staple operation trouble
Trouble content MFPC PWB DIMM memory access trouble
Detail MFP Trouble content
Cause Memory data corruption occurs Detail PCU
MFPC PWB trouble Cause Staple motor trouble.
DIMM memory trouble or contact error Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of Home position sensor trouble.
the memory. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
Replace the MFPC PWB. motor.
DIMM memory socket check Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Replace the DIMM memory. position sensor.
Replace the staple motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
EE-EL Auto developer adjustment trouble Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
(Over-toner abnormality)

Trouble content An abnormality occurred in execution of automatic F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation
developer adjustment.
trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage error, toner concentration trouble, Trouble content Lift motor trouble.
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-2 to perform the auto developer Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble.
adjustment. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
EE-EU Auto developer adjustment trouble tray lift motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
(Under-toner abnormality) position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Trouble content An abnormality occurred in execution of automatic Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.
developer adjustment. Replace the home position sensor.
Detail PCU
Cause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage error, toner concentration trouble, F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-2 to perform the auto developer Trouble content
adjustment.
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.
F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication Over-current to the motor.
error Finisher control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Trouble content
alignment motor F.
Detail PCU Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness position sensor.
between the finisher and the PCU PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Replace the paper alignment motor F.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the home position sensor.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
finisher and the PCU PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 10
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble F2-39 Process thermistor trouble
R
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Process thermistor trouble.
Process thermistor harness connection trouble.
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
PCU PWB trouble.
Motor speed abnormality.
Over-current to the motor. Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check connection of the process thermistor harness
Home position sensor trouble. and the connector.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor R.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor. F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the paper alignment motor R. Trouble content
Replace the home position sensor.
Detail PCU
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
F1-29 Finisher cooling fan motor Developing unit trouble.
abnormality PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the
Trouble content Finisher cooling fan motor abnormality
harness.
Detail MFP
Replace the developing unit.
Cause Motor lock Replace the PCU PWB.
Motor harness short/open.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Harness/connector connection trouble.
F2-58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher
cooling fan (FCF). (HUD_M/TH_M)
Check connection from the finisher control PWB to
the motor. Trouble content
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Detail PCU
Replace the fan motor.
Cause Temperature/humidity sensor trouble.
Process humidity sensor harness and connector
connection trouble
F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
Trouble content Check connection of the temperature/humidity sensor
Detail PCU harness and the connector.
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Malfunction due to noises
Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10, Finisher control F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble
PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error Cause Toner motor trouble.
Toner density sensor trouble.
Trouble content Connector/harness trouble.
Detail PCU PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble.
Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit
Developing unit trouble.
model is installed.
Toner transport pipe section trouble
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher.
Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Connector and harness check.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the toner cartridge.
F1-95 Paper exit option configuration error Replace the developing unit.
Check the toner transport pipe section.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause The paper exit option configuration is improper. F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection
Check & Remedy Install a proper option.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
specification.)
Toner cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB.

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 11
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error F6-00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication
trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content MFP - FAX communication establishment error /
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble. Framing / Parity / Protocol error
PCU PWB trouble. Section MFP
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB trouble.
and toner cartridge
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
and
Replace the PCU PWB.
Remedy
Check the connector and the harness between the
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB - MFPC PWB connector and
PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
harness trouble
Check Check the connector and the harness between the
and FAX control PWB and the MFPC PWB.
F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble Remedy
Case 3 Cause FAX control PWB - Mother board connector and
Trouble content C1LUD is not turned ON within the specified time. harness trouble
Detail PCU Check Check the connector and the harness between the
Cause C1LUD is not turned ON within the specified time. and FAX control PWB and the mother board.
C1LUD sensor trouble. Remedy
Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble. Case 4 Cause FAX control PWB ROM trouble / ROM pin breakage
PCU PWB trouble. Check Check the ROM of the FAX control PWB.
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble and
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector Remedy
of C1LUD.
Replace the lift-up unit.
Replace the PCU PWB. F6-01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write
error
F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble
Trouble content FAX control PWB EEPROM access error (Read and
write)
Trouble content C2LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Section FAX
Detail PCU
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM trouble
Cause C2LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
C2LUD sensor trouble.
and EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.
Remedy insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
PCU PWB trouble.
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C2LUD. Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
Replace the lift-up unit. and
Replace the PCU PWB. Remedy

F3-32 Paper feed tray 3 lift operation trouble F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble

Trouble content FAX control PWB MODEM chip operation trouble

Trouble content C3LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Detail PCU Section FAX
Case 1 Cause FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.
Cause C3LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
C3LUD sensor trouble. Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
Paper feed tray 3 lift unit trouble. and
PCU PWB trouble. remedy
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble Case 2 Cause The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C3LUD. Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
Replace the lift-up unit. and
Replace the PCU PWB. Remedy

F3-42 Paper feed tray 4 lift operation trouble F6-21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU
PWB and FAX soft switch
Trouble content C4LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Detail PCU Trouble content Incompatibility between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
Cause C4LUD does not turn ON within the specified time. FAX control PWB information (soft switch)
C4LUD sensor trouble. Section MFP
Paper feed tray 4 lift unit trouble. Case 1 Cause The destination of the TEL/LIU PWB installed is
PCU PWB trouble. improper.
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble Check Check the destination of the TEL/LIU PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C4LUD. and
Replace the lift-up unit. Remedy
Replace the PCU PWB. Case 2 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble.
Check Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.
and
Remedy

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 12
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 F6-30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access H2-01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US)
error (FAX detection)
Trouble content Sub thermistor open hardware detection trouble
Trouble content FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (Read and Detail PCU
write) Cause Sub thermistor trouble
Section MFP PCU PWB trouble
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Case 1 Cause Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor,
Fusing section connector connection trouble
or no program data written.
Fusing unit not installed
Check Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
and program.
Replace the thermistor.
Remedy
Replace the PCU PWB.
Case 2 Cause FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Check Replace the FAX control PWB. harness.
and Check the connector in the fusing section.
Remedy

H3-00 Fusing section high temperature

F6-97 Incompatibility between FAX control
trouble (TH_UM)
PWB and the main machine
Trouble content Main heater lamp abnormally high temperature
Trouble content Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the software detection trouble
main machine
Detail PCU
Section MFP
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Case 1 Cause The FAX control PWB installed is improper.
Main thermistor trouble
FAX control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check Install a proper FAX control PWB. Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
and Replace the FAX control PWB. Power unit trouble.
Remedy Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
F6-98 Incompatibility between the FAX Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
control PWB destination and the main Replace the thermistor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
machine destination Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.
Trouble content Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB Replace the power unit.
destination and the main machine destination
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Incompatibility between the destination information H3-01 Fusing section high temperature
written into the FAX control PWB EEPROM and that trouble (TH_US)
in the main machine (set with SIM26-6)
Check 1) Check the destination of the FAX control PWB.
and 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6) Trouble content Sub heater lamp abnormally high temperature
Remedy software detection trouble
Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
H2-00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM) Sub thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Trouble content Main thermistor open hardware detection trouble Power unit trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Cause Main thermistor trouble Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
PCU PWB trouble heater lamp.
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Fusing section connector connection trouble Replace the thermistor.
Fusing unit not installed Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Replace the thermistor. harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the power unit.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.
Check the connector in the fusing section.

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 13
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 H4-00 Fusing section low temperature H5-01 5-time continuous jams of POD1,
trouble (TH_UM) POD2, or PPD2

Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified Trouble content
level within the specified time from turning ON the Detail PCU
power relay. Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper
Detail PCU remains.)
Cause Main thermistor trouble. POD1/POD2/PPD2 sensor trouble
Main heater lamp trouble. Fusing unit installation trouble
PCU PWB trouble. POD1/POD2/PPD2 sensor connector and harness
Thermostat trouble. connection trouble
Connector, harness connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble
HL control PWB trouble. Fusing unit, drive section trouble
Power unit trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the POD1/POD2/PPD2 sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Check installation of the fusing unit.
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Replace the fusing unit.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Check paper around the fusing unit section.
heater lamp. Check connection of the POD1/POD2/PPD2 sensor
Replace the thermistor. connector and the harness.
Replace the heater lamp. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the thermostat.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the HL control PWB. L1-00 Scanner feed trouble
Replace the power unit.

Trouble content Scanner feed is not completed within the specified

time.
H4-01 Fusing section low temperature
Detail SCU
trouble (TH_US) Cause Scanner unit trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified Scanner control PWB trouble.
level within the specified time from turning ON the Harness and connector connection trouble.
power relay. Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Detail PCU Scanner motor trouble.
Cause Sub thermistor trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Sub heater lamp trouble. Replace the scanner unit.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the SCU PWB.
Thermostat trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Replace the scanner home position sensor.
HL control PWB trouble. Replace the scanner motor.
Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. L3-00 Scanner return trouble
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp. Trouble content Scanner return is not completed within the specified
Replace the thermistor. time.
Replace the heater lamp.
Detail SCU
Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause Scanner unit trouble
Replace the thermostat.
SCU PWB trouble
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Scanner control PWB trouble
Replace the HL control PWB.
Harness and connector connection trouble
Replace the power unit.
Scanner home position sensor trouble
Scanner motor trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Replace the scanner unit.
Replace the SCU PWB.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Replace the scanner motor.

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 14
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 L4-01 Main motor lock trouble L4-35 Fusing cooling fan trouble

Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.
the main motor. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Fusing cooling fan trouble.
Cause Main motor lock trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the main motor Replace the fusing cooling fan.
lock. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the main motor. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the PCU PWB.
L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan 2 trouble
L4-11 Shift motor trouble Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.
Detail PCU
Trouble content No change in the shifter home position sensor signal Cause Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
is detected in the operation of the shifter initializing. PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Cause Shift motor trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the fan.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check the connector and the harness.
Shifter home position sensor trouble. Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the shift operation.
Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter
home position sensor. L4-44 Power cooling fan 2 trouble
Replace the shift motor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Trouble content The lock signal is detected while the power cooling
Replace the shifter home position sensor. fan is operating.
Detail PCU
Cause Power cooling fan trouble.
L4-30 MFP fan motor trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of Replace the power cooling fan.
the MFP fan motor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail MFP Check the connector and the harness.
Cause Fan motor trouble.
Harness connection trouble between the MFPC PWB
and the fan motor. L4-56 Fusing cooling fan 2 trouble
MFP circuit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan.
Check the harness and the connector between the Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.
MFPC PWB and the fan motor. Detail PCU
Cause Fusing cooling fan 2 trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Replace the fusing cooling fan.
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected. Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU Check the connector and the harness.
Cause Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. L6-10 Polygon motor trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan.
Replace the paper exit cooling fan. Trouble content The polygon motor does not reach the specified RPM
Replace the PCU PWB. within the specified time after starting rotation of the
polygon motor.
Detail PCU
L4-32 Power source cooling fan trouble Cause Polygon motor trouble.
LSU mother PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
Detail PCU motor.
Cause Power cooling fan trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the LSU.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Replace the LSU mother PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Replace the power cooling fan.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 15
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 L8-01 Full wave signal detection error P1-02 Plasma generating device error

Trouble content The full wave signal is not detected. Trouble content
Detail PCU Detail MFP
Cause PCU PWB trouble. Cause Connection failure of connectors and harness
Power unit trouble. between the plasma generating device and the PCI
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. control PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB. Plasma generating device trouble.
Replace the power unit. PCI control PWB trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and harness
between the plasma generating device and the PCI
control PWB.
L8-02 Full wave signal width abnormality Replace the plasma generating device.
Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if
necessary.
Trouble content The full wave signal frequency is judged as abnormal.
(The detected freauency is over 65Hz or below
45Hz.)
PC-- Personal counter not detected
Detail PCU
Cause PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble. Trouble content
Harness trouble. Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB. Cause The personal counter is not installed.
Replace the power unit. The personal counter is not detected.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the SCU PWB.
L8-20 Power controller communication
trouble
U1-01 Battery trouble
Trouble content Communication establishment error / Framing /
Trouble content RTC backup battery voltage fall
Parity / Protocol error
Detail MFP Detail MFP
Cause PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connector connection Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
trouble. 2) Battery circuit abnormality
Broken connector pin of the PCU PWB of the MFPC Check Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about
PWB. and 2.5V or above.
Remedy Replace the battery.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connector connection between the PCU PWB
and the MFPC PWB.
Check the ground of the main unit. U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error

Trouble content
P1-00 PCI communication error Detail MFP
Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
Trouble content EEPROM socket contact trouble
Detail MFP MFPC PWB trouble
Cause Communication error between the MFPC PWB and Strong external noises.
the PCI. Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB EEPROM.
Connection failure of connectors and harness Replace the MFPC PWB.
between the MFPC PWB and the PCI. (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
MFPC PWB trouble. replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
PCI control PWB trouble. perform the works.)
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and connectors Check the power environment.
between the MFPC PWB and the PCI.
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
(Refer to the necessary procedures after replacement U2-05 SD/MFPC PWB SRAM contents
of the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and inconsistency
perform the procedures.)
Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if
necessary. Trouble content The SD card or the MFPC PWB installed is improper.
(Erroneous detection of account management data)
Detail MFP
P1-01 PCI fan error Cause The SD card was replaced.
The MFPC PWB was replaced.
SD card trouble
Trouble content MFPC PWB trouble
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
Cause The PCI fan operation signal is not detected. replacing the SD and the MFPC PWB in the Service
PCI fan trouble. Manual, and perform the works.
PCI control PWB trouble. Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and harness
between the PCI fan and the PCI control PWB.
Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if
necessary.
Check the PCI fan, and replace if necessary.

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 16
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 U2-10 MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication U2-30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB
index check sum error manufacturing No. data inconsistency

Trouble content Trouble content Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved
Detail MFP in the PCU PWB and that in the MFPC PWB.
Cause SRAM user index information (user authentication Detail MFP
basic data) check sum error. Cause When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFPC PWB,
MFPC PWB SRAM trouble. the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before
MFPC PWB trouble. replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.
Strong external noises. MFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. PCU PWB trouble
(Index information data in the HDD are transferred to Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
the SRAM.) Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was
Replace the MFPC PWB. mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after on the new PWB.
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and Replace the MFPC PWB.
perform the works.) (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the works.)
U2-11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check Replace the PCU PWB.

sum error
U2-40 SD card system storage data area
Trouble content
error
Detail MFP
Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble Trouble content
MFPC PWB trouble Detail MFP
Strong external noises. Cause A file error occurs in the SD card system storage data
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The previous writing partition.
data (about the latest 8 sheets) are written into the SD card trouble
EEPROM.) MFPC PWB trouble
Replace the MFPC PWB. Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power, and the backup data in the
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after HDD are written into the SD card and the machine is
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and automatically booted.
perform the works.) Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.

U2-24 MFPC PWB SRAM memory user

authentication counter check sum U2-41 HDD system storage data area error
error
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Trouble content
Cause A file error occurs in the HDD system saved data
Detail MFP area, disabling backup of the saved file of the
Cause MFPC PWB SRAM trouble machine adjustment values in the SD card.
MFPC PWB trouble HDD trouble
Strong external noises. MFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The check sum error Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.
detection data are calculated again to reset the Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
proper check sum data.) When replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB, refer
Replace the MFPC PWB. to the chapter of "Necessary works and procedures
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after of HDD and MFPC PWB replacement."
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the works.)

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 17
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 U2-42 Machine adjustment data (system U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
storage data area) error
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail SCU
Detail MFP Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble
SCU PWB trouble
Cause The saved file of the machine adjustment values in
SCU PWB EEPROM socket connection trouble
the SD card and the HDD cannot be found or is
broken. Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Both of the SD card set data and the HDD system Replace the SCU PWB.
saved data area are broken. Check connection of the SCU PWB EEPROM socket.
HDD trouble Check the SIM adjustment value of the following
MFPC PWB trouble items, and adjust again if they are improper.
SD card trouble • Scanner-related adjustments
• Touch panel-related adjustments
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
To avoid missing of the counter data and the
Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.
adjustment values, use this simulation to save the
When replacing the HDD, the MFPC PWB, and the
counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a
SD card, refer to the chapter of "Necessary works
printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the counter data
and procedures of HDD, MFPC PWB, and SD card
and the adjustment values.)
replacement."
Use SIM to adjust the machine again and set the
adjustment values.
U2-81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error

U2-50 HDD*1 user authentication data check Trouble content

sum error (SD card when no HDD is Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
installed) Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
SCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content EEPROM socket contact trouble.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Cause HDD trouble*1 Replace the SCU PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Strong external noises. Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
Check & Remedy Check the data related to the check sum error error detection data are calculated again to reset the
(address book, image send system registration data proper check sum data.)
(senders record, meta data)) and register again. To avoid missing of the counter data and the
Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble. adjustment values, use this simulation to save the
Replace the HDD*1. counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a
Replace the MFPC PWB. printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the counter data
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after and the adjustment values.)
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service
Manual, and perform the works.)*1
U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
*1: SD card when no HDD is installed.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
U2-60 Watermark check error Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Trouble content EEPROM socket contact trouble
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Cause Watermark data trouble Check the SIM adjustment values of the engine, and
HDD trouble adjust again if they are improper.
MFPC PWB trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble. Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data. Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the HDD. To avoid missing of the counter data and the
Replace the MFPC PWB. adjustment values, use this simulation to save the
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the counter data
Manual, and perform the works.) and the adjustment values.)

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 18
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error UC-20 DOCC ASIC error

Trouble content Trouble content Access error to the DOCC-ASIC (The ASIC does not
Detail PCU operate normally.)
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble Detail SCU
PCU PWB trouble Cause BtoB connector connection trouble.
EEPROM socket contact trouble SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. DOCC-ASIC trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Check the BtoB connector.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Replace the SCU PWB or Option PWB.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
error detection data are calculated again to reset the
proper check sum data.)
To avoid missing of the counter data and the
adjustment values, use this simulation to save the
counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a
printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the counter data
and the adjustment values.)

U7-50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine

communication error

Trouble content Communication error between the MFP and the serial
vendor.
Detail MFP
Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications
(SIM26-3).
Vendor machine trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Change the specifications of the vendor machine
(SIM26-3).
Replace the MFPC PWB.

U7-51 Vendor machine error

Trouble content
Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)
Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy [Link] is displayed on the operation panel of the
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail code.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.

UC-02 CPT - ASIC error

Trouble content Access error to the CPT-ASIC (The ASIC does not
operate normally.)
Detail SCU
Cause BtoB connector connection trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
CPT-ASIC trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the BtoB connector.
Replace the SCU PWB or Option PWB.

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 19
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (1) Descriptions on E7-91 - 94 errors
Two-digit numbers with double parentheses are added to E7-91 - 94 error codes recorded in SIM22-6 indicate the detailed contents of the
errors.
The number in each digit has its own meaning.
(Example) E7-91(**)
The upper digit of the added code indicates the job kind at the occurrence of the error.

Error The upper digit of Image Job kind at the occurrence

code the added code type of the error
E7-91 0* Other *1
1* JPEG • FAX (Internet FAX) *1
2* JBIG reception print (Other than *1
3* Mxx1ch long size images)
4* Mxx4ch
5* Other *1
6* JPEG • FAX (Internet FAX) *1
7* JBIG reception print *1
8* Mxx1ch (Long size images)
9* Mxx4ch
A* - F* Not Used *1
E7-92 0* Other *1
1* JPEG
2* JBIG • OC copy (in Non ERDH) *1
3* Mxx1ch *1
4* Mxx4ch
5* - F* Not Used *1
E7-93 0* Other *1
• Copy print (in ERDH)
1* JPEG
• Copy composing system
2* JBIG
function (Custom Stamp,
3* Mxx1ch
Water mark)
4* Mxx4ch
5* Other *1
6* JPEG • Image send
7* JBIG • Document filing
8* Mxx1ch • Preview display
9* Mxx4ch
A* Other *1
• GDI/PCL printer print
B* JPEG
• Copy composing system
C* JBIG
function (Custom Stamp,
D* Mxx1ch *1
Water mark)
E* Mxx4ch
F* Not Used *1
E7-94 0* Other *1
1* JPEG
• Backup restore
2* JBIG *1
(Filing data import)
3* Mxx1ch *1
4* Mxx4ch *1
5* - F* Not Used *1

*1: Added code without generating

The lower digit of the added code indicates the kind and the content of the abnormality or the result of the automatic memory check executed
when the abnormality is detected.

Lower digit of the added code  Kind/Content of the error

*1 *9 *A *B *C *D *E *F
Memory Huffman Restart Improper Head decoding Head decoding Other
verify — code marker marker error detection error detection abnormal
NG error error error (ASIC detection) (CPU detection) termination
The upper digit of the 1*, 6*, B* JPEG —     — 
added code 2*, 7*, C* JBIG — — —   — 
 3*, 8*, D* Mxx1ch — — — — — — 
Error detection circuit 4*, 9*, E* Mxx4ch — — — — — — 

: Added code indicating that the memory and its peripheral must be focused for check in case of an error.
: Added code indicating that doubtful sections are in a wider range such as the memory, PWB's, HDD, etc.
—: Added code without generating

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 20
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (2) Countermeasures in case of E7-91 - 94
In case of E7-9x (11), E7-9x (21), E7-9x (31), E7-9x (41)

Cause In case of E7-91 - 94, the DIMM memory (DRAM) is automatically read/written to perform a simplified check. If an abnormality is detected
in that case, the added code becomes (*1).
Therefore, there is a strong possibility that an abnormality lies around the memory.
Check and remedy • Check the installing state of the DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the
DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure that there is no error occurring again.)
• Use SIM60-01 (Memory read/write check) to check to insure that no error occurs.
• Replace the DIMM memory.
• Replace the MFPC PWB.

NOTE: Since the automatic memory check executed when E7-91 - 94 occurs is a simplified check, it cannot detect an abnormality with abso-
lute certainty.
If the added code is (*1), there may be a memory abnormality. Even if it is not (*1), however, it cannot be said that there is no abnormal-
ity around the memory.
Other added codes

Cause Mostly because the data inputted to the ASIC for decoding are broken for some reason.
There is an abnormality in the process of read/write of the process data in the memory or the hard disk.
A great noise unexpectedly generated may be the cause.
For the cases of FAX or Internet FAX reception data, when broken data are saved, printing is performed every time when the machine is
booted, generating an error repeatedly. (E7-91)
(To clear the received data, execute SIM66-10.)
Check and remedy • Check the DIMM memory, the MFPC PWB, and the HDD to insure that there is no abnormality.
• When the job at occurrence of an error is FAX (E7-91), check the installing state of the FAX control PWB and the SC CARD PWB.
• Perform SIM60-01 (Memory read/write check) to insure that there is no NG.
• Perform SIM62-02 and SIM62-03 (HDD read/write check) to insure that there is no NG. (It is not required, however, when the job at
occurrence of an error is FAX.)
• Check the installing state of the DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the
DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure that there is no error occurring again.)
• Replace the HDD.
• Replace the FAX control PWB.
• Replace the DIMM memory.
• Replace the MFPC PWB.
• Replace the SD card.

NOTE: When there is an abnormality around the HDD, E7-03 may occur.
If error E7-91 - 94 as well as E7-03 occurs, there is a high possibility that the error can be removed by replacing the HDD and the
MFPC PWB.

(3) Countermeasures against the case where nothing is displayed when the machine is booted
[Trouble content]
If nothing is displayed when the machine is booted, the error code cannot be checked and the cause is hard to identify.
One of the causes may be an abnormality in the boot program of the SD card. To check that, the following method is used.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the LED (red) upper the CPU heat sink on the MFPC PWB shown in the figure below is lighted when the power is sup-
plied.
If the LED is lighted, it is judged as an abnormality of the SD card.

Red LED

Heat sink (CPU)

SD Card

[Countermeasures]
1) Replace the SD card with a new one. (Be sure to use a service part.)
2) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
3) Use SIIM66-62 to backup the FAX reception data from the HDD to a USB memory device. (If there is no FAX reception data, this proce-
dure is not required.) (The FAX reception data are backed up in the PDF format. Supply the date to the user.)
4) Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX and image send memory. (Ensure consistency between the HDD data and the image related memory.)

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 21
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (4) Relation between the MFPC PWB LED status and errors
When the machine cannot be booted, check the LED status of the MFPC PWB to presume the error content and its cause.
<Process content and LED display>
LED status (Lighting) Process operation content Cause for halt during operation
 CPU initial setting Reus ASIC trouble
 Memory adjustment Memory and its peripheral circuit trouble
  Memory check Memory and its peripheral circuit trouble
 – –
  Program memory development Memory-related trouble
  Interruption-related initialization Reus ASIC trouble
  PCIe initialization PCIe and its peripheral circuit trouble (SoC/ACRE, etc.)
 Basic device initialization Reus ASIC trouble
 SD card initialization Reus ASIC trouble
SATA initialization SD card trouble
HDD trouble
 OS initialization (1) Reus ASIC trouble
  Timer enabling Reus ASIC trouble
 Serial driver enabling Reus ASIC trouble
I2C driver enabling
 LCD initialization Reus ASIC trouble
 Image process IP initialization Reus ASIC trouble
 OS initialization (2) Reus ASIC trouble
Main process Reus ASIC trouble

* : LED ON / : LED OFF

<When an error occurs>

LED status (Flashing) Error content Cause
 Nonsupport memory Memory trouble
  Nonsupport memory (access speed) Memory trouble
 Nonsupport memory controller Memory trouble
  DDR-PHY setting error Reus ASIC trouble
  Interruption handler process error Reus ASIC trouble
 Memory check error Memory trouble
Memory combination error Memory trouble

* In case of an error, the LED's flash as shown in the above table.

* : LED ON / : LED OFF

LED No. D25/D24/D23/D22

3 / 2 / 1 / 0

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 22
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2. JAM and troubleshooting
A. JAM code list
(1) Main unit (3) RSPF

JAM code JAM content JAM code JAM content

NO_JAM_CAUSE No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling. SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM
TRAY1 Cassette 1 paper feed JAM SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM
(C1PFD not-reached JAM) SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached JAM
C1PFD_S1 C1PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper) SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining JAM
TRAY2 Cassette 2 paper feed JAM SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAM
(C2PFD not-reached JAM) SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining JAM
C2PFD_N3 C2PFD not-reached JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper) SPPD4_N SPPD4 not-reached JAM
C2PFD_N4 C2PFD not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper) SPPD4_S SPPD4 remaining JAM
C2PFD_S2 C2PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) SPPD5_N SPPD5 not-reached JAM
C2PFD_S3 C2PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper) SPPD5_S SPPD5 remaining JAM
C2PFD_S4 C2PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper) SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification timer end
TRAY3 Cassette 3 paper feed JAM SPPD2_NR SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
(C3PFD not-reached JAM) SPPD2_SR SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
C3PFD_N4 C3PFD not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper) P_SHORT Short size JAM
C3PFD_S3 C3PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper) SDFS_S Overlap feed detection jam/accompanied feed jam
C3PFD_S4 C3PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper) ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM
TRAY4 Cassette 4 paper feed JAM
(C4PFD not-reached JAM)
C4PFD_S4 C4PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper)
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM
(PPD1 not-reached)
PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD1_N3 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper)
PPD1_N4 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper)
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper)
PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper)
PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
POSD_N POSD not-reached JAM
POSD_S POSD remaining JAM
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM
POD2_N POD2 not-reached JAM
POD2_S POD2 remaining JAM
POD3_N POD3 not-reached JAM
POD3_S POD3 remaining JAM
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM
DRUM Drum lock detection
FUSER Fuser winding detection
PRI_JAM Image preparation wait timeout
FIN_ERR Finisher communication abnormality detection
MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
NO_MATCH Parameter no matching

(2) Finisher

JAM code JAM content

FPPD1_N Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM
FPPD1_S Finisher inlet port remaining JAM
FIN_TIME Finisher paper early reaching JAM
FSTPD_S Finisher paper exit remaining JAM
FSTPL Finisher staple JAM
FPRD_N Finisher compiler not-reached JAM
FPRD_S Finisher compiler remaining JAM

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 23
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3. Image send communication report code
A. Outline and code system descriptions B. Details
After completion of communication, the communication report (1) Communication report main code
table, the communication management table, and the protocol are
described on the communication report column. Report Final receive signal
Final receive signal (Receive side)
The communication report code is composed as follows: code (Send side)
0 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
Communication report: XX (XXXX)
1 NSF, DIS (SID), (SUB), NSS, DCS
The upper 2 digits of the communication report code:
2 CFR (PWD), (SEP), NSC, DTC
Communication report code of 00 – 99 (Refer to communication
3 FTT EOP
report main code.)
4 MCF EOM
The lower 4 digits of the communication report code: 5 PIP, PIN MPS
Used by the serviceman. 6 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
The upper 2 digits: Communication report sub code 1 (Refer to 7 No signal, DCN DCN
communication report sub code 1.) 8 PPR PPS-EOP
The lower 2 digits: Communication report sub code 2 (Refer to 9 PPS-EOM
communication report sub code 2.) 10 PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
11 RNR RR
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 and sub code 2
12 CTR CTC
are in hexadecimal notation. (The others are in decimal
13 ERR EOR-Q
notation.)
14 PPS-PRI-Q
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 is not used in the 16 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
these models. 17 NSF, DIS SID, SUB, NSS, DCS
18 CFR PWD, SEP, NSC, DTC
19 FTT PPS-EOP
20 MCF PPS-EOM
21 PIP, PIN PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
22 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
23 No signal, DCN DCN
24 PPR
25 RNR RR
26 CTR CTC
27 ERR EOR-Q
28 PPS-PRI-Q
29 V.8 Phase-1 V.8 Phase-1
30 V.8 Phase-2 V.8 Phase-2
31 V.8 Phase-3 V.8 Phase-3

CAUTION: For report codes 16 – 31, V.34 MODE COMMUNICA-

TION.

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 24
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
0 – 31 Refer to “previous table”. Depends on the point of communication interruption. For 16 or later, V.34 mode communication.
33 BUSY The calling side cannot establish connection with the remote party.
34 CANCEL A communication interruption command is made during sending/receiving. The interruption key is pressed for
interruption of input. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
35 NG35 XXXX Power is failed during sending/receiving. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
36 (No record paper)
37 (Record paper jam)
38 MEM. FULL Memory over during reception. <Receive/Polling>
Print is not made during reception in acting reception inhibit. <Receive/Polling>
39 (Number of paper
unmatched)
40 (Relay not received)
41 LENGTH OVER The send data length of one page exceeds the limit (2m) in sending. <Send/Bulletin board>
42 LENGTH OVER The receive data length of one page exceeds the limit. <Receive/Polling>
43 (Communication) (OK) Speaking before data transmission
44 ORIGINAL ERROR A document jam occurs in direct sending. <Send>
45 (Picture quality error)
46 NO RESPONSE The FAX signal from the remote party is not detected within T1 time. <Send/Polling>
(When in recall, however, the recall setting in case of a communication error is valid.)
47 TX DECODE ERROR A decode error occurs in the FAX board. <Send/Bulletin board>
48 OK Normal end of communication
OK REPLY RECEIVE OK in Internet FAX send with reception confirmation.
49 NO RX POLL The called side does not have polling function in polling reception. <Polling>
The called side has no data to send. <Polling>
50 RX POLL FAIL In polling reception, DCN is received for DTC. <Polling>
In polling sending, there is no send data. <Bulletin board>
51 PASS # NG In poling sending, the allow number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In polling sending, the system number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
52 (No confidential function in In confidential sending, the remote party does not have confidential function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machines)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
53 (Confidential not received) 1) In confidential sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
54 (Confidential BOX NO NG) 1) In confidential reception, a confidential box number which is not registered is specified.
55 (No relay function in In relay command sending, the remote machine has no relay function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machine)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
56 NO REL RX 1) In relay command sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
2) In relay command reception, a remote station number which is not registered is specified. <Receive>
3) In F code relay broadcasting, an F code relay command is received.<Receive>
57 (Relay ID unmatched) 1) In relay command reception, the relay ID does not match. <Receive>
58 REJECTED In reception, data are sent from a remote machine of receive inhibit number. <Receive>
(Not rejected in the bulletin board send or the F code bulletin board send.)
59 RX NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), the remote machine has no DIS bit 47 (polling function). <Polling>
In F code polling (calling), the called side has no send data. (DIS bit 9 is 0.)<Polling>
60 NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), DCN is received for SEP. <Polling>
In bulletin board, there is no send data for SEP. <Bulletin board>
61 RX POLL # NG In bulletin board, the sub address (bulletin board number (SEP)) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
62 F POLL PASS # NG In bulleting board, the pass code (PWD) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
63 NO F FUNC In F code sending, the remote machine has no DIS bit 49 (sub address function). <Send>
(Check that the remote machine conforms to F code.)
64 NO F-CODE In F code sending : <Send>
1) DCN is received for SUB. --- Check the box number.
2) DCN is received for SID. --- Check the box number and pass code.

In F code receiving : <Receive>

"F code relay broadcasting" or "F code confidential reception" is "Inhibited with soft SW."
67 F PASS # NG In F code receiving, the pass code (SID) is not matched. <Receive>
68 BOX NO. NG In F code reception, a box number which is not registered is specified. (SUB is not matched.) <Receive>
69 MEMORY OVER Memory over in quick online sending <Send>
70 (JOB MEMORY OVER) In PC-FAX reservation, the number of remote parties is exceeded. <Send>
71 NG71 XXXX *1 In PC-FAX reservation, data sent from PC includes some errors. <Send>
72 (NG72 XXXX) *1 In department management setting on the machine side:
• In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, a department number which is not registered on the
machine side is specified. <Send>
• In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the department number is not specified. <Send>
73 NG73 XXXX *1 In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the use quantity limit is exceeded. <Send>
74 NG74 XXXX *1 When reserving specified filing in document filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX;
• The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and the pass-code from PC-XXX does not match
with it. <Send>
• The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and no pass-code is specified by PC-XXX. <Send>

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 25
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
75 NG75 XXXX *1 • Reservation cannot be made due to machine busy. (Reservation of PC-FAX cannot be accepted.)
• When "PC-FAX or PC-internet FAX send inhibit" is set on the machine side.
76 NG76 XXXX *1 Reserved with receive confirmation request in PC-Internet FAX, but the Internet FAX sender is not registered
on the machine side. <Send>
77 NG77 XXXX *1 In reserving specified filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the machine has no filing function.
78 NG78 XXXX *1 The filing function is inhibited on the machine side when filing specification is reserved by PC-FAX or PC-
Internet FAX.
79 NG79 XXXX *1 An authentication error occurs when PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX is reserved.
80 NG80 XXXX *1 NIC connect failure (network abnormality)
• Check for disconnection of cables.
• A network trouble (CE-XX) occurs.
• The port is set to DISABLE.
• Authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled.
• When an error other than the communication result code 93 or 94 in D-SMTP send (including error
response of 5XX)
81 NG REPORT In Internet FAX send, reply of receive confirmation of the remote machine is not normal. (Including PC-Internet
FAX).
• Error of the disposition-modifier.
• The disposition modifier is not in an error, and the disposition type is other than displayed, dispatched, or
processed.
82 NO REPORT In Internet FAX send, time-out occurs in waiting for receive confirmation from the remote machine. (Including
PC-Internet FAX).
• In a case where send confirmation wait time-out time is other than 0, when send confirmation reply from an
Internet FAX destination is not received.
• Recalls of the set number of recalls are performed, but send confirmation reply from an internet FAX
destination is not received.
83 NG LIMIT In E-mail/FTP, Internet FAX send, the send data size exceeds the upper limit of send data.
84 REJECTED In e-mail receive, a sender is registered in receive reject address/domain. <Receive>
85 NG85 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with POP3 server.
• Header acquisition error.
• Time-out during mail receive
86 RECEIVED In e-mail receive, an unsupported attached file is received.
Only the TIFF-F type is supported for attached files.
• The TIFF-F type of the attached file cannot be recognized.
• There is no attached file.
87 NG87 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
• Memory over
88 NG88 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
• Cannot be stored in memory.
• The number of items of acting receive data is the maximum, and an additional data cannot be stored.
89 NG89 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with the mail server.
• Time-out occurs during e-mail receive.
90 NG90 XXXX *1 After reservation by re-operation of document filing, conversion for image send cannot be made.
91 NG91 XXXX *1 *2 Data cannot be written to the memory device when Scan To USB is executed.
• The memory device is disconnected during writing to the memory device.
• An error occurs due to a memory device trouble.
92 NG92 XXXX *1 *2 The USB device memory overflows during writing data into the memory device when "Scan to USB" is
executed.
93 NG93 XXXX *1 When error in D-SMTP send (with recall)
• An error response of 4XX occurs during communication with the SMTP server.
• Time out occurs after establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
94 NG94 XXXX *1 When busy in D-SMTP send
Time out occurs during establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
95 NG95 XXXX *1 When the path is too long in execution of Scan To USB.
96 NG96 XXXX *1 When the normal process is not executed in the secure mail sending.
98 NG98 XXXX *1 The copy inhibit pattern is detected when scanning a document.
99 NG99 XXXX *1 A document which is inhibited to be copied such as a banknote is scanned.

*1: For a job status result in "Display in the column of result," "NG XXXX" is displayed. " " is the code number.
For a communication result, "Communication error (XXXX)" is displayed.
*2: The error code of Scan To USB is specified only in the job log.
• When the communication result is OK, the communication sub code 1 and the communication sub code 2 are "0000."
• Errors in ( ) are not used.

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 26
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (2) Communication report sub code 1
The communication report sub code 1 (upper 2 digits) are always indicated as "00."
(3) Communication report sub code 2

Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive

00 When the conditions after 01 do not apply. Send/Receive
01 Send length over Send
02 EOL time up Receive
03 Carrier detection time up Receive
04 Time up of the communication start command from the machine side Receive
05 Time up in phase C (8 min) Send
06 Memory image decode error Receive
07 Memory image decode error Send
08 Time up between frames in phase C (Report code is 0 or 16.) Send/Receive
09 Not used —
10 Not used —
11 Polarity reversion detection Receive
12 Invalid command reception Receive
13 Time up (1-minute timer/6-second time) Receive
14 PUT error Receive
15 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Receive
16 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Receive
17 Command receive time-up from MFP controller Receive
18 Not used —
19 Not used —
20 Polarity reversion detection Send
21 Invalid command reception Send
22 Fallback retry number over Send
23 Command retry number resend over Send
24 Time up (T5 timer) Send
25 Time up (T5 timer) in V.34 mode Send
26 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Send
27 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Send
28 When sending the FSK signal, no response of send completion is sent back from the MODEM chip within a certain time. Send
(V.34, other than V.34)
29 Not used —
30 A communication error is generated between MFP controller and Modem controller. (Report code is 0 or 16.) —
31 DC current not detected (busy) Send
32 Dial tone not detected (busy) Send
33 Busy tone detection (busy) Send
34 T0 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
35 T1 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
36 In dialing, polarity reversion detection (Remote machine not responding) Send
37 Calling is not made (busy)<Collision detected (including CNG detection)> Send
38 Not used —
60 In resend of document filed data, an error occurs in decoding or coding. Resend
61 In resend of document filed data, setting to inhibit resolution conversion is made. (The resolution after resend is set to be Resend
Enlarged.)
62 In resend of document filed data, rotation setting is made for data which cannot be rotated. Resend
63 In resend of document filed data, data cannot be stored in HD after conversion of resolution for resend. Resend
64 In resending data of document file, during conversion for resending, the number of IMS management pages exceeds the Resend
upper limit (999). (IT occurs in OSA Scan to FTP also, resulting in memory over.) OSAScanToFTP
70 E-mail header acquisition error E-mail receive
71 Time out occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
72 Receive reject occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
73 Network communication cannot be made due to port disable. Network send
74 An authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled. Network send
75 In the setting of SSL communication, when SSL communication is tried but the server side does not support SSL. Network send
76 There is no image in network communication (transfer). Network send
80 There is no attached file in received e-mail. E-mail receive
81 The attached file of received e-mail is not of TIFF type which is supported. E-mail receive
82 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
ID error
83 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Endian error
84 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Version error
85 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Tag data error
86 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Tag parameter error
87 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Header size error

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 27
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive
88 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Data error
90 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Memory over.
Cannot be stored in memory.
91 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
The file size is too great to be stored in memory.
92 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Cannot be stored in memory.

When the sub code 2 is "08" or "30" and the communication report is "OK," the report code is "00" or "16."

4. Dial tone
When shipping from the factory, the dial tone detection when sending is set to Enable (changed from OFF to ON). When installing this machine,
be sure to check and confirm that the dial tone is properly detected and the auto dial sending is enabled.

Check to confirm that the continuous buzzer sound is heard when the on-hook key is pressed. (Press the on-hook key again to cancel the
buzzer sound.)
If facsimile communication cannot be executed normally through the IP telephone line, try the general telephone line.

MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 28
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 [8] FIRMWARE UPDATE
MX-M264U
Service Manual

1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases: There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. 1) Update method using SIM 49-1
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the 2) Update method using FTP
machine. 3) Update method using the Web page
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for 4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
repair to the machine. methods.)
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
repaired.
When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as
B. Notes for update power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these
methods are failed, the method 4) is employed.
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update Firmware types
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s
The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations
of each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine. Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.

2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or
USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.

Media
[Link] Adapter

USB Host

[Link] +

[Link] USB memory

[Link] The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.

*1:
• Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
• The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for storing the firmware data.
• The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.

MX-M264U FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 1

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Execution of the firmware by SIM49-01 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]”
1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware becomes clear. Press [YES] key to start the update of selected
into the main unit. (Be sure to use the USB I/F on the operation firemware.
panel.)
2) Enter the SIM49-01.
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to
the update screen.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5

The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE

UPDATE" title by 20 steps.

  
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(

* The number of key changes according to the number of the ),50:$5(83'$7(

6 (

sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted. 5(0$,16)25 0,187(6

&$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to
the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE
CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the
screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK]
key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and
[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the
screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB
memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is
detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen
appears. At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the
screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated
displayed.
will be shown for each firmware respectively.
6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-
played.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
&203/(7(3/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+

4) Press [ALL] key. 2.

All the firmware programs are selected.

Press [OK] key. (The machine is rebooted.)
Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded suc-
cessfully.
7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-
played.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
(55253/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
,&803&806&8%

* Normally select all the firmwares and execute updating.

* In this case, firmwares which do not exist on the machine
side are ignored.
To update a certain firmware only, select the firmware with 2.

the firmware display key.

* If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is gray out
and cannot be pressed.

MX-M264U FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 2

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 B. Firmware update using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.

Machine 1 Machine 3
[Link] [Link]

[Link]

Machine 2 Machine 4

FTP Client

[Link] [Link]

C. Firmware update using the Web page 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update
the firmware. [Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.

MX-XXXX

"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-

tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.

3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm-
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro-
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."
appears.

MX-M264U FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 3

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 D. Firmware update using the CN update function c. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode
(There are three methods.) To enter the CN update mode, turn ON the UPDATE DIP-SW on
the MFP PWB and boot the machine.
(1) Outline
When terminating the CN update mode, reset UPDATE DIP-SW to
The update method using the DIP SW of the MFP PWB is called OFF (normal mode).
the CN update.
a. Function
There are the following three functions in the CN update mode.
1) Firmware update function
This function is used to update the firmware by transferring
data from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, the
SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options
by means of a USB memory or USB cable.
This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the fol-
lowing points:
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN
update, this method can be used to update the firmware.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SD
card must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot
program.
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality
in the boot program.
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormal-
ity in the main program.
2) Firmware version check function
(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5
is easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this
manual.)
3) ROM making function
(This function is not used in the market, and not described in d. Keys used in the CN update mode
this manual.) The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update
b. Purpose mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the
This function is used in the following cases: normal mode.
1) When an error occurs during firmware update operation other [UP] key [DOWN] key [BACK] key
than the CN update.
When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware
update operation of other method than the CN update, this JOB STATUS PRINT
READY
DATA

method can be used to update the firmware. SYSTEM

SETTINGS IMAGE SEND
LINE
DATA

If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SD HOME LOGOUT

card must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot
program.
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be
used. In such a case, the SD card must be replaced with a new [MENU] key [OK] key
one having the normal boot program.
Key name Functions in the CN update mode
[OK] key Executes the selected function or item.
[MENU] key Selects a menu.
[BACK] key Selects a menu.
(Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
[UP] key Selects an item.
[DOWN] key Selects an item.

MX-M264U FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 4

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (2) Operating procedures 7) Press [OK] key.
a. Firmware update function The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and
the file selection menu is displayed.
This function is used to revise the firmware by using the USB mem-
ory for the MFP PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX
PWB, and each option. Firm Update
It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points.
> F [Link]
1) The update target ROM is automatically selected.
2) When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a Display of file selection
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN 8) Select the firmware file (SFU).
update.
Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this [DOWN] key.
method cannot be used. On that case, the SD card must be
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: ">
replaced with a new one having the normal boot program.
D") displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in
menu returns to the original upper directory.
the main program (SD card).
9) Press [OK] key.
a-1. Necessary items
The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one
1) Insert the SD card to the MFP PWB of the machine. minute.
2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it.
NOTE: Save the firmware file in the main directory or in a one-level
lower directory.
Firm Update
a-2. Procedures
Reading Data
1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the cabinet and the MFP
Display of file reading
PWB cover.
2) Turn ON the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Tilt it to the 10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is
PWB side.) continued.
3) Install the USB memory into the USB port.
USB memory installing position
Firm Update IcuM
Writing Data
Display of the firmware update process

* The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under

update process is indicated on the right upper corner of the
USB port
display.
* During the update process, the display may flash instanta-
neously. It is a normal operation.
11) Check the update result.
4) Turn ON the power. Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the
5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes firmware programs.
more than ten seconds to display the menu.)
Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM
Result : OK Result : Not Update Result : NG

Update Program Init Display of the firmware update result

Please wait OK: Update is completed successfully.
NG: Update is failed.
Not Update: Update is not executed.
Version Check 12) Turn OFF the power.
13) Turn OFF the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Set the
Conf : 00050000 DIP-SW to the normal mode.)
14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine
Display when booting is completed boots up normally.
6) Select the firmware update mode. Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.
Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key. Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
copier basic menu.
15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.
Firm Update 16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the cabinet.
From USB Memory
Display of the firmware update mode

MX-M264U FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 5

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 [9] MAINTENANCE
MX-M264U
Service Manual

1. Maintenance list
26cpm machine
✕: Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.) : Cleaning : Replace ✩: Lubricate

When 75 150 225 300 375 450 525 600 675 750
Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k
Monochrome Process Drum          
supply section Cleaner blade          
Seal F/R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Drum frame unit ✕ ✕  ✕ ✕  ✕ ✕  ✕ Usable for three PM cycles
(Toner reception
sheet)
MC unit          
Separation pawl unit          
Star ring           Packed with the drum.
Developing Developer          
section Toner filter          
DV blade ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
DV side sheet F ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
DV side sheet R ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
Toner sensor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Toner BK
User replacement for every toner empty.
cartridge
Transfer Transfer Transfer roller unit –          
section unit Gear – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ –
Fusing Upper heat roller          
section Lower heat roller          
Fusing separation          
pawl (Upper)
Upper cleaning pad ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
Thermistor cleaning ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
pad
Fusing separation          
pawl (Lower)
Thermistor          
Fusing gear ✩  ✩  ✩  ✩  ✩ 
Upper heat roller ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
bearing
Fusing bearing ✕ ✩ ✕  ✕ ✩ ✕  ✕ ✩
(Lower)
Paper guide          
Paper feed/ Paper feed Pickup roller ✕           Part replacement reference:
Transport/ 100K or 1 year of use
Paper exit Separation sheet ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Part replacement reference:
sections 100K or 1 year of use
Transport rollers ✕          
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transport paper           
guides
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Others Ozone filter           
Gear ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ When checking, apply to the
necessary positions.
(Specified positions)
Optical Mirror/Lens/Reflector/           
system CCD
Table glass/SPF glass           
Scanner lamp           
Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Drive belt/drive wire ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕

MX-M264U MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 When 75 150 225 300 375 450 525 600 675 750
Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k
RSPF Paper feed Paper feed roller            Replacement reference:
section/ Pickup roller            Replace according to the SPF
Transport Separation roller            paper feed counter value.
section SPF section roller:
100K or 1 year of use
When replacing the paper feed
roller, apply grease to the
paper feed shaft. (GP-501MR)
Torque limiter SPF ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
(for separation) Replace according to the SPF
Takeup torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ paper feed counter value.
(for takeup) SPF section torque limiter:
400K or 2 years of use
When replacing the paper feed
roller, apply grease to the
paper feed shaft. (GP-501MR)
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transport rollers           
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Scanning plate           
Drive Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
section Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Other OC mat           

31/35cpm machine
✕: Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.) : Cleaning : Replace ✩: Lubricate

When 100 150 200 300 400 450 500 600 700 750
Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k
Monochrome Process Drum  ✕    ✕    ✕
supply section Cleaner blade  ✕    ✕    ✕
Seal F/R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Drum frame unit ✕ ✕ ✕  ✕ ✕ ✕  ✕ ✕ Usable for three PM cycles
(Toner reception
sheet)
MC unit  ✕    ✕    ✕
Separation pawl unit  ✕    ✕    ✕
Star ring           Packed with the drum.
Developing Developer  ✕    ✕    ✕
section Toner filter  ✕    ✕    ✕
DV blade ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
DV side sheet F ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
DV side sheet R ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
Toner sensor ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –
Toner BK
User replacement for every toner empty.
cartridge
Transfer Transfer Transfer roller unit –          
section unit Gear – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ –
Fusing Upper heat roller          
section Lower heat roller          
Fusing separation          
pawl (Upper)
Upper cleaning pad ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
Thermistor cleaning ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
pad
Fusing separation          
pawl (Lower)
Thermistor          
Fusing gear ✩  ✩  ✩  ✩  ✩ 
Upper heat roller ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
bearing
Fusing bearing ✕ ✩ ✕  ✕ ✩ ✕  ✕ ✩
(Lower)
Paper guide          

MX-M264U MAINTENANCE 9 – 2
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 When 100 150 200 300 400 450 500 600 700 750
Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k
Paper feed/ Paper feed Pickup roller ✕  –    –    – Part replacement reference:
Transport/ 100K or 1 year of use
Paper exit Separation sheet ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – Part replacement reference:
sections 100K or 1 year of use
Transport rollers ✕  –    –    –
Gears ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –
Transport paper   –    –    –
guides
Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –
Others Ozone filter   –    –    –
Gear ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩ ✩ – When checking, apply to the
necessary positions.
(Specified positions)
Optical Mirror/Lens/Reflector/   –    –    –
system CCD
Table glass/SPF glass   –    –    –
Scanner lamp   –    –    –
Rails ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩ ✩ –
Drive belt/drive wire ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –
Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –
RSPF Paper feed Paper feed roller   –    –    – Replacement reference:
section/ Pickup roller   –    –    – Replace according to the SPF
Transport Separation roller   –    –    – paper feed counter value.
section SPF section roller:
100K or 1 year of use
When replacing the paper feed
roller, apply grease to the
paper feed shaft. (GP-501MR)
Torque limiter SPF ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – Replacement reference:
(for separation) Replace according to the SPF
Takeup torque limiter ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – paper feed counter value.
(for takeup) SPF section torque limiter:
400K or 2 years of use
When replacing the paper feed
roller, apply grease to the
paper feed shaft. (GP-501MR)
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –
Transport rollers   –    –    –
Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –
Scanning plate   –    –    –
Drive Gears ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –
section Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –
Other OC mat   –    –    –

2. Other related items

A. Counter clear
Item SIM Remarks
Maintenance cycle setting SIM 21-1
Jam/trouble counter clear SIM 24-1
Paper feed counter clear SIM 24-2
Scan/Stapler/Stamp counter clear SIM 24-3
Maintenance counter clear SIM 24-4 *
Developing counter clear SIM 24-5 At developer replacement
Copy counter clear SIM 24-6
Printer/other counter clear SIM 24-9
FAX counter clear SIM 24-10
Scanner mode counter clear SIM 24-15

*: When maintenance message is displayed, replace consumption part reaching the number of sheets of maintenance, then clear the replaced
part's counter only.

MX-M264U MAINTENANCE 9 – 3
Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 [10] DISASSEMBLY AND
MX-M264U
Service
Unit Manual Parts
14. RSPF A. RSPF unit (1) Document pickup
ASSEMBLY roller, Paper feed roller
(2) Separation roller,
Torque limiter SPF
Unit Parts
(3) Take-up torque limiter
1. Process unit A. Drum
(4) Discharge brush
B. Drum section (1) Main charger
(5) Registration roller
(2) Cleaning blade
(6) OC mat
(3) Drum frame unit
B. RSPF paper feed tray unit
(4) Moquette F/R
C. RSPF transport (1) Transport roller 2,
(5) Separation pawl
unit Transport roller 3,
2. Developing A. Developer
Paper exit roller
unit B. Toner filter unit
(2) Scan plate
C. DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R
D. DV blade
E. Toner sensor
3. Fusing A. Thermostat
section B. Thermistor
C. Paper guide
D. Fusing separation pawl (lower)
E. Lower heat roller
F. Heater lamp
G. Upper cleaning pad
H. Fusing separation pawl (upper)
I. Upper heat roller
J. Thermistor cleaning pad
4. Optical A. Table glass, SPF glass
section B. Drive belt, Drive wire
C. Rails
D. Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp
E. Lens, CCD
F. LED PWB, LED driver PWB
5. Paper feed A. Upper 500 sheets (1) Paper feed roller/
section tray paper feed pickup roller
(2) Separation sheet
(3) Lift unit
B. Lower 500 sheets (1) Paper feed roller/
tray paper feed pickup roller
(2) Separation sheet
(3) Lift unit
(4) Transport clutch
(5) Paper feed clutch
(6) Transport roller
(7) Solenoid
(8) Sensor PWB
C. Paper feed solenoid
D. Tray sensor PWB
E. Manual P-in sensor/Manual empty sensor
F. Multi manual (1) Paper feed roller/
paper feed pickup roller
(2) Reverse sensor
(3) Separation sheet
(4) Clutch/solenoid
6. Side door unit A. Transport roller unit
B. Transport roller
C. DUP transport roller
D. DUP motor
7. 1st paper exit A. Cooling fan
unit B. Transport/Exit roller
8. Laser unit A. LSU
9. Power unit A. Power source
10. PWB A. SCN PWB
B. PCU PWB
C. MFPC PWB
D. Second interface PWB
11. Ozone filter
12. Transport A. Transport roller
section
13. Operation A. Operation panel unit
section B. USB I/F PWB
C. KEY PWB
D. LVDS PWB, LCD, Touch panel

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 1

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 1. Process unit A. Drum
Note for servicing the OPC drums
1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment
Note
1 2
• Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum
surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.)
• When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the
protection sheet and hold the protection sheet.
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care
not to touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both
edges of the OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to
the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade 4
may flip.) 3

5mm

5mm

CAUTION: When installing the process unit in the main unit after
replacing the drum, process unit may not be able to
install by reason of the drum drive coupling position.
In this case, rotate the drum about 45 degrees and
install again.

B. Drum section
(1) Main charger
Countermeasures
1
If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,
4
perform the following countermeasures.
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt. 1
2
2) Apply Kynar powder to prevent blade flip.
Check method
Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily
dirt and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the follow-
ing method.
• Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.
2. Prior exposure prevention
Note
• Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
• Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.
• Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using 3
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
Countermeasures
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior (2) Cleaning blade
exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
1
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density
area in the previously exposed section.
2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keeping
the OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are not
recovered, replace the OPC drum.
2

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 2

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (3) Drum frame unit (5) Separation pawl
Disassembly * Hold the tip of the separation pawl and remove it.

Assembly * Press the center of the separation pawl and install it.

(4) Moquette F/R

CAUTION: If it disturbs the blade movement, replace it and attach

new one.

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 3

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2. Developing section C. DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R
A. Developer

Turn the MG roller to discharge developer.

DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R attachment reference

Molt 0 0
Molt
edge edge
reference reference
0.3 0.3

0.5 0 0 0.5
Projection edge Projection edge
reference reference

D. DV blade

DV blade attachment reference

B. Toner filter unit

[Cross-section]
With the guide AS (cover) removed, replace it.
Bump 0
When replacing, clean the guide AS. reference

0.5

0.5 0
Rib reference

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 4

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 E. Toner sensor A. Thermostat
• Clean the sensor only after removing used DV when replacing CAUTION: When securing the lamp harness and the thermostat,
DV. the tightening torque of the screw (4 positions) is 6-9
• Without removing the MG roller, clean the sensor surface with kgs.
waste cloth in the arrow direction to remove toner.

3. Fusing section

3
1

B. Thermistor

C. Paper guide

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 5

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 D. Fusing separation pawl (lower)

3
2

F. Heater lamp

E. Lower heat roller

2
G. Upper cleaning pad
2
1 4

4
1

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 6

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 H. Fusing separation pawl (upper) J. Thermistor cleaning pad

2 2

I. Upper heat roller

4. Optical section
A. Table glass, SPF glass
1
1) Remove the glass holder. and the table glass. Remove the
table glass, and the SPF glass.

5
4
3

1
2 1 2

1
2) Clean the both surfaces of the table glass, and the SPF glass.

3 B. Drive belt, Drive wire

1) Remove the table glass.
2) Check the tension of the drive belt and the drive wire. Check to
confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley is wound with-
3 out clearance.

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 7

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 CAUTION: Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown 3) Clean the reflector, the scanner lamp, and the No. 2 mirror.
in the figure below and fix it.
When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the
mirror unit to the vicinity of the home position, and wind
7 turns as shown in the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a
screw. Then wind two turns furthermore around the pul-
ley.

7
6

4 2
5
1

7 1 7 8 9 10
6 E. Lens, CCD
1) Remove the table glass.
4
2) Remove the dark box, and the cover.
5 10 9 8 7 1
2 1
1 1
3 2

C. Rails
3
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Grease each rail.
CAUTION: Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact with
drive wires.
If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.

3) Clean the lens, and the CCD.

D. Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp

1) Remove the table glass.
2) Clean the No. 2 mirror, and the No. 3 mirror.

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 8

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 F. LED PWB, LED driver PWB 6) Remove the harness holder, and remove the flat cable from
1) Remove the table glass. the LED driver PWB. Remove the LED driver PWB.

2) Shift the lamp unit to the notch section of the scanner base 1
plate.

2
4
3

3) Turn over the sheet.

5. Paper feed section
CAUTION: When attaching the sheet to the original position, insert
the L-shape sections into the inside of the metal plate
and attach the center portion to the metal plate with
double-stick tape. A

A Paper feed roller

B Pickup roller
4) Remove the lamp guide. Disconnect the connector from the
C Separation sheet
LED driver PWB.

1
A. Upper 500 sheets tray paper feed
(1) Paper feed roller/pickup roller

1
2

5) Remove the scanner lamp, and the LED PWB. Disconnect the
connector from the LED PWB.

1 2

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 9

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 1

CAUTION: With the toner cartridge installed, do not tilt or shake the When replacing, be careful not to Slightly apply grease GE676
adhere conduction grease (black) (UKOG-0013QSZZ) to the drum
developer cartridge.
to the drive section. boss.

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 10

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (2) Separation sheet

* Slightly apply grease GP501MR (UKOG-0012QSZZ) around the

axis. One rice grain for each.
Grease should not come out when assembling.
(3) Lift unit

1
3
2

2 1

2 1 B. Lower 500 sheets tray paper feed

(1) Paper feed roller/pickup roller
3

1
1)
1

2 3
2

2
4

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 11

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (2) Separation sheet (4) Transport clutch

3
2

(5) Paper feed clutch

1
3

(6) Transport roller

* Slightly apply grease GP501MR (UKOG-0012QSZZ) around the

axis. One rice grain for each.
Grease should not come out when assembling. 1
(3) Lift unit

1 1

1
3

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 12

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (7) Solenoid E. Manual P-in sensor/Manual empty sensor

2 1
A

F. Multi manual paper feed

(1) Paper feed roller/pickup roller
(8) Sensor PWB

2
3

C. Paper feed solenoid 1 2

1
5
6

2 3

3 4

D. Tray sensor PWB

3 2

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 13

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Installation * Install so that the cam transmit arm (1) comes under (4) Clutch/solenoid
the roller arm (2). Clutch

1
2

2
1
2
3

LOCK 2

1 2
4
1
(2) Reverse sensor

1
Solenoid
2
3

1
(3) Separation sheet

1) 2

2) Clutch

A
3)
A
A A

A
* Slightly apply grease GP501MR (UKOG-0012QSZZ) around the
axis. One rice grain for each.

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 14

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 B. Transport roller
1
4 1

2
1
1

2
3 2 3
3

2 1

1
3

6. Side door unit

A. Transport roller unit C. DUP transport roller

3
3 3

3
3

2 3

4
1
1
3
2
* Check that two springs are securely inserted into the transfer
roller unit bosses.

2 1

3
1

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 15

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 7. 1st paper exit unit
A. Cooling fan 5
1

2 4

3 2

1 1

5
3

4
5
2

1
2

2 2
B. Transport/Exit roller

1
3

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 16

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 CAUTION: Check to confirm that the solenoid shaft is in the gate
bracket, and fix with the screw.

1
1
1

2 2
1

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 17

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 8. Laser unit 9. Power unit
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the LSU unit. A. Power source
A. LSU
1) Turn OFF the machine power, and disconnect the power plug
from the power outlet.
2
2) Remove the left cabinet and exit tray.
3) Disconnect the LSU connector, and remove the securing
screws to remove the LSU.

1 1

CAUTION: Disconnect the connector, and remove the unit.

1
1
2
1

1
1

2 2
3 1

1
1
1
1
1

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 18

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 10. PWB C. MFPC PWB
A. SCN PWB

1
2
1
2 2
2
2
2
1 2
1 3
2 2

1 D. Second interface PWB

1 1 2
2 1 2

B. PCU PWB
1

2 2 1

1 1
3 1
2
1
1
1 3
1
2

2
1 2
2
1
1
2

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 19

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 11. Ozone filter 12. Transport section
A. Transport roller

2
1

1 1

2
1
1
2

1
2

2
3 1

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 20

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 13. Operation section C. KEY PWB
1) Remove the Mylar, the earth sheet, and remove the KEY
A. Operation panel unit
PWB.
1) Remove the front cabinet upper.
CAUTION: When installing, be careful of the overlapping sequence
2) Remove the operation panel base plate.
of the Mylar and the earth sheet.

1
3
2
4
1 4 5
1

1
1

4
3) Remove the operation panel unit.

1
D. LVDS PWB, LCD, Touch panel
1) Remove the screw, disconnect the connector, and remove the
3 2 LVDS PWB.
1
CAUTION: When installing, be careful of the overlapping sequence
of the earth sheet.
1

1
1

B. USB I/F PWB

1) Remove the USB I/F PWB. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the LCD holder.
CAUTION: When installing, be careful of the overlapping sequence
1
of the earth sheet.

1 3 1 3
2
3
3 4

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 21

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3) Remove the holder, and remove the LCD. 3) Remove the RSPF unit from the machine.
CAUTION: Use enough care not to put finger prints on the LCD sur-
face.

2
1

2
(1) Document pickup roller, Paper feed roller
1) Open the paper feed unit, and remove the cover.

4) Remove the touch panel.

CAUTION: Use enough care not to put finger prints on the touch
panel surface.

2) Remove the holder, and remove the document pickup roller,

and the paper feed roller.

14. RSPF
2
A. RSPF unit
1) Remove the rear upper cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the harness guide. 1

(2) Separation roller, Torque limiter SPF

1) Open the paper feed unit, and remove the cover.

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 22

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2) Remove the holder, and remove the separation roller. (5) Registration roller
1) Open the paper feed unit, and clean the registration roller.

3) Remove the torque limiter SPF.

(6) OC mat
1) Open the RSPF unit, and clean the OC mat.

(3) Take-up torque limiter

1) Remove the one-way coupling, the belt, and the pulley.
Remove the E-ring. Pull out the shaft, and remove the bearing,
the holder, and the take-up torque limiter.

6
7
8 5

B. RSPF paper feed tray unit

1 2 3 4
1) Turn over the left upper corner of the OC mat.

(4) Discharge brush

1) Open the document tray, and remove the discharge brush.
CAUTION: When replacing the discharge brush, attach a new
2
brush to the reference.

Character edge reference

1mm 1mm

Square
hole
reference
0 - 0.5mm

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 23

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2) Remove the front cabinet. C. RSPF transport unit
1) Remove the paper feed tray unit.
2) Remove the earth wire. Disconnect the connector from the
RSPF driver PWB.
1

1
3

3) Remove the RSPF transport unit.

1
1

3) Remove the rear cabinet.

1
2 1

4) Disconnect the connector from the RSPF driver PWB. Remove

the holder, and remove the RSPF paper feed tray unit.

2 3
1
4

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 24

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (1) Transport roller 2, Transport roller 3,
Paper exit roller
1) Clean the transport roller 2, the transport roller 3, and the
paper exit roller

(2) Scan plate

1) Clean the scan plate.

MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 25

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 [11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
MX-M264U
Service Manual

1. HDD/SD card memory map

A. HDD partition
Option HDD installed
HDD size = 160GB (Actual size 149GB)

offset
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 [GB]
(GB)
Outer
tracks 0 [I-1] 14GB

10

20 [I-2] 72GB
30

40

50

60

70

80 [I-3] 1GB [I-4] 1GB [L-1] 1GB

Not used
90 [S-1] 2.5GB [S-2] [S-3] 2GB Not used [S-4] 2GB Not used
0.5GB
100 [S-5] 16GB

110 [S-6] 4GB [S-7] 2GB Not used

120 [S-8] 16GB Not used

130 [S-9] 6GB

Inner 140 [S-10] 8GB [L-2] 1GB

tracks
[GB]

B. HDD data contents

Option HDD installed

No. File system Stored data NOTE

I-1 Image data Image data (ERDH/Temporary storage) 1000 documents, 3000 images
I-2 Image data Image data (Document filing) 3000 documents, 20000 images
I-3 Image data Not available Not used
I-4 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive images
L-1 Not available System storage data (Address book, image send system registration data (sender's
information, meta data, etc.), FSS collection data)
S-1 Universal Download font
User macro
Database system file
System log
System setting data (Backup)
S-2 Universal Document filing (Database)
Job log (Database)
Job completion list
S-3 Universal Not available Not used
S-4 Universal Not available Not used
S-5 Universal Spool area for printer
S-6 Universal Application work area (User file used in USB direct print)
S-7 Universal Not available Not used
S-8 Universal Not available Not used
S-9 Universal Data backup when installing DSK (User data (Address book, account information))
S-10 Universal e-manual
Watermark
L-2 Universal Not available Not used

MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 1

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 C. SD card partition
Option HDD installed
SD card size = 4GB (Actual size 3.6GB)

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 [MB]

0 [L-101] 500MB [S-101] 500MB

1 [S-102] 500MB [S-105] [S-103] 924MB

100MB
[I-101] 1GB
2

[GB]

Option HDD uninstalled

SD card size = 8GB (Actual size 7.2GB)

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 [MB]

0 [L-101] 500MB [S-101] 200MB [S-102] 200MB [S-105]

100MB
1 [S-103] 924MB

[S-104]
2 [I-101] 500MB [I-102] 500MB
200MB
3

5 [I-103] 4GB

[GB]

D. SD card data contents

Option HDD installed

No. File system Stored data NOTE

L-101 Not available ICU firmware (Boot/Main)
Boot animation
Boot (CN Update mode)
ARM9 firmware
[Link] (language data)
[Link] (Animation data)
S-101 Universal font
web help
spdl
Option FontROM
S-102 Universal Same as above (Mirror)
S-105 Universal Setting value data file (System setting/SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
S-103 Universal Key operator setting storage data
FEP leaning data (Japanese/Chinese)
Firmware update data (differential between new and old) (For FSS)
Account management information/User authentication data
I-101 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive images (for backup) (HDD 1-4 area data backup)

MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 2

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Option HDD uninstalled

No. File system Stored data NOTE

L-101 Not available ICU firmware (Boot/Main)
Boot animation
Boot (CN Update mode)
ARM9 firmware
[Link] (language data)
[Link] (Animation data)
S-101 Universal font
web help
spdl
Option FontROM
S-102 Universal S-101 area data backup (mirror)
S-105 Universal Setting value data file (System setting/SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
S-103 Universal Key operator setting storage data
IMS job management data
FAX reception data (For power shut off and paper empty)
FEP leaning data (Japanese/Chinese)
Firmware update data (differential between new and old) (For FSS)
Account management information/User authentication data
System log
S-104 Universal S-105 area data backup (mirror)
I-101 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive images
I-102 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive images (Backup) Not used when an option
I-103 Image data ERDH work HDD is installed.

MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 3

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD and the SD Card
A. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)
CAUTION: Registered user information will not be recovered if the MFP PWB is affected by U2-05 trouble. (*1)
1) Attach the flash ROM, the memory, the EEPROM, the SD card etc. of the MFP PWB on the service parts MFP PWB and install it to the
main unit.
CAUTION: Ground your body with grounding band during the work.
2) When U2 trouble occurs, use SIM16 to cancel it.
3) Set as follows after restarting the main unit.
At this timing, F6-21 may occur. Whether it may occur or not, go to execute procedure 1.
(1) Set the appropriate country code by Sim66-02 (clear the software switches related to FAX).
CAUTION: Make sure to execute even if the fax option is not installed on the machine.

B. Procedures necessary for HDD replacement

Note for HDD replacement
• Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before
replacement, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.
• If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
• The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter
• HDD storage data and backup
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD
• Reinstall and update procedures of Operation Manual data saved in HDD
• Reinstall and update procedures of watermark data.
(1) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other data cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other storage
data cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the
HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list

Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Backup means Disable of
procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 e-Manual Available Available Disable *1 Enable Sim49-3 Service
2 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
3 Image send series Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
registration data (Sender’s Device cloning / Device cloning /
information, meta data, etc.) Storage backup Storage backup
4 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 Enable Sim56-2 Service
Account management
5 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
6 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
7 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable —
WEB PAGE.
8 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
9 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
10 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE. or User
11 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE.
12 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE.
13 Some of system setting Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
data Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
14 Watermark Available Available Disable *2 Enable Sim49-5 Service
15 FAX reception data Not available Available Enable Sim66-62 Disable — —

*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory.
*2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.

MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 4

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be (3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage
backed up data cannot be backed up due to breakdown
a. Work contents and procedures a. Display when HDD breakdown
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03
When a new HDD
is popped up.
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD
is normal but a program model) is used * must be replaced.
error occurs in it is used.
b. Work contents and procedures
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement.
(Servicing) When a new HDD
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
memory.) is normal but a program model) is used *
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 error occurs in it is used.
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
authentication data))
and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User  Formatting is automatically complex machine.
or servicing) performed.
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05,
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14
is displayed.  Cancel
(Document filing data, JOB LOG data))
with SIM16.
Step 3 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
is no need to perform
type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
formatting procedure with SIM.
data are given to the user.)
Step 4 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
Step 4 Replace the HDD.
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to
Step 5 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
 Formatting is automatically machine. type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
performed. data are given to the user.)
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-05, Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
is displayed.  Cancel memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
with SIM16. the HDD data and the image related memory and to
Step 7 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
automatically formatted, there the HDD. only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
is no need to perform Fax models.)
formatting procedure with SIM. Step 6 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
Step 8 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The Step 7 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed.  Use SIM49-5 to
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between install the watermark data to the HDD.  After booting the
the HDD data and the image related memory and to machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
Fax models.) shipping.
Step 9 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
Step 10 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed.  Use SIM49-5 to
install the watermark data to the HDD.  After booting the
machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
Step 11 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup
to import.
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
authentication data))
Step 12 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in
Step 2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use
macro
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.)

MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 5

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 (4) Reinstall and update procedures of the HDD (5) Watermark data reinstall and update procedures
storage Operation Manual data 1) Obtain the watermark data.
1) Obtain the Operation Manual data. Download the watermark data from the utility menu on the web
Download the Operation Manual data from the utility menu on site (Tech-DS home page).
the web site (Tech-DS home page). Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing
Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing the file hierarchy.
the file hierarchy. NOTE: When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the
To upload to the complex machine, files of "**_pdf_fax.idx" and HDD, if there are some data in the HDD, the files in the
"**_pdf.idx" and "[Link]" as well as the Operation Manual memory are compared with the files in the HDD and only
data (**.pdf) are required. When the downloaded files are cop- the files which satisfy the following conditions are written
ied without changing the file hierarchy, these files also are cop- into the HDD.
ied. • The file size is different.
NOTE: When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the • The time stamp is different.
HDD, if there are some data in the HDD, the files in the • The file exists only in the USB memory.
memory are compared with the files in the HDD and only
2) Enter the SIM49-5 mode.
the files which satisfy the following conditions are written
into the HDD.

• The file size is different. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
:$7(50$5.83'$7(>XVEEG@
• The time stamp is different. ',5!)2/'(5 ),/(

• The file exists only in the USB memory. ),/( ',5!)2/'(5

',5!:0

CAUTION: The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed

to another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will
be overwritten and a trouble may be generated.
2) Enter the SIM49-3 mode.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 12 &/26(
(0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@
 
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5

',5!0$18$/
3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
• When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]
button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu
1.
4) Select the folder of the watermark data. (The screen shifts to
the watermark data install menu.)
  The current version and the update version are displayed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
• When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR- are changed from gray-out to active display.
ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected watermark data
button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu
are installed.
1.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
4) Select the folder of the Operation Manual data. (The screen
of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
shifts to the Operation Manual data install menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
are changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual
is installed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.

MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 6

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 C. Procedures necessary for SD card replacement
(1) SD card data and backup
Some SD card storage data can be backed up, and some data cannot. Some SD card storage data can be reinstalled, and some data cannot.
If the SD card operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the SD card referring
to the storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the SD card.
The SD card includes the following data.
SD card backup
Option HDD installed

Partition Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Data reinstall

Stored data Backup means
number of data backup of data reinstall procedures
L-101 ICU firmware data ICU firmware (Boot/Main) Disable Enable SIM49-1
[Link] (BOOT cannot be
[Link] installed again.)
Boot animation
Boot (CN)
ARM9 firmware
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data font Disable Enable SIM49-1
(Pre-install) web help Disable Enable SIM49-1
spdl Disable Enable SIM49-1
Option FontROM Disable Enble SIM49-1
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data Same as above Disable Enable SIM49-1
(Mirror)
S-105 System data Setting value data file (System Disable SIM56-2 Enable SIM56-2
setting/SIM setting data (Image
quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
S-103 User data System setting data Enable sim56-02 Enable SIM56-2
Key operator custom setting data Enable System setting - Enable System setting -
(Data changed from the default) data backup - data backup -
device cloning device cloning
FEP learning data (Japanese/ Disable Disable
Chinese)
Firmware update data (differential Disable Disable
between new and old) (For FSS)
Account management information/ Enable sim56-02 Enable SIM56-2
User authentication data
Home screen customize data Enable System setting - Enable System setting -
data backup - data backup -
device cloning device cloning
I-101 FAX reception data FAX/Internet Fax reception image Enable SIM66-62 Disable
data

1) Use SIM56-02 to backup the SD card data to the USB mem- 8) Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using the
ory. device cloning function.
2) When the operation panel home screen has been customized, CAUTION: When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only the
backup the SD card data by using the device cloning function. specified SD card supplied as a service part.
3) When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, use The firmware required for booting must be included
SIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in the in the SD card used in this machine. The commer-
PDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data can- cially available SD cards have no such data.
not be restored to the machine.)
NOTE: MEMO: When U2-40 error occurs, if the error cannot be
4) Replace the SD card with a new one.
canceled by SIM16, or when E7-07 error occurs, there may
5) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. be some trouble in the SD card.
6) Use SIM66-10 to clear the image send memory. (This is in
CAUTION: The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed
order to obtain consistency between the HDD data and the
to another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will
image related memory.)
be overwritten and a trouble may be generated.
7) Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).

MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 7

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 SD card backup
Option HDD uninstalled

Partition Enable/Disable of Enable/Disable Data reinstall

Stored data Backup means
number data backup of data reinstall procedures
L-101 ICU firmware data ICU firmware (Boot/Main) Disable Enable SIM49-1
[Link] (BOOT cannot be
[Link] installed again.)
Boot animation
Boot (CN)
ARM9 firmware
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data font Disable Enable SIM49-1
(Pre-install) web help Disable Enable SIM49-1
spdl Disable Enable SIM49-1
Option FontROM Disable Enable SIM49-1
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data Same as above Disable Enable SIM49-1
(Mirror)
S-105 System data Setting value data file (System Disable SIM56-2 Enable SIM56-2
setting/SIM setting data (Image
quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
S-103 User data System setting data Enable sim56-02 Enable SIM56-2
Key operator custom setting data Enable System setting - Enable System setting -
(Data changed from the default) data backup - data backup -
device cloning device cloning
FAX reception data (For power Disable Disable
shut off and paper empty)
FEP learning data (Japanese/ Disable Disable
Chinese)
Firmware update data (differential Disable Disable
between new and old) (For FSS)
Account management information/ Enable sim56-02 Enable SIM56-2
User authentication data
Home screen customize data Enable System setting - Enable System setting -
data backup - data backup -
device cloning device cloning
Address Data Enable System setting - Enable System setting -
data backup - data backup -
storage backup storage backup
I-101 FAX reception data FAX/Internet Fax reception image Enable SIM66-62 Disable
data
I-102 FAX reception data FAX/Internet Fax reception image Enable SIM66-62 Disable
data (Backup)

1) Use SIM56-02 to backup the SD card data to the USB mem- CAUTION: When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only the
ory. specified SD card supplied as a service part.
2) When the address book has been registered, use the storage The firmware required for booting must be included
backup function to backup the address book data. in the SD card used in this machine. The commer-
3) When the operation panel home screen has been customized, cially available SD cards have no such data.
backup the SD card data by using the device cloning function. NOTE: When U2-40 error occurs, if the error cannot be canceled
4) When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, use by SIM16, or when E7-07 error occurs, there may be some
SIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in the trouble in the SD card.
PDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data can-
CAUTION: The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed
not be restored to the machine.)
to another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will
5) Replace the SD card with a new one. be overwritten and a trouble may be generated.
6) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
7) Use SIM66-10 to clear the image send memory.
8) Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
9) Restore the address book data backed up in the procedure 2).
By using the storage backup function.
10) Restore the data backed up in procedure 3) by using the
device cloning function.

MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 8

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 3. HDD/SD card SIM format operation
The relations between SIM62/66 and formatted (deleted) data are as follows:
*1: Physical format ("0" is written to the all area.)
*2: Logical format (Only the management area is initialized.)
*3: Nothing is done.

SIM66-10 FAX image memory clear SIM62-8 Hard disk format (Excluding the system area)
HDD HDD

Partition Partition
Partition Partition
number number
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3 I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *1
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3 I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *1
I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *2 I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1
L-1 System storage data *3 L-1 System storage data *3
S-1 User data 1 *3 S-1 User data 1 *1
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3 S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3 S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *1
S-3 Redial information of the address book *3 S-5 Printer spooler *1
S-5 Printer spooler *3 S-6 Application work *1
S-6 Application work *3 S-9 DSK data save *1
S-9 DSK data save *3
SD Card
SD Card
Partition
Partition
Partition number
Partition
number I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *2 L-101 ICU firmware *3
L-101 ICU firmware *3 S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3 S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3 S-103 User data 2 *1
S-103 User data 2 *3 S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3 (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
SIM62-10 Job complete list (Job log data) delete
SIM62-1 Hard disk format HDD
HDD
Partition
Partition
Partition number
Partition
number I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *1 I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *1 I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1 L-1 System storage data *3
L-1 System storage data *1 S-1 User data 1 *3
S-1 User data 1 *1 S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3 S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *2
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *1 S-5 Printer spooler *3
S-5 Printer spooler *1 S-6 Application work *2
S-6 Application work *1 S-9 DSK data save *3
S-9 DSK data save *1
SD Card
SD Card
Partition
Partition
Partition number
Partition
number I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
L-101 ICU firmware *3 L-101 ICU firmware *3
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3 S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3 S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3 S-103 User data 2 *3
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW) S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3
S-103 User data 2 *1 (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1

MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 9

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 SIM62-11 Document filing data delete
HDD

Partition
Partition
number
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *2
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *2
I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
L-1 System storage data *3
S-1 User data 1 *3
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3
S-5 Printer spooler *2
S-6 Application work *3
S-9 DSK data save *3

SD Card

Partition
Partition
number
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
L-101 ICU firmware *3
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
S-103 User data 2 *3
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)

SIM62-13 Hard disk format (Manual area only)

HDD

Partition
Partition
number
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3
I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
L-1 System storage data *3
S-1 User data 1 *3
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *2
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3
S-5 Printer spooler *3
S-6 Application work *3
S-9 DSK data save *3

SD Card

Partition
Partition
number
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
L-101 ICU firmware *3
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
S-103 User data 2 *3
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)

MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 10

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 [12] SERVICE WEB PAGE
MX-M264U
Service Manual

1. General
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.

Menu/Item Function and content

Password Setting Used to set the password to enter the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
Output of Test Page Used to print out the test page (system setting contents).
Font/Form Download Used to download Font/Form.
Font/Form of PCL and PostScript, macro, and other resources are downloaded to the HDD and controlled.
(PS, PCL5 only)
Device Cloning Used to import/export the system setting information in XML format. By importing the export file to the other device, the
setting values and setting contents of the device can be copied to another device. This function is useful to set the same
setting to two or more machines efficiently.
Filing Data Backup Used to import/export the document filing data in the unit of folder.
User Control Used to shift to the user mode. After log in, the screen is shifted to the setting screen of user management.
User Control 2 Used to set the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group by authority of the serviceman.
(Select among preset items.)
Job Log Save Job Log Used to save the Job Log.
View Job Log Used to display the Job Log.
Update of Firmware Used to update the firmware version.
Syslog*1 Administration Settings Used to set the Log Type. (Set to the default.)
Storage/Send Settings Keep all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Used to save or delete the log data.
View Syslog Used to display the log data.

*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs. When submission of the log data file is requested in order to troubleshoot,
use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the client PC.

2. Details and operation procedures

A. Procedures to enter the Hidden Web page B. Password Setting
exclusively used for the serviceman
1) Boot a browser program.
2) Enter the specified
URL ([Link] and enter the
servicing page menu. MX-XXXX

Default password: "service"

MX-XXXX

* The password can be optionally changed in the following proce-

dures.
1) Enter a new password.
2) Enter the new password again to make confirmation.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button.

NOTE: The password can be optionally changed in the Password

Setting menu.
If the password is changed and forgotten, use SIM24-31 to
reset the password to the default.

MX-M264U SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 1

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 C. Output of Test Page E. Device Cloning

MX-XXXX MX-XXXX

1) Click "Print" button of an item or report to be printed.

When there is a list of items for selection, select one of the
items in the pull-down menu list, and click "Print" button.
The list is printed out. (1) Export
D. Font/Form Download 1) Select an item to be backed up.
2) Click "Execute" button.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file.
(File name: *****.bin)
When the password is set, the set password must be entered
MX-XXXX
when importing.
(2) Import
1) Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up
file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button to execute import.
If the password is set when exporting, the password must be
entered.
3) Reboot the machine.

F. Filing Data Backup

(1) Download of Font, Form, and Macro

1) Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list. MX-XXXX

(Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro)

2) Click "Refer" button to select a target file.
3) Click "Download" button.
4) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
The file is downloaded to the HDD.
The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of the
HDD are displayed.
(2) Delete of downloaded font
Procedures to delete a file separately
1) Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files,
and click "Delete" button.
(1) Export
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press
Yes key. 1) Select the folder to be backed up.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button. The list display conditions can be specified by changing the
index and the number of display items on the pull-down menu.
The file in the HDD is deleted.
2) Click "Execute" button.
(3) Procedures to delete all the files at a time
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File
1) Click "Initialize" button. name: *****.bin)
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press 3) Click "Update" button.
OK key.
(2) Import
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
1) Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)
NOTE: By the Write-Protect Setting function, the downloaded files
2) Click "Execute" button.
can be set to write protect.
The target file is imported.
3) Click "Update" button.

MX-M264U SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 2

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 G. User Control 1 (2) View Job Log

MX-XXXX MX-XXXX

1) Enter the password to log in.

Default Password: admin
The screen is shifted to the setting menu of user management.

H. User Control 2

MX-XXXX

1) Select a Jog Log item to be displayed. (In the default setting,

all the items are selected. Remove check marks of the items
which are not to be displayed.)
2) Click "Show" (display) button.
The Jog Log is displayed.
1) Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation
Group. (The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation
Group must be set in advance.) J. Update of Firmware
(Example of use)
The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the
Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions
in advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in MX-XXXX
this mode for servicing work.

I. Job Log
(1) Save Job Log

MX-XXXX

1) Click "Refer" button to select a firmware file.

2) After selecting a firmware file, click "Execute" button.
The firmware data are sent to the machine, and update of the
firmware is processed.
During the process, the message of "Firmware Update, now pro-
cessing..." is displayed.

1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job
Log to save it.

MX-M264U SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 3

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 K. Syslog (2) Storage/Send Settings
There are following functions in the Syslog mode. Keep all the items selected.
This function is provided to acquire the detailed Syslog to trouble-
shoot when a trouble occurs.
When submission of the log data file is requested for troubleshoot-
ing, use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the cli- MX-XXXX

ent PC.

Syslog Administration Settings Log Type Setting (Set to the default.)

Storage/Send Settings Set all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Log data save, delete
View Syslog Log data display

MX-XXXX

(3) Save/ Delete Syslog

MX-XXXX

(1) Administration Settings/ Log Type Setting

Set to the default.

MX-XXXX

When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and
press OK key.
(4) View Syslog

MX-XXXX

1) Select a Syslog item to be displayed.

2) Click "Show" button.
The Syslog is displayed.

MX-M264U SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 4

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 L. FSS (Field Support System) Setting
1) Set the following items.
• Use Proxy Server: Yes/No
• Setting of Scheduled Polling: Allow/Inhibit
• Interval of Scheduled Polling: 1 - 60 min
• Setting of Manual Polling: Allow/Inhibit
• Status Notification: On/Off
2) Click the Submit (Registration) button.

MX-XXXX

MX-M264U SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 5

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 RSPF UNIT

OPTION
OPTION
RIGHT DERIVERY UNIT DERIVERY 1 UNIT
MX-M264U

POGS2 STMPS SPPD1 SOCD

POD1
TFD3 SPRS SPLS1 SPPD2 SCOV
SHPOS
POD3 SPFM SPLS2 SPPD3 SPED
POGS1
SPUM SPWS SPPD4 SRRC
OPTION POM
(Standard equipment
for Japan model)
OSM
DERIVERY 2 UNIT
1. Block diagram

RSPF PWB
POD2 POFM2 HUD_RA
ADUM TH_RA
A. System block diagram

TFD2 POFM1 SCANNER UNIT

31cpm/35cpm
machine only POSD TNM TCS RRC FUFM1 OPTION
DSW_POC CCD
CRUM PWB PNC
TFD1 APPD1
AUDITOR

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

OPTION
FUSER UNIT OCSW
LED DRIVER PWB
TH_UM ORS_LED WH_SCN
SCN
PSPS FUFM2 PWB
TH_US MANUAL PAPER UNIT LED PWB
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION

MPWD MPFS ORS-PD

MIM OPERATION UNIT
HL_UM MPED MTOP1
MHPS TOUCH
HL_US MPLD1 MTOP2 LVDS PANEL
PCU
PWB PWB
MPLD2 PPD1 DSW_R PSFM1 LCD

OPE PWB
MM PSFM2
USB CN PWB
PAPERFEED 2 UNIT PAPERFEED 1 UNIT HV
PWB OPTION (Standard equipment for Japan model)
C2PFD C2SS C1PFD C1SS MFPC HDD
OPTION PWB
C2LUD C2PUC C1LUD C1PUC (Japan model only)

C2PED C2PUS C1PED C1PUS COINVENDER FAX1

DSW_C2 C2LUM C1LUM OPTION

FAX2

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 1

WH LSU UNIT
OPTION
OPTION (Standard equipment for Japan model)
Service Manual

LSU
DESK UNIT PWB
PAPER FEED 4 UNIT PAPER FEED 3 UNIT
OPTION
C4PFD C4SS C3PFD C3SS PTRC1 (Standard equipment PM
for Japan model)

C4LUD C4PUC C3LUD C3PUC PTRC2 WH

WH SW PWB OPTION
C4PED C4PUS C3PED C3PUS CPFM FINISHER
DSW_C4 C4LUM DSW_C3 C3LUM WH_DESK INNER
FINSHER

OPTION
Power Supply UN PCI
DCPS PCI

MSW

REACTOR
AC IN 200V only
 Right paper exit Unit (Optional)

Shifter-Motor

SCAN Cnt PWB Inner Finisher

Right Paper OUT

Tray Full Sensor
Pout Gate
Solenoid2
Right Paper
OUT sensor
2nd Paper OUT
Tray Full Sensor
2nd Paper Out
sensor
Paper OUT Cover
sensor
B. PCU PWB

SHPOS ; Shifter HP Sensor CPLD Writer

CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 CN6 CN7

FUFM ; FuserUN Cooling Fan Motor(x2) POD1;Pout Sensor
CN28

PIC Writer Coin

CN27 PCU-PWB Vender

POM ; Paper Output Motor CN26 CN9

Debug/Log
Reset CN8

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

CN25
POGS1 ; Pout Gate Solenoid1 Reset IC CPU
H8S/2373I2C Bus
EEPROM
CN24 64kbits
ADUM ; Auto Duplex Motor MFP-PWB

PSPS ; Paper SeParate Solenoid CN10

CN23
POFM ; Paper Out Cooling Fan Motor
(x2)
Expanded
Polygon-Motor
InterLock SW CN22
I/O ASIC CPLD

Fuser Thermister
(x2 Analog) CN12
POF
CN21 PIC LD-PWB
POSD ; POUT Switching Pass Detector
LSU-UN
Main body paper feed load

Data Bus(0..15)
Address Bus(0..20)
MPED : Multi Paper tray Empty sensor SRAM Tray Full Sensor
PPD1 : Paper Pass Detect Sensor
1Mbits
C1SS : Cassette Detector Flash ROM
C1LUM : Lift Up Motor 16Mbits CN13
APPD1 : ADU Paper Pass Sensor Defog Heater(WH)
CN20 CN17
Manu feed Unit

MTOP1 : Multi feed tray Position Sensor 1 CN15 HVU

MTOP2 : Multi feed tray Position Sensor 2 CN19 C N 18 CN14 CN16
MPLD1 : MFT Paper Length Sensor1 MAIN-Motor

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 2

MPLD2 : MFT Paper Length Sensor2
MPWS : MFT Paper Width Sensor(Analog)
MPFS : Multi feed tray PickUp Solenoid
Main cassette Unit
C1PUC ; Cassette1 Pick Up Clutch DV Unit C1PED ; Paper Empty 2nd cassette Unit
RRC ; Resist Roller Clutch C1LUD ; Lift Up Detector
Toner Control Sensor C1PFD ; Paper Feed Detector
C1PUS ; Pick Up Solenoid Power Supply
C2SS ; Casette DetectorToner-Motor
Temp/Humidity CRUM DSW_C2 ; Door Detector
Sensor C2PFD ; Paper Feed Detector
C2PED ; Paper Empty
Multi-step cassette Unit (Optional) C2LUD ; Lift Up Detector
CPFM ; Casette Paper Feed Motor C2PUC; Pick Up Clutch
C2PUS ; Pick Up Solenoid PSFM ; PowerSupplyUN Cooling Fan Motor
CS interface PWB C2LUM ; Lift Up Motor (x2)
PTRC2: Vertical transport roller cluch 2

OP-UP cassette OP-LO cassette

C3PFD ; Paper Feed Detector C4PFD ; Paper Feed Detector
C3PED ; Paper Empty C4PED ; Paper Empty
C3LUD ; Lift Up Detector C4LUD ; Lift Up Detector
C3SS ; Casette Detector C4SS ; Casette Detector
DWS_C3 ; Door Detector DSW_C4 ; Door Detector
C3PUC ; Pick Up Clutch C4PUC ; Pick Up Clutch
C3PUS ; Pick Up Solenoid C4PUS ; Pick Up Solenoid
C3LUM ; Lift Up Motor C4LUM ; Lift Up Motor
PTRC1: Vertical transport roller cluch 1
 Japan:
USB Host IC CARD
HDD 2.5' Standard equipment Key Board
TYPE-A CN Reader
160GB Except Japan: (Front) (Option)
(Option)
MFPC PWB Option

USB 2.0 Host 3.0Gbps

C. MFP control PWB

480Mbps
USB CN
Slide SDHC SATA SATA PCIe CCD PWB OPE PWB
SW 4GB/8GB PWR CN CN Clock Gen
SD FAN CN
Socket DDR3 OnBord USB HUB
2GB
SATA gen2 4port
USB Host 3.0Gbps
DDR3-800

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

Type-A CN

SPI/SD PWM DDR2/3 SATA

6MB/Sec

CN Update
SDHC Class6
USB 2.0 Host
USB2.0 480Mbps H8S
GPIO UART
Host
SCN CN

(1ch)
1Gbps
LAN JACK Non-interruption area FPDLINK
RJ45
SCN IF Receiver LVDS LVDS SCN
(ON when LAN standby) LVDS
FPDLink
SCN CN

EtherPHY GMII EtherMAC LCDC PWB

Trans LVDS
10/100/1G 10/100/1G
LD I/F
USB Dev USB2.0
LD CN

Type-B CN USB 2.0 Device Device Reus LSU IF

LD PWB
Serial I/F
480Mbps
UART(1ch) UART
ASIC
(1ch)
I2C
INT
(nFAX12_PIC_INT) Interruption area (1/3ch) I2C 95KHz
INT H8S
(1/3ch) (OFF when LAN standby) Local Bus CPLD
INT(WaleUp) Local Bus
INT
(2/3ch) POF
INT
INT(Sleep) INT (1/4ch)
(3/3ch)
I2C EEPROM
(3/3ch) I2C 256kb PIC

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 3

UART I2C 360KHz DIMM SRAM
RTC SOCKET
(11ch) (2/3ch) I2C 512KB
PCU Mother CN

360KHz FLASH DIMM

DSUB CN (DSK opt.)
(RIC & PCI)
nFAX12_PIC_INT
UART(1ch)

RS232C UART
Level
Converter UART(1ch)
to SCU UART
Serial CN1 UART(1ch)
(Vender)
Serial CN2 UART(1ch) UART INT5V
(Debug) (2ch) 24,5,3.3V_
FAX(2nd) UART(2ch) FAX
PCU Mother PWB
POWER CN

CN
FAX(1st)
CN
 D. Scanner control PWB

3.3V

1.8V
CCD-F
(Main unit side) Tr
10V Tr
Tr AFE
Tr CPUCLK
3line color CCD Tr SCNcnt line buf
(8Mx16bit)
Tr AFE_CS CLK 16
19.661MHz
DRIVER line buf
(8Mx16bit)
BUFFER 16
BUFFER AD_CLK clk
RGB Rx FPD Link
35bit
AFE_CSTG 32bit bus LSU-mother

SH, 1, etc. Timing generator 5V/3.3V 10V/5V/3V

SCN LVDS IC
ASIC Tx
3.3V 28bit
Oscillator
Serial 2 systems 1.5V Image data

CS3
RSPF UN IPD/IDOCC
12 10V CTRL_A10V
12 5V CTRL_A5V
5 3.3V CTRL_A3.3V CS4
5VO 1.2V
(Spare) CPUCLK
Mirror 3.3V
MOTOR 24V .Motor MOTOR
DRIVER DRIVER
24VPD
5VN F-ROM
151 other ICs CL E2PROM
(ONboard)
24VPD

5VPD CS0 or CS6

MHPsensor
Sensors other than SPED 5VP

5VPWM
OCSW
5VN CS2 CS0
F-ROM
To LSU-mother SRAM
(DIMM)
CPU
5VPWM or RSPF Power H8S/2373
5VPW 5VO uart, etc.
SPED

CS5
To LSU-mother

HC151
SEL_A/B/C
Sensors
5VN

LVDS PWB ORS LED

24V

Touch panel I2C or analog IO ASIC

I2C
MFPC
LED kind detection
PNL_SEL0
PNL_SEL1

Orditer(TBD)

CCFT CPU PNL_SEL0

/CCFT PNL_SEL1

nLCD_DISP
7.0 inch LCD CPLD
(ON/OFF)
Rx
Image data 28bit

DCDC 5VN
3.3V 3.3V 5V
24V LCD Power

Document size
LED LED 24V light reception 5VN
backlight DRIVER

OP-KEY PWB
/KEYIN
KEY CON To LSU-mother

DCDC 5VO 5VPWM 5VPWM

3.3V 3.3V
5VO
NINFO_LED
10-key, etc. NPWRSW
POW_LED
WU_LED 5VO
NWU_KEY
5VO
Buzzer /BZR 24VPD FET 24V 24V Power
supply
LED drive
LED matrix
circuit 12V CPU 12V
12V
INFO_LED (FAX reception LED) 5VN
5VN 3.3V
WU_KEY (Reset key) 5VO 5VO 3.3V
WU_LED (Reset key LED) 5VO
POW_LED (Main power LED) 5VO
5VPD FET 5VN
PWRSW (Soft SW) 5V
CPU

SC_ACK PCU

PCU_REQ

USB CN PWB

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 4

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 OPE UN
70LCD UN 70 LVDS H PWB SCN_CNT_PWB
FH28-60S-0.5SH(05) FX16S-41S-0.5SH
CN4 CN1
FPC 60Pin R[7:0] FPD Linc Differential signal TCLK 41Pin FFC 41Pin
G[7:0] VP386 Differential signal TX_OUT0
B[7:0] IC1 Differential signal TX_OUT1
Differential signal TX_OUT2
CK Differential signal TX_OUT3
Hsync
Vsync
ENAB
E. Operation unit

3.3V_LVDS
MOD3
RSTB
STBYB /CCFT
SHLR
UPDN RB10
DITH DISP_out nLCD_DISP
Vcom R
V1 - V10 Gamma 10VA R1240N001B-TR-FE
circuit IC5
10VA 24V
10VA R1283K002C-TR PST8427UR
3.3V IC2 IC6
-7VGL 3.3V RSTB 3.3V

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

TPC8124 PST8427UR
QB3 IC4
15VGH VGL_EN 3.3V

RP131S331D-E2-F PST8427UR
ICB1 ICB3
Interface S3B-PH-SM MAX16822 LVDS_EN 3.3V
connector CN2 ICB2
LED_A 24V 3.3V_LVDS
PST8427UR
LED_K ICB5 RP131S331D-E2-F
CCFT 3.3V_LVDS ICB4
3.3V +5V
52271-0469 CCFT DISP_out
CN3
Touch panel /YL(Y1) /YL(Y1)
XH(X1) XH(X1)
/XL(X2) /XL(X2)
YH(Y2) YH(Y2)

KEY PWB SM11B-GHS-TB

CN1 CN CN
Home Wire harness
LED

Home key IC
10-key etc.

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 5

Buzzer

Power SW
MFPC PWB
CN
Wire harness
Power LED

Power-saving
SW

Power-saving
LED

USB connector PWB

CN CN
SHIELD1 CN1 Wire harness
GND
D1+
D1-
VBUS1

CN CN
CN3
nINFO_LED
 (1)

LIU EX PWB Voltage FAX MAIN PWB

TEL/LIU Regulator
Silicon DAA Connector 3.3V 1.8V MDM3.3V
NJU7772F
Si3056 CHIP SET 18
AFE_CLK
AFE_RES- STATUS LED_0
MX-FX11

PROGRAM
ASPCLK FLASH ROM
ABITCLK 16bit
MJ1 ARXD
16Mb
F. FAX section

Si3019 Si3056 ATX D VHIM29LV16

(LINE)
B-1Q
SPK(analog) MODEM STATUS LED_1
16bit (Not mount)
MMD5020
WORK
Crystal MEMORY
Resonator
24.576MHz SDRAM
16bit RESET- RESET IC 3.3V
BSPCLK
64Mbit
BD45285G
BBITCLK A3
BRXD 64S40ETP-
BTXD
G6

+5VA +5V
+5VA
Filter

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

+5VA FAX IMAGE MFP IF
Speaker
MEMORY Connector
BZ 16bit MDM3.3V +3.3V
(Not mount) Filter
Volume
Power Change EN_SPKON- FLASH ROM With secure
Speaker Amplifier EN_BZON- 16Mbit
Connector 16bit locking
S02B- BU4066 VOLA device
PA SK
LM4819 NJM3414 VOLB +24V
VOLC
VOLD +5V BM30B-
SHLDS
SPMUTE- +3.3V
RGDT-
(CI detection) +5V2
HDMUTE-
RHS- MON_24V- +24V +24V
SI3_RES- Detection
CI2- RES_FAX-

FAX_RXD(D)+
FAX_RXD(D)-
CI
CI- FAX_TXD(D)+
Detection FAX_TXD(D)-

Polarity FAX_CTS(D)-
HS1-
inversion
FAX ASIC FAX_RTS(D)-
Detection HS2-
(Not mount) FAX_RXD(CS)+
MB87F4930 FAX_RXD(CS)-

CION FAX_TXD(CS)+
FAX_TXD(CS)-

150VON FAX_CTS(CS)-
S relay
+5V2 FAX_RTS(CS)-

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 6

FLV PP
MJ2
(TEL) MSGMUTE

OFF fock 16bit Version ID voltage

detection level
ECON

EXHS- CNCT_FAX-
JTAG JTAG
MRON
Connector
14pin
SON1 (Not mount)
CPU
CID-
Download Log SH7706 Voltage
UART 1.9V Regulator 3.3V
Connector
+24V (Not mount) R1173S001B
PIC +12 PICPGM_EN
+12V +24
CI Fi ter microcomputer Spred
UART Crystal
CI Fi ter PIC16F690 Spectrum Resonator
+5V2
CY25811SXCT 14.7456MHz
SON2
WUP_FAX-

voltage TELID
Operation in 1W/7W level
energy-save mode voltage TELID2
level
 LIU EX PWB Voltage FAX MAIN PWB
TEL/LIU Regulator
Silicon DAA Connector 3.3V 1.8V MDM3.3V
NJU7772F
Si3056 CHIP SET 18
AFE_CLK
AFE_RES- STATUS LED_0
PROGRAM
ASPCLK FLASH ROM
ABITCLK 16bit
MJ1 ARXD
16Mb
Si3019 Si3056 ATX D VHIM29LV16
(LINE)
G. FAX (Option)

B-1Q
SPK(analog) MODEM STATUS LED_1
16bit (Not mount)
MMD5020
WORK
Crystal MEMORY
Resonator
24.576MHz SDRAM
16bit RESET- RESET IC 3.3V
BSPCLK
64Mbit
BD45285G
BBITCLK A3
BRXD 64S40ETP-
BTXD
G6

+5VA +5V
+5VA
Filter

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

+5VA FAX IMAGE MFP IF
Speaker
MEMORY Connector
BZ 16bit MDM3.3V +3.3V
(Not mount) Filter
Volume
Power Change EN_SPKON- FLASH ROM With secure
Speaker Amplifier EN_BZON- 16Mbit
Connector 16bit locking
S02B- BU4066 VOLA device
PA SK
LM4819 NJM3414 VOLB +24V
VOLC
VOLD +5V BM30B-
SHLDS
SPMUTE- +3.3V
RGDT-
(CI detection) +5V2
HDMUTE-
RHS- MON_24V- +24V +24V
SI3_RES- Detection
CI2- RES_FAX-

FAX_RXD(D)+
FAX_RXD(D)-
CI
CI- FAX_TXD(D)+
Detection FAX_TXD(D)-

Polarity FAX_CTS(D)-
HS1-
inversion
FAX ASIC FAX_RTS(D)-
Detection HS2-
(Not mount) FAX_RXD(CS)+
MB87F4930 FAX_RXD(CS)-

CION FAX_TXD(CS)+
FAX_TXD(CS)-

150VON FAX_CTS(CS)-
S relay

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 7

+5V2 FAX_RTS(CS)-

FLV PP
MJ2
(TEL) MSGMUTE

OFF fock 16bit Version ID voltage

detection level
ECON

EXHS- CNCT_FAX-
JTAG JTAG
MRON
Connector
14pin
SON1 (Not mount)
CPU
CID-
Download Log SH7706 Voltage
UART 1.9V Regulator 3.3V
Connector
+24V (Not mount) R1173S001B
PIC +12 PICPGM_EN
+12V +24
CI Fi ter microcomputer Spred
UART Crystal
CI Fi ter PIC16F690 Spectrum Resonator
+5V2
CY25811SXCT 14.7456MHz
SON2
WUP_FAX-

voltage TELID
Operation in 1W/7W level
energy-save mode voltage TELID2
level
 (1)

DC POWER SUPPLY MAIN POWER SW

+
AC IN F1 F030
MAIN
Live Live-out Live-in

~
~
Voltage
T20A 250V T8AH 250V Conversion

-
24V
12V
5VN
3.3V
Neutral Neutral-out Neutral-in

F401
SUB
A. AC power line diagram

Voltage
2. Power line diagram

Conversion
F3.15A/250V
F003 5VO
HL_PR
T3.15A/250V 5VL
AC power line diagram (120V)

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

GND

T1 G T1 G FW
Z001 Generating
T2 4 T2 4 Circuit
1 1
HLOUT_1 HLOUT_2
2 GND 2 GND

6 6

Live-WH Neutral-WH

WH PWB 650W 560W

HL 1 HL 2 THERMOSTAT2
THERMOSTAT1

F3 F4
T2.0AH/250V T2.0AH/250V

FUSING UNIT

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 8

NC

WH_CNT
NO
24V

RY1

WH-SW1

SCN
HEATER

SCN UNIT

WARM HEATER SET (OPTION)

 (2)

Reactor

DC POWER SUPPLY MAIN POWER SW

+
AC IN F1 F030
MAIN
Live Live-out Live-in

~
~
Voltage
T10A 250V T5AH 250V Conversion

-
24V
12V
5VN
3.3V
F2
Neutral Neutral-out Neutral-in

T10A 250V

F401
SUB
Voltage
Conversion
F2AH/250V
AC power line diagram (230V)

F003 5VO
HL_PR

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

T3.15AH/250V 5VL

GND

T1 G T1 G FW
Z001 Generating
T2 4 T2 4 Circuit
1 1
HLOUT_1 HLOUT_2
2 GND 2 GND

6 6

Live-WH Neutral-WH Neutral-PCI Live-PCI

WH PWB 650W 560W

HL 1 HL 2 THERMOSTAT2
THERMOSTAT1

F3 F4
T2.0AH/250V T2.0AH/250V

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 9

PCI DC POWER SUPPLY
FUSING UNIT Voltage
Conversion
NC 24V(PCI)
+

F1
WH_CNT
~
~

NO
24V
T3.15A/250V
-

RY1

RV1
N/F

PCI SET (OPTION)

WH-SW1

SCN
HEATER

SCN UNIT

WARM HEATER SET (OPTION)

 SCNcnt PWB 7.0 INCH PANEL UN
12V 7.0 OP PWB(KEY PWB)
BZR
12V
24V2 WU_KEY (Reset key) PCU PIC control
/BZR PWRSW (Soft SW) PCU PIC control
5VO 5VO WU_LED (Reset key LED) PCU PIC control
5VO_Duty POW_LED (Main power LED) PCU PIC control
5VN 5VN 3.3V INFO_LED (FAX reception LED) PCU PIC control
KEYCON

5VPD
FET 5VPD series sensor ANY KEY

CTRL_5VPD 3.3V 7.0 LVDS PWB

CTRL_A3.3V
A3.3V 5VO 24V
DCDC LED DRIVER Backlight
3.3V RSPF DRIVER PWB
1.5V CCD PWB 5VN 3.3V_LCD
DCDC LDO LCD(7.0)
POF_SCN (PCU PIC control) H8S IPD1.2V A3.3V 5VO_Duty DF open/close PCU PIC control 3.3V
DCDC LDO Touch panel
CTRL_A10V DCDC Document set sensor PCU PIC control
12V A10V A10V 1.8V 5VPD
B. DC power line diagram

DCDC 5VPD series sensor

A5V A5V
DCDC
3.3V
3.3V series sensor
CTRL_A5V
24V2 24VPD 24VPD 24VPD clutch,
FET solenoid, other
5VO 5VO_Duty CTRL_24VPD MIM (STM)
24VPD motors

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

Scanner motor

MFPC PWB
ARM9 NETWORK / USB
POF_MFPC (PCU PIC control) 3.3V_ON
ARM11 DCDC
UART REQ_PIC (PCU PIC control) 1.8V_ON FAX UN
DCDC
REQ_PIC_INT (PCU PIC control) 1.27V_ON FAX_WUP(PIC control)
DCDC
5VO 5VO 5VO
PIC

3.3V_ECO 5VHD
DCDC HDD(2.5")
1.5V_ECO
DCDC USB_HUB USB
0.75V_ECO
DCDC (CARD Reader/FrontUSB
DC PWB 1.27V_EC /KEYBOARD)
DCDC
5VL 5VL 5VL 5VL

24V1 24V1

G-Array
3.3V 3.3V
SH7706
DCDC 1.9V
INT5V
DCDC 1.8V

PCU PWB 5VO_Duty LD PWB

3-terminal INT5V INT5V(5V_LD)
LD
Reg

FET
LSUFM
5VO 5VO LSU fan
PIC
24V1 PGM (BLM)
Polygon motor

6.3A
24V1 24V1 24V1
24V1 fan, clutch, solenoid, other

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 10

OPTION
24V1
6.3A COIN VENDOR,
24V2 5VN DESK

HL(AC)RY
24V1
DSW
INT24V INT24V INT24V
FET

INT24V
INT24V motors
3.3V 3.3V

HV
H8S I/O ASIC CPLD
5VN 5VN 5VNPD
FET 5VNPD series sensor
FW (from DC PWB) POF (to PCU PIC) (PCU H8S control)
5VN
5VN series sensor
12V 12V Used in the 2-speed control FAN.

DCCNT2 DCCNT1

OPTION

OFF_CNT RY_CNT 5VN

(PCU PIC control) (PCU PIC control) 24V2 FINISHER
INTERLOCK SW
(FSSW)
 PCU PWB MFPC PWB
A. LSU section

CN10 CN46
MFPFM_LD 1 28 nFAN_CNCT
MFPFM_PWM 2 27 PWM
BD_HSYNC 3 26 BD_HSYNC
D-GND 4 25 D-GND
nREQ_PIC_INT 5 24 NREQ_PIC_INT
MPU_INTRO_N 6 23 MPU_INTRO_N
3. Actual wiring chart

nRES_PIC 7 22 NRST_PIC
MPU_PRINTST_N 8 21 MPU_PRINTST_N
nPOF_MFPC 9 20 NPOF_MFPC LD PWB
LAN_CNT 10 19 WOLAN_ON
PICVPPON 11 18 PICVPPON

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

nWU_FAX 12 17 NWU_FAX12_LAN
RXD_PIC 13 16 RXD_PIC PHDR-12VS-2 PHDR-12VS-2
MPU_SIF_RxD 14 15 MPU_SIF_RX CN52 JP1
TXD_PIC 15 14 TXD_PIC D-GND 1 2 GND
MPU_SIF_TxD 16 13 MPU_SIF_TX BD_HSYNC_N 2 1 nBD
nCLR_PIC 17 12 NCLR_PIC LDD_LDEN1_N 3 3 nENB
MPU_SIF_CLK 18 11 MPU_SIF_CLK LDD_SH1_N 4 8 nS/H
nREQ_PIC 19 10 NREQ_PIC D-GND 5 9 GND
MPU_SIF_RST 20 9 MPU_SIF_RST LDD_LDERR_N 9 4 nLDERR
PWM(PGC) 21 8 PICPGC_RSVPWM LVDS_LD1P 6 RD RD 7 DT_P
nCTS_PCU 22 7 nCTS_PCU LVDS_LD1M 8 WH WH 5 DT_N
RxD_PCU 23 6 RXD_PCU D-GND 7 SH SH 6 GND
RTS_PCU 24 5 nRTS_PCU D-GND 10 (NC)
TxD_PCU 25 4 TXD_PCU D-GND 11 (NC)
RES_PCU 26 3 nRES_PCU D-GND 12 (NC)
D-GND 27 2 D-GND B12B-PHDSS-B
D-GND 28 1 D-GND
28FMZ-BT 28FMZ-BT

CN12
LD_DA 4 10 VREF
D-GND 2 11 GND
INT5V 1 12 VCC
S12B-PHDSS-B
2-292173-5(AMP)
PM_CLK 6 1 POLYCLK

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 11

PM_LD/ 5 2 /LOCK Polygon
PM_D 8 3 /STAR T
GND 3 4 GND motor
24V 7 5 24V
179228-5

Paper exit tray unit

PHNR-03-H/BU03P-TR-P-H/03KR-6H-PC 292250-3
TFD1 9 3 TFD1 3 1 TFD1 Paper exit tray
GND 10 2 D-GND 2 2 D-GND paper empty
5VN 12 1 5VN 1 3 5VN detector
LSUFM_V 11 (NC) 03XR-6H-P GP1S73P
LSUFM_LD 14 (NC)
GND 13 (NC)
B14B-PHDSS-B PHDR-14VS-2
 7.0inch OPERATION UN

LCD7.0 Unit
MFPC PWB SCN CNT PWB LVDS PWB
CN2 FPC
CN4 CN1 GND 40
GND 1 41 GND GND 39 LCD module
nLCD DISP 2 40 nLCD DISP NC 38
LCDSEL1_10H 3 39 LCDSEL1_10H 3.3V_LCD 37
LCDSEL0_43H 4 38 LCDSEL0_43H 3.3V_LCD 36
GND 5 37 GND 3.3V_LCD 35
LCD_A3_P 6 36 LCD_A3_P 3.3V_LCD 34
LCD_A3_M 7 35 LCD_A3_M NC 33
GND 8 34 GND ENAB 32
LCD_CLK_P 9 33 LCD_CLK_P HSYNC 31
PHDR-30VS-1 PHDR-16VS-2 LCD_CLK_M 10 32 LCD_CLK_M VSYNC 30
CN45 CN5 GND 11 31 GND CK 29
SCANDATA0- 1 16 SCANDATA0- LCD_A2_P 12 30 LCD_A2_P GND 28
SCANDATA0+ 3 15 SCANDATA0+ LCD_A2_M 13 29 LCD_A2_M B7 27
DGND 2 14 GND GND 14 28 GND B6 26
SCANDATA1- 7 13 SCANDATA1- LCD_A1_P 15 27 LCD_A1_P B5 25
SCANDATA1+ 9 11 SCANDATA1+ LCD_A1_M 16 26 LCD_A1_M B4 24
B. Operation section

DGND 8 12 GND GND 17 25 GND B3 23

SCANDATA2- 13 9 SCANDATA2- LCD_A0_P 18 24 LCD_A0_P B2 22
SCANDATA2+ 15 7 SCANDATA2+ LCD_A0_M 19 23 LCD_A0_M B1 21
DGND 14 10 GND GND 20 22 GND B0 20
SCANCLKOUT- 19 5 SCANCLKOUT- /CCFT 21 21 /CCFT G7 19
SCANCLKOUT+ 21 3 SCANCLKOUT+ /XL_X2_SDA 22 20 /XL_X2_SDA G6 18
DGND 20 6 GND YH_Y2_SCL 23 19 YH_Y2_SCL G5 17
SCANDATA3- 25 1 SCANDATA3- /YL_Y1_INT 24 18 /YL_Y1_INT G4 16
SCANDATA3+ 27 2 SCANDATA3+ XH_X1_CS 25 17 XH_X1_CS G3 15
DGND 26 4 GND GND 26 16 GND G2 14
(NC) 8 3.3V 5V 27 15 5V G1 13
B16B-PHDSS-B 5V 28 14 5V G0 12
5V 29 13 5V R7 11

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

5V 30 12 5V R6 10
GND 31 11 GND R5 9
GND 32 10 GND R4 8
24V 33 9 24V R3 7
24V 34 8 24V R2 6
CN11 24V 35 7 24V R1 5
DGND 29 SH SH 16 GND 24V 36 6 24V R0 4
LCD_DATA3+ 30 PK PK 13 LCD_A3_P GND 37 5 GND U/D 3
LCD_DATA3- 28 WH WH 14 LCD_A3_M GND 38 4 GND L/R 2
DGND 23 SH SH 10 GND VCONT(GND) 39 3 GND GND 1
LCD_CLK+ 24 PK PK 11 LCD_CLK_P SC_TEMP(GND) 40 2 GND FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
LCD_CLK- 22 WH WH 12 LCD_CLK_M GND 41 1 GND
DGND 17 SH SH 9 GND CN3 FPC
FX16S-41S-0.5SV FX16S-41S-0.5SH
LCD_DATA2+ 18 PK PK 7 LCD_A2_P FX16M1-41P-HC FX16M1-41P-HC XH(X1) 1
LCD_DATA2- 16 WH WH 8 LCD_A2_M /YL(Y1) 2
DGND 11 SH SH 4 GND /XL(X2) 3 TOUCH PANEL
LCD_DATA1+ 12 PK PK 5 LCD_A1_P YH(Y2) 4
LCD_DATA1- 10 WH WH 6 LCD_A1_M 52271-0469
DGND 5 SH SH 3 GND
LCD_DATA0+ 6 PK PK 1 LCD_A0_P CN4
LCD_DATA0- 4 WH WH 2 LCD_A0_M S3B-PH-SM4-TB
B30B-PHDSS-B (NC) 15 LCDSEL0_43H VLED+ 1
(NC) 2 (NC) BACK LIGHT
(NC) 17 LCDSEL1_10H VLED- 3

(NC) 27 SP_CLOSE_H BHSMR-02VS / BHSR-02VS-1

CN35 PHR-6 1 VLED+ 1
(NC) 31 KEYIN_NH
nLCD_DISP 8 19 nLCD_DISP 2 VLED- 2
6 GND
nRES_SCN 7 21 nRES_SCN
5 PD
TXD_SCN 5 23 TXD_SCN
4 5V
RXD_SCN 3 25 RXD_SCN
3 PDSEL2 ORS-PD PWB
nRTS_SCN 6 24 nRTS_SCN
2 PDSEL1
nCTS_SCN 4 26 nCTS_SCN
1 PDSEL0 KEY PWB
DGND 9 34 GND
DGND 10 (NC) 22 nPOF_SCN B6P-PH-K-S
DGND 1 (NC) 28 5V0 CN13 CN1
DGND 2 (NC) 29 SPED-H 5VO 1 14 5V2
B10B-PHDSS-B 18 GND 5VO 2
PHDR-10VS-2 20 5VPWM nHM_KEY 3 (NC)
(NC) 30 /PCU_REQ /BZR 4 4 /BZR

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 12

(NC) 32 /SC_ACK nHM_LED 5 (NC)
(NC) 33 GND GND 6 (NC)
B34B-PHDSS-B GND 7 (NC)
PHDR-34VS-1 (NC) 8 (NC)
5V 9 (NC)
GND 10
PD 11
5V 12
PDSEL2 13
PDSEL1 14
PDSEL0 15
GND 16 16 GND
/F0(&nHM_LED) 17 (NC)
SEG0(&12V) 18 5 SEG0LEDBPR
/F2 19 13 /F2G0
/F1 20 11 /F1D2
3.3VA 21 3 3.3V_EXT
SEG2 22 8 SEG2D0
SEG1 23 7 SEG1LEDCPR
/F3 24 15 /F3G1
5V 25 (NC)
PCU PWB /KEYIN 26 2 /KEYIN
B26B-PHDSS-B PHDR-26VS-1
12 nPWRSW
6 nWU_KEY
CN6
1 GND
nPOF_SCN 1 9 POW_LED
+5VO_DUTY 2 10 WU_LED
nSPED 3 ZER-16V-S BM16B-ZESS-TBT
D-GND 4 SMP-06V-NC/SMR-06V-N
nPWR_SW 5 1 nPWR_SW 1
nWU_KEY 6 2 nWU_KEY 2
D-GND 7 3 D-GND 3
nPOW_LED 8 4 nPOW_LED 4 PAP-03V-S CN1
nWU_LED 9 5 nWU_LED 5 1 5VO
USB
nINFO_FAX_ 10 6 nINFO_FAX_LED 6 2 nINFO_LED CONNECTOR
+5VO 11 (NC) 3 F-GND
nPOW_LED_PLS 12 (NC) PWB F-GND
B03B-PASK-1
B12B-PHDSS-B PHDR-12VS-2
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
 RSPF SCN CNT PWB CCD PWB
DRIVER PWB CN-15 CN-3 CN-2
12 GND GND 1 41 GND
11 GND AFE_RDO 2 40 AFE_RDO
10 24V AFE_WRD 3 39 AFE_WRD
9 5VO AFE_SCLK 4 38 AFE_SCLK
8 24V AFE_CS 5 37 AFE_CS
7 5VB /RES_CCDAD 6 36 /RES_CCDAD
(NC) 6 12V GND 7 35 GND
5 5V A3.3V 8 34 A3.3V
4 3.3V A3.3V 9 33 A3.3V
(NC) 3 3.3V A3.3V 10 32 A3.3V
2 GND A3.3V 11 31 A3.3V
1 GND A3.3V 12 30 A3.3V
B12B-PHDSS A3.3V 13 29 A3.3V
PHDR-12VS-2 GND 14 28 GND
C. Scanner section

A5V 15 27 A5V
CN-A A5V 16 26 A5V
GND 1 A5V 17 25 A5V
GND 2 GND 18 24 GND
SPPD1 3 A10V 19 23 A10V
SPPD2 4 A10V 20 22 A10V
24VPD 5 PHDR-28VS-1 GND 21 21 GND
24VPD 6 CN-14 RA- 22 20 RA-
5V 7 1 SPPD1 RA+ 23 19 RA+
3.3V 8 2 SPPD2 GND 24 18 GND
SPFMA 9 3 SPFMA RB- 25 17 RB-
SPFMA/ 10 4 SPFMA/ RB+ 26 16 RB+
SPFMB 11 5 SPFMB GND 27 15 GND
SPFMB/ 12 6 SPFMB/ RC- 28 14 RC-

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

SPFMO1 13 7 SPFMO1 RC+ 29 13 RC+
SPUMA 14 8 SPUMA GND 30 12 GND
SPUMA/ 15 9 SPUMA/ CLK- 31 11 CLK-
SPUMB 16 10 SPUMB CLK+ 32 10 CLK+
SPUMB/ 17 11 SPUMB/ GND 33 9 GND
SPUMO1 18 12 SPUMO1 RD- 34 8 RD-
SPRS 19 13 SPRS RD+ 35 7 RD+
STMPS 20 14 STMPS GND 36 6 GND
SRRC 21 15 SRRC RE- 37 5 RE-
SPFC 22 16 SRRS RE+ 38 4 RE+
SPWS 23 17 SPWS GND 39 3 GND
SELA 24 18 SELA_ AFE_CSTG 40 2 AFE_CSTG
SELB 25 19 SELB_ GND 41 1 GND
SELC 26 20 SELC_ FX16S-41S-0.5SV FX16M1-41P-HC FX16M1-41P-HC FX16S-41S-0.5SV
SSELO 27 21 SSELO
– 28 (NC) 22 SPPD4
– 29 (NC) (NC) 23 SPFMO2
SPPD3 30 24 SPPD3
SPPD4 31 (NC) 25 (NC)
5VPD 32 26 5VPD
GND 33 27 SPED
GND 34 (NC) 28 SOCD CN-10 EHR-3 S3B-EH
B34B-PHDSS B28B-PHDSS MHPS 1 3 GND
PHDR-34VS-1 GND 2 2 AFE_CSTG MHPS
5VPD 3 1 GND
B3B-PH-K-S VHPLG217L5A-1
CN-I
5VB 1
5VO 2
SOCD/ 3 (NC) CN-7
SPED/ 4 MIM_A 1 1 MIM_A
B4B-PH-K-S MIM_B 2 2 MIM_B MIM
F-GND F-GND MIM_/A 3 3 MIM_/A 42 HB
MIM_/B 4 4 MIM_/B
SRA-21T-3 SAA-21T-3.5L B4B-PH-K-S B4B-PH-SM4-TB RMOTS0920FCPZ
PHR-4 PHR-4

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 13

CN-16
LED DRV PWB LED PWB
(NC) 1 nA_PNC CN-2 CN1
(NC) 2 nA_COPY IDRV1 1 1 IDRV1
(NC) 3 nA_CA IDRV2 2 2 IDRV2
(NC) 4 nA_READY IDRV3 3 3 IDRV3
(NC) 5 nA_AUD IDRV4 4 4 IDRV4
AUDITOR OR (NC) 6 5V IDRV5 5 5 IDRV5
(NC) 7 GND CN-8 CN-1 IDRV6 6 6 IDRV6
(OPTION) (NC) 8 24V 24VPD 1 1 24VPD 24V 7 7 24V
(NC) 9 /col 24VPD 2 2 24VPD S7B-PH-K-S PHR-7 PHR-7 S7B-PH-SM4-TB
(NC) 10 nA_TC LAMP 3 3 LAMP
(NC) 11 24V GND 4 4 GND
12 nPNC-a GND 5 5 GND
13 GND 5597-05CPB7F 5597-05APB
B13B-PH-K-S
PHR-13

CN-17 179228-3 175489-3

5VC1 1 1 5V
CN-2 GND 2 2 /OCSW OCSW
(NC) 1 3.3V /OCSW 3 3 GND
(NC) 2 GND 24V 4 VHPLG248NL1-1
(NC) 3 CPU_RXD /SIZE_LED1 5
(NC) 4 CPU_TXD /SIZE_LED2 6
(NC) 5 RXD_MFP_DB B6B-PH-K-S 24V
(NC) 6 TXD_MFP_DB /SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED2 ORS LED PWB
BM06B-GHS-TBT
GND

SRA-21T-4

F-GND
 Manual feed tray unit
SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N
1 24V 1 Manual paper feed
PCU PWB 2 /MPFS 2 solenoid

292250-2
1 /MTOP1 Manual feed tray reduction detector/
1st paper exit unit CN28 CN20 15KR-6H-PC/BU15P-TR-P-H/PHNR-15-H Manual feed tray extension detector 1
15CZ-6Y 2 D-GND
(NC) 7 5VN 24V 15 1 24V 1 179228-2
(NC) 9 PRTPD /MPFS 14 2 /MPFS 2 292250-2
(NC) 11 D-GND /MTOP1 13 3 /MTOP1 3 1 /MTOP2 Manual feed tray reduction detector/
D-GND 12 4 D-GND 4 2 D-GND Manual feed tray extension detector 2
S3B-PH-K-S PHR-3 /MTOP2 11 5 /MTOP2 5 179228-2
D-GND 1 1 D-GND D-GND 10 6 D-GND 6 292250-3
Shifter home
SHPOS 2 5 SHPOS /MPLD1 9 7 /MPLD1 7 1 /MPLD1
position Manual feed paper
5VNPD 3 3 5VNPD D-GND 8 8 D-GND 8 2 D-GND
5VNPD 7 9 5VNPD 9 3 5VNPD length detector 2
GP1A71L3
/MPLD2 6 10 /MPLD2 10 179228-3
CZHR-03V-S/BU-03P-TZ-S/CZHR-03V-S D-GND 5 11 D-GND 11 292250-3
PINK 3 5VNPD 1 4 5VNPD 5VNPD 4 12 5VNPD 12 1 /MPLD2
1st paper exit Manual feed paper
BROWN 2 POD1 2 6 POD1 3.3V 3 13 3.3V 13 2 D-GND
detector 1 D-GND 3 length detector 1
GRAY 2 D-GND MPWD 2 14 MPWD 14 3 5VNPD
D-GND 1 15 D-GND 15 179228-3
B15B-CZHK-B-1 S3B-PH-K-S
1 3.3V
SMR-03V-N / SMP-03V-NC Manual feed paper
2 MPWD
1 FUFM_V 1 10 FUFM_V 3 D-GND length detector
Fusing fan 1 2 D-GND 2 13 D-GND PHR-3
3 FUFM_LD1 3 14 FUFM_LD1 CN21 03KR-6H-P/BU03P-TR-P-H/03KR-6H-P S3B-PH-K-S
D-GND 20 1 D-GND 3 1 D-GND
SMR-03V-N / SMP-03V-NC 2 /APPD1 2 ADU transport path
/APPD1 19 2 /APPD1
1 FUFM_V 1 12 FUFM_V 5VNPD 18 3 5VNPD 1 3 5VNPD detector 2
Fusing fan 2 2 D-GND 2 15 D-GND 03KR-6H-P
3 FUFM_LD2 3 16 FUFM_LD2

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

(NC) 8 D-GND 04KR-6H-P/BU04P-TR-P-H/PHNR-04-H 292250-3
PHDR-16VS-2 B16B-PHDSS /PPD1 17 1 /PPD1 4 1 /PPD1
(NC) 2 (NC) 3 (NC) 2 D-GND Manual paper feed
D-GND 16 3 D-GND 2 3 5VNPD paper entry detector
5VNPD 15 4 5VNPD 1 179228-3 VHPSG2481++-1
05KR-6H-PC/BU05P-TR-P-H/05KR-6H-PC 292250-3
/MPED 14 1 /MPED 5 1 /MPED
CN25 2 Manual paper feed
D-GND 13 D-GND 4 2 D-GND
1 24V 5VN 12 3 5VN 3 3 5VN paper empty detector
Paper exit gate 2 /POGS1a /C1SS 11 4 /C1SS 2 03XR-6H-P VHPSG2481++-1
solenoid 3 /POGS1b D-GND 10 5 D-GND 1
B3B-PH-K-M Tray 1 cassette unit
PHR-3-M
292250-2
1 /C1SS Tray 1 paper empty detector
2 D-GND
02XR-6H-P
CN2 03KR-6H-PB3B-PH-K-S
1 INT24V /C1LUM 9 1 /C1LUM
2 INT24V (NC) 2 (NC) Tray 1 lift motor
3 OSMA D-GND 8 3 D-GND
Shifter motor 4 OSMB B20B-CZHK-B-1
5 OSMXA 20CZ-6H F-GND F-GND
D. Manual feed, DV, Paper exit (1st, 2nd), Tray 1 section

6 OSMXB SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4

B6B-PH-K-S
PHR-6 CN18 SMP-07V-NC / SMR-07V-N SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N
24V 1 1 24V 1 1 24V 1
Tray 1 pickup solenoid
/C1PUS 3 2 /C1PUS 2 2 C1PUS 2
CN24 D-GND 5 3 D-GND 3
C1PFD 7 4 C1PFD 4
1 INT24V 5VN 9 5 5VN 5 B6B-PH-K-S
2 ADUMA C1PED 11 6 C1PED 6 1 D-GND Cassette sensor PWB
Paper exit 3 ADUMB (NC) 13 (NC) 7 C1LUD 7 2 C1PFD
reverse motor 4 ADUMXA C1LUD 15 3 5VN Tray 1 transport detector
5 ADUMXB DGND 17 (NC) 4 C1PED Tray 1 paper empty detector
B5B-PH-K-R (NC) 5 (NC) Tray 1 upper limit detector
PHR-5-R 6 C1LUD
PHR-6

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 14

SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
CN26
1 /C1PUC 1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch
1 INT24V 2 24V 2
2 POMA
ADU motor 3 POMB DV UNIT
4 /POMA
5 /POMB To HV PWB
B5B-PAEK-1
PAP-05V-E SRA-01T-3.2
52025-0811 / 51010-0811
SRA-01T-3.2
8 DVBS 8
(NC) 7 (NC) 7 (NC)
D-GND 2 6 D-GND 6
2nd paper exit unit (Japan model only: Standard equipment) DVSET 4 5 DVSET 5
DVSEL 18 4 DVSEL 4 (NC) 4 D-GND
(NC) 3 (NC) 3 (NC) 3 TCS Toner density
292250-3 CN3 TCS 6 2 TCS 2 2 24V
179228-3 sensor
POD2 1 2 POD2 24V 8 1 24V 1 (NC) 1 N.C
2nd paper exit PHR-4
D-GND 2 1 D-GND S4B-PH-K-S
detector 5VNPD 3 3 5VNPD
GP1SQ73P 7 D-GND
4 5VN TSHP-04V-K
DF3A-3P-2DS 5 TFD2 D-GND 10 4 D-GND
D-GND 1 10 DSW_POC 5VN 12 3 5VN
2nd paper exit full CRM_CLK 14 2 CRM_CL
CRUM
5VN 2 8 D-GND
detector POUT2B_DET CRM_DT 16 1 CRM_DT
TFD2 3 6
DF3-3S-2C 9 D-GND PHDR-18VS-2 TSHR-04V-K
GP1SQ44S B18B-PHDSS
B10B-PASK-1
292250-2
Paper exit cover DSW_POC 1
open/close detection SW
CN19
DGND 2
179228-2 PAP-10V-S /C1PUC 11
24V 13 SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N
24V 14 1 24V 1
(NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC)
Registration
/RRC 12 3 /RRC 3 roller clutch
B14B-PHDSS PHDR-14VS-2
 Right paper exit unit option
PCU PWB
CN1 179228-3
5VNPD 3 3 5VNPD
POD3
Right paper exit
2 1 POD3
SMR-03V-N/SMP-03V-NC CN17 D-GND 1 2 D-GND detector
1 PSFM_V 1 6 PSFM_V GP1SQ73P
Power supply cooling PSFM_LD1 PSFM_LD1
3 3 5
fan 1 (Side) 2 P-GND 2 4 P-GND 179228-3
5VN 4 3 5VN
TFD3
Right paper exit
5 1 TFD3
SMR-03V-N/SMP-03V-NC D-GND 6 2 D-GND full detector
1 PSFM_V 1 3 PSFM_V GP1SQ73P
Power supply cooling
3 PSFM_LD2 3 2 PSFM_LD2
fan 2 (Front) P-GND P-GND
2 2 1 XARR-03VF/XAP-03V-1
B6B-PH-K-S 24V 7 1 24V 1
/POGS2a /POGS2a
Right paper exit gate
8 2 2
/POGS2b 9 3 /POGS2b 3 select solenoid

CN29 POUT2A_DET 10
(NC) 1 OZFM_V D-GND 11
(NC) 2 /OZFM_LD B11B-PASK-1
(NC) 3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-S (NC) 3 (NC)
CN19 (NC) 6 (NC)

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

INT24V 2 1 INT24V
D-GND 4 2 P-GND Main motor
/MM_D 6 5 /MM_D
MM_LD 8 7 MM_LD
SMR-02V-N /MM_CLK 10 4 /MM_CLK
1 To PS PWB PHR-7 B7B-PH-K-S
2
Dsub15pin
JAC-15P-3/JAC-15S-3 D-GND 1 (NC)
1 PGND 1 5VN 3 1 5VN
CN7 Temperature
2 +24V 2 HUD_RA 5 2 HUD_RA
3 /FIN_CRDY 3 1 TxD_FIN D-GND 7 3 D-GND sensor/Humidity
4 FIN_STS 4 3 RxD_FIN TH_RA 9 4 TH_RA sensor
5 /RES 5 5 /DTR_FIN B14B-PHDSS PHDR-14VS-2 ZHR-4 S4B-ZR-SM3A-TF
6 N.C 6 7 /DSR_FIN
7 N.C 7 9 RES_FIN
TO Finisher 8 N.C 8 (NC) 11 /TRC_FIN
E. Right paper exit, ILSW, Fan, Finisher, CV section

9 N.C 9 13 RES_FINin
(OPTION) 10 N.C 10 15 5VN
11 /FIN_SRDY 11 (NC) 17 GND
12 FIN_CMD 12 (NC) 2 N.C
13 +5V 13 B18B-PHDSS
14 /FIN_DET 14 CN15
15 F-GND 15 PHDR-18VS-2 TNMA 1
Toner motor
TNMB 2
F-GND B2P-VH VHR-2N

SRA-21T-3

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 15

31cpm/35cpm machine only
CN23 PHNR-03-H/BU03P-TR-P-H/PHNR-03-H
POFM_V 1 3 POFM_V 1
POFM_LD1 2 2 POFM_LD1 2 Paper exit cooling
P-GND 3 1 P-GND 3 fan 1
POFM_V 4
POFM_LD2 5
P-GND 6 All destinations
PHNR-03-H/BU03P-TR-P-H/PHNR-03-H
3 POFM_V 1
2 POFM_LD2 2
Paper exit cooling
1 P-GND 3 fan 2
CN9
1 24V
2 P-GND
3 /CV_COPY
4 /CV_COUNT SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N
5 /CV_START 24V 7 1 24V 1 Process separation
6 /CV_CA /PSPS 8 2 /PSPS 2 pawl solenoid
7 /CV_CLCOPY B8B-PH-K-S PHR-8
TO COIN 8 /CV_COLOR1
9 /CV_STAPLE
VENDOR 10 /CV_COLOR0 CN22 SMP-03V-NC/SMR-03V-N
11 /CV_DUPLEX 24V 1 1 24V 1 24V
12 5VN P-GND 2 (NC) (NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC) Interlock SW
13 /CV_SIZE0 INT24V 3 3 INT24V 3 INT24V
14 /CV_SIZE1 B3P-VH VHR-3N
15 /CV_SIZE2
16 /CV_SIZE3
B16B-PNDZS
 SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N
1 24V2 1
To Finisher
2 P-GND 2

PS PWB PCU PWB HV PWB

CN14 CN13 CN13 CN1 B1

DCCNT1 1 7 nRY_CNT INT24V 2 11 SW24V MHV 1 MHV
DCCNT2 2 9 nOFF_CNT D-GND 4 9 DGND #187[RD] PS-187-R(RED)
FW 3 11 FW TC_DA 6 3 TCDA
HLOUT_1 4 13 HL_UM_out DHVREM/ 8 4 DHVREM CN21
HLOUT_2 5 15 HL_US_out THV-REM/ 10 6 THV-REM MCCASE 1 MCCASE
D-GND 6 17 D-GND DVBSPWM/ 12 8 DVBSPWM (NC) 2 (NC) SOKET HOLDER
/HL_PR 7 19 HL_PR MHVREM/ 14 1 MHVREM B2P-VH-BL VHR-2N-BL
B7B-PH-K-S PHR-7 PHDR-20VS-2 B20B-PHDSS THVREM/ 16 5 THVREM
GBPWM/ 18 2 GBPWM CN101
DVBSREM/ 20 7 DVBSREM GB 1 GB
DC output section (NC) 10 (NC) 2

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

B20B-PHDSS (NC) (NC)
24V CN11 CN16 PHDR-20VS-2 PHR-11 VHR-2N
B11B-PH-K-S B2P-VH
24V1 1 1 24V
24V2 2 B201
24V2 3 THV 1 - THV
P-GND 4 2 P-GND #187[WH] PS-187
P-GND 5 (NC) TC HIGH VOLTAGE
P-GND 6 CN301
B6P-VH-B VHR-6N DHV 1 - DHV HOLDER
3 12V (NC) 2 (NC)
4 D-GND B2P-VH-BK VHR-2N-BK
CN12
+12V 1 CN401
+12V 2 DVBS 1 (To DV Drawer)
+5VN 3 5 5VN GND 2 (NC)
+5VN 4 B2P-VH-RD VHR-2N-R
+3.3V 5 7 3.3V
+3.3V 6 8 3.3V
F. DC power supply section, High voltage section

+3.3V 7
D-GND 8 9 D-GND
D-GND 9 10 D-GND
D-GND 10 (NC)
D-GND 11 MFPC PWB
D-GND 12
D-GND 13
B13B-PASK-1 PAP-13V-S
CN7 CN41
INT5V 18 1 INT5V
CN13 D-GND 16 2 DGND
5VL 1 D-GND 14 3 DGND
5VL 2 24V 12 4 24V_FAX
5VO 3 6 +5VO +5VO 10 5 5VO_FAX
D-GND 4 (NC) VHR-10N B10P-VH-B 3.3V 8 6 3.3V_FAX
D-GND 5 3.3V 6 7 3.3V_FAX
D-GND 6 3.3V 4 8 3.3V_FAX
B06B-PASK-1 PAP-06V-S B18B-PHDSS PHDR-18VS-2 PHR-8 B8B-PH-K-S-B

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 16

CN47
1 DGND
2 +5VL
3 +5VL
4 DGND
VHR-4N B4P-VH

SCN CNT PWB

CN1
1 24V2
2 12V
3 D-GND
4 5VN
5 3.3V
6 D-GND
VHR-6N B6P-VH
 PCU PWB WH PWB (OPTION)
CN3 SCANNER UNIT
CN13 CN5 Neutral_WH 1 ELR-02V / ELP-02V
/WH_CNT 5 1 WH_CNT (N.C) 2 (NC) 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2
24V 3 2 24V Live_WH 3 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 WH-SCN
NC 1 (NC) PAP-02V-S B02B-PASK-1 B2P3-VH VHR-3N
B20B-PHDSS PHDR-20VS-2 JPN : OPTION
CN1 CN4
EX100V : OPTION
1 Live_WH Neutral_WH 1
EX120V : OPTION
(NC) 2 (N.C) (N.C) 2 (NC)
3 Neutral_WH Live_WH 3
VHR-3N-BK B2P3-VH-BK B2P3-VH VHR-3N EX200V : OPTION
CN2
XLP-02V/XLR-02V XLP-02V/XLR-02V
1 Live-WH
2 (N.C) 2 Live-WH 2 2 Live-WH 2
PS PWB (NC) 1 Neutral-WH 1 WH-CS1
3 Live-WH 1 Neutral-WH 1
VHR-3N-R B2P3-VH-R

XLP-02V/XLR-02V XLP-02V/XLR-02V
2 Live-WH 2 2 Live-WH 2
172074-7 or PS-187-R 1 Neutral-WH 1 1 Neutral-WH 1 WH-CS2
1 Live-WH
Dehumidifier
heater SW
1 Live-WH
172074-1 or PS-187 XLP-02V/XLR-02V XLP-02V/XLR-02V
2 Live-WH 2 2 Live-WH 2
CN4 WH-CS3
Neutral-WH 1 Neutral-WH 1 1 Neutral-WH 1
1
(NC) 2 (NC)

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

Live-WH 3
B2P3-VH-B VHR-3N
100V series AC cord XLP-02V/XLR-02V
CN1
2 Live-WH 2
1 Live WH-CS4
1 Neutral-WH 1
2 (NC)
3 Neutral
VLP-03V B03P-VL PCI (option)
SRA-51T-4

CN5 ELR-02V / ELP-02V CN

G. AC power supply section, Fusing section

Live-PCI 1 1 WH-L(PCI) 1 1 Neutral-in

200V series AC cord (NC) 2 (NC) 2 WH-N(PCI) 2 2 (NC)
CN1 Neutral-PCI 3 3 Live-in
Live 1 Live B2P3-VH-BK VHR-3N-BK B2P3-VH-B
F-GND 2 (NC)
Neutral 3 Neutral
VLP-03V B03P-VL AC PWB
INLET
200V series only
SRA-51T-4
CN10
LiveR-out 1
(NC) 2 (NC) (Reactor)
LiveR-in 3
Fusing unit
B2P3-VH-B-E
THERMOSTAT1

PS-250 CN2
SW OUT (NEUTRAL) 1 4 Neutral-out D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni)
PS-250
SW OUT (LIVE) 1 2 Live-out
THERMOSTAT2
AC SW
SW IN (LIVE) 1 1 Live-in CN6 VLR-02V/VLP-02V D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni)
PS-250-R(RED) HEATER(L) 1 1 LIVE1 1
SW IN (NEUTRAL) 1 3 Neutral-in HEATER(L) 2 2 HL-OUTPUT1 2

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 17

PS-250-R(RED) VLP-04V B04P-VL B02P-VL VLP-02V

CN7 VLR-03V/VLP-03V
HEATER LAMP1
Neutral HL out1 1 1 LIVE2 1
(NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 2 N.C 2 (NC)
Neutral HL out2 3 3 HL-OUTPUT2 3 HEATER LAMP2
B2P3-VH-RD VHR-3N-R

PCU PWB
CN21 03CK-6H-PC/BU03P-TR-P-H/RHNR-3-H 292250-3
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD ADU transport
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
POSD 3 3 POSD 3 3 POSD path detector 1

04CK-6H-PC/BU04P-TR-P-H/RHNR-4-H
TH_UM 4 1 TH_UM 1
D-GND 5 2 D-GND 2
Fusing thermistor main
TH_US 6 3 TH_US 3
D-GND 7 4 D-GND 4
B20B-CZHK-B-1 Fusing thermistor sub
20CZ-6H
 PCU PWB Standard Cassete I/F Option Cassete Tray 3 cassette unit (Option)
PWB I/F PWB CN3
/PLC3 1
CN14 CN5 CN9 CN9 Tray 3 paper feed
N.C 2 (NC)
P-GND 1 1 P-GND P-GND 1 1 P-GND 24V 3 clutch
24V 2 2 24V 24V 2 2 24V B3B-PH-K-S
5VN 3 3 5V 5V 3 3 5V PHR-3
24V 4 4 24V 24V 4 4 24V
C2PUS 5 5 PCS2# LUM4 5 5 LUM4
C2LUM 6 6 LUM2# PCS4 6 6 PCS4
PTRC2 7 7 TRCL2# Y3 7 7 Y3 CN2
C2PUC 8 8 PCL2# PCL4 8 8 PCL4 /TRCL3 1
Tray 3 vertical
C4PUS 9 9 PCS4# Y4 9 9 Y4 N.C 2 (NC)
C4LUM 10 10 LUM4# LUM3 10 10 LUM3 transport clutch
24V 3
C4PUC 11 11 PCL4# TRCL3 11 11 TRCL3 B3B-PH-K-K
Y1B 12 12 Y3 CSSELA 12 12 CSSELA PHR-3-BK
C3LUM 13 13 LUM3# PCS3 13 13 PCS3
Y2 14 14 Y4 CSSELB 14 14 CSSELB
CASSELA 15 15 CASSELA# PCL3 15 15 PCL3
PTRC1 16 16 TRCL3# CSSELC 16 16 CSSELC CN7
CASSELB 17 17 CASSELB# BI 17 17 BI CSS3 1 292250-2
C3PUS 18 18 PCS3# AI 18 18 AI N.C 2 (NC) 1 CSS3 Tray 3 presence
CASSELC 19 19 CASSELC# /BI 19 19 /BI D-GND 3 2 D-GND detection SW
C3PUC 20 20 PCL3# /AI 20 20 /AI B3B-PH-K-E PHR-3-BL 179228-2
CPFM_A 21 21 AI# OPCASSEL 21 21 OPCASSEL
CPFM_B 22 22 BI# D-GND 22 22 D-GND
CPFM_XA 23 23 /AI# D-GND 23 23 D-GND
CPFM_XB 24 24 /BI# D-GND 24 24 D-GND
Y1A 25 25 Y2 PUDP-24V-S PUDP-24V-S CN1 B3B-PH-K-S
B24B-PUDSS-1 B24B-PUDSS-1
/OPCASSEL 26 26 OPCASSEL# 1 LUM3D
H. Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4 section

LUM3D 1
D-GND 27 27 D-GND N.C 2 (NC) (NC) 2 N.C Tray 3 lift motor

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

D-GND 28 28 D-GND P-GND 3 3 P-GND
PUDP-28V-S PUDP-28V-S B28B-PUDSS-1 B3B-PH-K-R PHR-3-R PHR-3
B28B-PUDSS-1

Cassette sensor PWB

CN8 PHR-6 B6B-PH-K-S B3B-PH-K-S 179228-2
D-GND 1 1 D-GND DRS3 1 292250-2
PPD3 2 2 PPD3 N.C 2 1 DRS3 Tray 3 door open/close
5V 3 3 5V D-GND 3 2 D-GND detection SW
PAP3 4 4 PAP3 Tray 3 transport detector PHR-3
DRS3 5 5 DRS3 Tray 3 paper empty detector
LUD3 6 6 LUD3 Tray 3 upper limit detector
/PCS3 7
Tray 2 cassette unit (Standard) 24V 8
B8B-PH-K-S PHR-8 SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
CN3 1 /PCS3 1 Tray 3 pickup
/PCL2 1 2 24V 2 solenoid
(NC) 2 (NC) Tray 2 paper feed
24V 3 clutch
B3B-PH-K-S PHR-3

CN5 PHR-5
AI 1
CN2 BI 2
Tray transport
/TRCL2 1 /AI 3
Tray 2 vertical motor
(NC) 2 (NC) /BI 4
24V 3 transport clutch 24V1 5
B3B-PH-K-K PHR-3-BK B5B-PH-K-S

292250-2 179228-2
Tray 2 door open/close DRS2 1 F-GND F-GND
detection SW D-GND 2

Cassette sensor PWB

CN8 B6B-PH-K-S B3B-PH-K-S PHR-3
Tray 4 cassette unit (Option)
PHR-6

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 18

D-GND 1 1 D-GND DRS2 1
PPD2 2 2 PPD2 N.C 2 (NC) Cassette sensor PWB
5V 3 3 5V D-GND 3
CN4 PHR-6 B 6B-PH-K-S B3B-PH-K-S 179228-2
PAP2 4 4 PAP2
Tray 2 transport detector D-GND 1 1 D-GND DRS4 1 292250-2
DRS2 5 5 DRS2 Tray 2 paper empty detector
LUD2 6 6 LUD2 PPD4 2 2 PPD4 N.C 2 (NC) 1 DRS4 Tray 4 door open/close
Tray 2 upper limit detector 5V 3 3 5V D-GND 3 2 D-GND detection SW
/PCS2 7
PAP4 4 4 PAP4 Tray 4 transport detector PHR-3
24V 8
DRS4 5 5 DRS4 Tray 4 paper empty detector
B8B-PH-K-S Tray 4 upper limit detector
SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N LUD4 6 6 LUD4
Tray 2 pickup D-GND 7
1 /PCS2 1
2 24V 2 solenoid CSS4 8 179228-2 292250-2
PHR-8 24V 9 1 D-GND Tray 4 presence
/PCL4 10 2 CSS4 detection SW
24V 11
/PCS4 12
CN7 P-GND 13
292250-2 LUM4D 14 SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
CSS2 1 Tray 4 paper feed
B14B-PHDSS-B PHDR-14VS-2 1 24V 1
(NC) 2 (NC) 1 CSS2 Tray 2 presence clutch
D-GND 3 2 D-GND detector 2 /PCL4 2
B3B-PH-K-E PHR-3-BL 179228-2

SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
1 24V 1 Tray 4 pickup
2 /PCS4 2 solenoid

CN1 B3B-PH-K-S B3B-PH-K-S

LUM2D 1 1 LUM2D
(NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 2 N.C Tray 2 lift motor 1 LUM4D
P-GND 3 3 P-GND (NC) 2 N.C Tray 4 lift motor
PHR-3 3 P-GND
B3B-PH-K-R PHR-3-R PHR-3
 TEL LIU PWB FAX MAIN PWB MFPC PWB
CN1 CN3
+24V 1 1 24V CZHR-06V-S
AG 2 2 PGND CN1 SHLDP-30V-S-1(B) CN51 1 Shield4
MJ1
+24V 3 3 24V D-GND 30 1 DGND 2 DGND4
(JAPAN) AG 4 4 PGND +3.3V 29 2 +3.3VN 3 D4+
1 L1 150VON 5 5 150VON +3.3V 28 3 +3.3VN 4 D4– OPTION
2 L2 CION 6 6 CION CNCT_FAX– 26 4 nCNCT_FAX [USB Hub] 5 VBUS4
MSGMUTE 7 7 MSGMUTE FAX_RXD(D)– 27 5 FAX_TXD_D_N CN43 (NC) 6 (NC)
MJ-62J-RD315
HS1– 8 8 HS1– FAX_RXD(D)+ 25 6 FAX_TXD_D_P SHIELD4 15
or HS2– 9 9 HS2– +5V 24 7 +5VL DGND4 14 KEYBOARD
TO LINE (EX) CI– 10 10 CI– nRES_FAX 22 8 nRES_FAX D4+ 13 F-GND
1 TEL1 EXHS– 11 11 EXHS– FAX_RXD(CS)+ 23 9 FAX_TXD_CS_P D4– 12 SRA-21T-4 PALR-06V / PAP-06V-S PAP-06V-S / PALR-06V PWB
2 L1 SON1 12 12 SON1 FAX_RXD(CS)– 21 10 FAX_TXD_CS_N VBUS4 11 6 F-GND 6 6 F-GND 6 F-GND
3 L2 SON2 13 13 SON2 D-GND 20 11 DGND SHIELD3 10 5 Shield3 5 5 Shield3 5 Shield3
4 TEL2 ECON 14 14 ECON FAX_TXD(D)– 19 12 FAX_RXD_D_N DGND3 9 4 DGND3 4 4 DGND3 4 DGND3
MJ-64J-RD315 MRON 15 15 MRON FAX_TXD(D)+ 17 13 FAX_RXD_D_P D3+ 8 3 D3+ 3 3 D3+ 3 D3+
TELID 16 16 TELID FAX_WUP- 18 14 DGND D3– 7 2 D3– 2 2 D3– 2 D3–
CI2– 17 17 CI2– FAX_TXD(CS)+ 15 15 FAX_RXD_CS_P VBUS3 6 1 VBUS3 1 1 VBUS3 1 VBUS3
NC 18 18 NC FAX_TXD(CS)– 13 16 FAX_RXD_CS_N SHIELD1 5
TELID2 19 19 TELID2 +5V 16 17 +5VL DGND1 4
NC 20 20 NC D-GND 14 18 DGND D1+ 3
DG 21 21 MDMGND FAX_CTS(D)– 11 19 nRTS_FAX_D D1– 2
MJ2 +3.3V 22 22 MDM3.3V D-GND 12 20 DGND VBUS1 1 USB connector PWB
1 L1 DG 23 23 MDMGND FAX_RTS(D)– 9 21 nCTS_FAX_D BM15B-GHS-TBT USB-A
TO EX TEL 2 L2 5VS 24 24 +5VS FLVPP 10 22 +3.3VN GHR-15V-S 1 Shield1 Shield1 –
(LF)(SN)
FAX_CTS(CS)–
I. USB, FAX, PCI, HDD section

MJ-62J-RD315 DG 25 25 MDMGND 7 23 nRTS_FAX_CS 2 DGND1 DGND1 4

Board to Board
SI3_RES– 26 26 SI3_RES– +5VS 8 24 +5VO 3 D1+ D1+ 3

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

SPK 27 27 SPK FAX_RTS(CS)– 5 25 nCTS_FAX_CS 4 D1– D1– 2
USB
MDM_ATXD 28 28 ATXD +3.3V_F 4 26 +3.3VN 5 VBUS1 VBUS1 1
MDM_ARXD 29 29 ARXD +24V 6 27 +24V1 PAP-05V-S B05B-PASK-1
MDM_ABITCLK 30 30 ABITCLK +3.3V_F 3 28 +3.3VN
CN1 MDM_ASPCLK 31 31 ASPCLK D-GND 2 29 DGND
1 TX+ RGDT– 32 32 RGDT– P-GND 1 30 PGND
2 RX+ MDM_CLK 33 33 AFE_CLK BM30B-SHLDS-G-TFT SHLDP-30V-S-1(B) BM30B-SHLDS-G-TFT
TO HANDSET 3 RX– AFERES– 34 34 AFERES–
(JAPAN ONLY) 4 TX– BBITCLK 35 35 BBITCLK
5 DG BSPCLK 36 36 BSPCLK
6 RHS– BRXD 37 37 BTXD
MD-S6350-90 BTXD 38 38 BRXD
HDMUTE– 39 39 HDMUTE–
RHS– 40 40 RHS–
TX25-40P-12ST-H1E TX24-40R-10ST-H1E

CN2
1 SP–
SPEAKER 2 SP+
S02B-PASK-2(LF)(SN)

PAP-02V-S

HDD
BU31P-TCS-LE(LF) 31CSR-8PK CN29 CN22 SATA SIGNAL&POWER

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 19

1 PGND 31 1 PGND DGND 1 1 GND
2 DGND 30 2 DGND SATA_TXP 2 2 SATA_TXP
3 +3.3VN 29 3 +3.3VN SATA_TXN 3 3 SATA_TXN
4 +3.3VN 28 4 +3.3VN DGND 4 4 GND
5 CNCT_FAX 27 5 CNCT_FAX SATA_RXN 5 5 SATA_RXN
6 FAX_TXD_D_N 26 6 FAX_TXD_D_N SATA_RXP 6 6 SATA_RXP
7 FAX_TXD_D_P 25 7 FAX_TXD_D_P DGND 7 7 GND
8 +5VL 24 8 +5VL 6SAT07P-328B-B5 (NC) 1 3.3V
9 nRES_FAX 23 9 nRES_FAX (NC) 2 3.3V
10 FAX_TXD_CS_P 22 10 FAX_TXD_CS_P CN50 (NC) 3 3.3V
11 FAX_TXD_CS_N 21 11 FAX_TXD_CS_N DGND 1 4 DGND
12 DGND 20 12 DGND 5 DGND
13 FAX_RXD_D_N 19 13 FAX_RXD_D_N 6 DGND
14 FAX_RXD_D_P 18 14 FAX_RXD_D_P +5VHD 2 7 +5VHD
TO 2nd FAX 15 DGND 17 15 DGND 8 +5VHD
16 FAX_RXD_CS_P 16 16 FAX_RXD_CS_P 9 +5VHD
(OPTION) 17 FAX_RXD_CS_N 15 17 FAX_RXD_CS_N DGND 3 10 DGND
18 +5VL 14 18 +5VL B03B-PASK 11 DGND
19 DGND 13 19 DGND 12 DGND
20 nRTS_FAX_D 12 20 nRTS_FAX_D PAP-03V-S (NC) 13 +12V
21 DGND 11 21 DGND (NC) 14 +12V
22 nCTS_FAX_D 10 22 nCTS_FAX_D (NC) 15 +12V
23 +3.3VN 9 23 +3.3VN
24 nRTS_FAX_CS 8 24 nRTS_FAX_CS
25 +5VO 7 25 +5VO
26 nCTS_FAX_CS 6 26 nCTS_FAX_CS
27 +24V1 5 27 +24V1
28 +3.3VN 4 28 +3.3VN
29 +3.3VN 3 29 +3.3VN
30 DGND 2 30 DGND
31 PGND 1 31 PGND
31CSR-8PK B31B-CSRK(L)(SN)
 4. Signal list
Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
"L" "H" No. No. name
+5VHD HDD power source HDD power source Power shutoff Power supply CN50 2 MFPC
PWB
5VO_DUTY 5VO power signal 5VO power signal 5VO power – CN6 2 PCU
supply OFF
ADUMA ADU motor Motor drive signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN24 2 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
ADUMB ADU motor Motor drive signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN24 3 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
ADUMXA ADU motor Motor drive signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN24 4 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
ADUMXB ADU motor Motor drive signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN24 5 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
/APPD1 DUP2 sensor Paper transport detection – Paper CN21 19 PCU
provided
BD_HSYNC HSYNC signal of BD HSYNC signal of BD – – CN10 3 PCU
C1LUD Paper upper limit Paper upper limit detection – Upper limit CN18 15 PCU
detection_1CS detection
/C1LUM Lift motor 1CS Motor drive signal – Motor rotation CN21 9 PCU
C1PED Paper empty detection_1CS Paper empty detection Paper empty Paper CN18 11 PCU
provided
C1PFD Paper entry detection_1CS Paper transport detection Paper – CN18 7 PCU
provided
/C1PUC 1CS clutch Clutch drive signal Clutch ON – CN19 11 PCU
/C1PUS Paper feed solenoid 1CS Solenoid drive signal Solenoid ON – CN18 3 PCU
/C1SS 1CS sensor Paper transport detection 1CS not 1CS provided CN21 11 PCU
provided
C2LUM Lift motor 2CS Motor drive signal – Motor rotation CN14 6 PCU
C2PUC Paper feed clutch 2CS Clutch drive signal Clutch OFF Clutch ON CN14 8 PCU
C2PUS Paper feed solenoid 2CS Solenoid drive signal Solenoid OFF Solenoid ON CN14 5 PCU
C3LUM Lift motor 3CS (OP) Motor drive signal – Motor rotation CN14 13 PCU
C3PUC Paper feed clutch 3CS (OP) Clutch drive signal Clutch OFF Clutch ON CN14 20 PCU
C3PUS Paper feed solenoid 3CS Solenoid drive signal Solenoid OFF Solenoid ON CN14 18 PCU
(OP)
C4LUM Lift motor 4CS (OP) Motor drive signal – Motor rotation CN14 10 PCU
C4PUC Paper feed clutch 4CS (OP) Clutch drive signal Clutch OFF Clutch ON CN14 11 PCU
C4PUS Paper feed solenoid 4CS Solenoid drive signal Solenoid OFF Solenoid ON CN14 9 PCU
(OP)
CASSELA OP_DESK selector signal A OP_DESK selector signal A – – CN14 15 PCU
CASSELB OP_DESK selector signal B OP_DESK selector signal B – – CN14 17 PCU
CASSELC OP_DESK selector signal C OP_DESK selector signal C – – CN14 19 PCU
CCFT LCD backlight [CCFT cool LCD backlight ON OFF CN4 21 SCNcnt
cathode ray tube]
CL_ON Scanner lamp Radiates lights to the ON OFF CN8 3 SCNcnt
document for the CCD to
scan the document images.
CPFM_A Desk motor Motor drive signal Motor OFF Motor ON CN14 21 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
CPFM_B Desk motor Motor drive signal Motor OFF Motor ON CN14 22 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
CPFM_XA Desk motor Motor drive signal Motor OFF Motor ON CN14 23 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
CPFM_XB Desk motor Motor drive signal Motor OFF Motor ON CN14 24 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
CRM_CLK CRUM_CLK CRUM communication – – CN18 14 PCU
signal
CRM_DT CRUM input/output CRUM communication – – CN18 16 PCU
signal
CTS RIC, PCI (main) send enable RIC, PCI (main) send enable Negative Active CN12 8 MFPC
input input PWB
CTS_PCI PCI (sub) send enable input PCI (sub) send enable input Active Negative CN5 4 MFPC
PWB
CTS_PCU ICU communication ICU-PCU communication – – CN10 22 PCU
signal

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 20

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
"L" "H" No. No. name
D+ USB Device differential data USB Device differential data – – CN17 3 MFPC
+ + PWB
D+ USB Host (Rear) differential USB Host (Rear) differential – – CN18 3 MFPC
data + data + PWB
D1+ USB Host1 differential data USB Host1 differential data – – CN43 3 MFPC
+ + PWB
D1– USB Host1 differential data – USB Host1 differential data – – – CN43 2 MFPC
PWB
D3+ USB Host3 differential data USB Host3 differential data – – CN43 8 MFPC
+ + PWB
D3– USB Host3 differential data – USB Host3 differential data – – – CN43 7 MFPC
PWB
D4+ USB Host4 differential data USB Host4 differential data – – CN43 13 MFPC
+ + PWB
D4– USB Host4 differential data – USB Host4 differential data – – – CN43 12 MFPC
PWB
DHVREM/ DHV remote output Separation bias ON signal – High voltage CN13 8 PCU
output ON
DSR RIC, PCI (main) Data Set RIC, PCI (main) Data Set Negative Active CN12 6 MFPC
Ready Ready PWB
/DSR_FIN Finisher communication Finisher communication – – CN7 7 PCU
signal
DSR_PCI PCI (sub) Data Set Ready PCI (sub) Data Set Ready Active Negative CN5 2 MFPC
PWB
DSW-R(INT24) Interlock 24V detection Interlock 24V detection Front door/ Front door/ CN22 3 PCU
Side door Side door
open close
DSW_POC Paper exit cover open/close Cover open/close detection Paper exit Paper exit CN3 10 PCU
detection cover Open cover Close
DTR RIC, PCI (main) Data RIC, PCI (main) Data Negative Active CN12 4 MFPC
Terminal Ready Terminal Ready PWB
/DTR_FIN Finisher communication Finisher communication – – CN7 5 PCU
signal
DTR_PCI PCI (sub) Data Terminal PCI (sub) Data Terminal Active Negative CN5 7 MFPC
Ready Ready PWB
DVBSPWM/ DV bias PWM Developing bias PWM signal – – CN13 12 PCU
DVBSREM/ DVBS remote output Developing bias ON signal – High voltage CN13 20 PCU
output ON
DVSET Developer empty detection Developing unit installation DV unit DV unit not CN18 4 PCU
detection detection installed
D– USB Device differential data USB Device differential data – – CN17 2 MFPC
– – PWB
D– USB Host (Rear) differential USB Host (Rear) differential – – CN18 2 MFPC
data – data – PWB
FAXCS_RXD_N Option FAXdata differential Option FAXdata differential – – CN29 17 MFPC
input + input + PWB
FAXCS_RXD_P Option FAXdata differential Option FAXdata differential – – CN29 16 MFPC
input – input – PWB
FAXCS_TXD_N Option FAX data differential Option FAX data differential – – CN29 11 MFPC
output + output + PWB
FAXCS_TXD_P Option FAX data differential Option FAX data differential – – CN29 10 MFPC
output – output – PWB
FAXD_RXD_N Option FAX data differential Option FAX data differential – – CN29 13 MFPC
input – input – PWB
FAXD_RXD_P Option FAX data differential Option FAX data differential – – CN29 14 MFPC
input + input + PWB
FAXD_TXD_N Option FAX data differential Option FAX data differential – – CN29 6 MFPC
output – output – PWB
FAXD_TXD_P Option FAX data differential Option FAX data differential – – CN29 7 MFPC
output + output + PWB
FUFM_LD1 Fusing FAN1_LD signal FAN lock detection signal Normal – CN28 14 PCU
rotation state
FUFM_LD2 Fusing FAN2_LD signal FAN lock detection signal Normal – CN28 16 PCU
rotation state
FUFM_V Fusing FAN_ON (24V drive) FAN ON signal – FAN motor CN28 10 PCU
ON
FUFM_V Fusing FAN_ON (24V drive) FAN ON signal – FAN motor CN28 12 PCU
ON
FW FW signal Power frequency monitor – – CN13 11 PCU
signal
GBPWM/ Grid bias PWM Grid bias PWM signal – – CN13 18 PCU
HL_PR Fusing relay control Fusing relay ON signal Fusing relay Fusing relay CN13 19 PCU
OFF ON

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 21

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
"L" "H" No. No. name
HL_UM_out Fusing HL1_ON signal Fusing lamp ON signal Heater lamp Heater lamp CN13 13 PCU
OFF ON
HL_US_out Fusing HL2_ON signal Fusing lamp ON signal Heater lamp Heater lamp CN13 15 PCU
OFF ON
HUD_RA Humidity analog sensor Humidity detection signal – – CN19 5 PCU Analog
signal input
LAN_CNT – LAN power supply signal FAX nighttime – CN10 10 PCU
LD_DA LD strength adjustment LD strength adjustment – – CN12 4 PCU Analog
analog output analog output
MDI_0+ LAN send/receive data 0 + LAN send/receive data 0 + – – CN15 1 MFPC
PWB
MDI_0– LAN send/receive data 0 – LAN send/receive data 0 – – – CN15 2 MFPC
PWB
MDI_1+ LAN send/receive data 1 + LAN send/receive data 1 + – – CN15 3 MFPC
PWB
MDI_1– LAN send/receive data 1 – LAN send/receive data 1 – – – CN15 4 MFPC
PWB
MDI_2+ LAN send/receive data 2 + LAN send/receive data 2 + – – CN15 5 MFPC
PWB
MDI_2– LAN send/receive data 2 – LAN send/receive data 2 – – – CN15 6 MFPC
PWB
MDI_3+ LAN send/receive data 3 + LAN send/receive data 3 + – – CN15 7 MFPC
PWB
MDI_3– LAN send/receive data 3 – LAN send/receive data 3 – – – CN15 8 MFPC
PWB
MHPS Scanner home position Detects the scanner home – Home CN10 1 SCNcnt
sensor [Transmission type] position.
MHVREM/ MHV remote output Main charger ON signal – High voltage CN13 14 PCU
output ON
MIM_* Scanner motor [Stepping Scanner (reading) section – – CN7 1, 2, 3, SCNcnt
motor] 4
/MM_CLK Main motor CLK (frequency Polygon motor CLK signal – – CN19 10 PCU
dividing output)
/MM_D Main motor ON signal Polygon motor ON signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN19 6 PCU
MM_LD Main M_LD signal Polygon motor lock detection Normal – CN19 8 PCU
signal rotation state
/MPED Manual feed empty sensor Paper empty detection – Paper CN21 14 PCU
provided
/MPFS Manual feed solenoid Solenoid drive signal Solenoid ON – CN20 14 PCU
/MPLD1 Manual feed length sensor 1 Manual feed paper length – Paper CN20 9 PCU
sensor 1 provided
/MPLD2 Manual feed length sensor 2 Manual feed paper length – Paper CN20 6 PCU
sensor 2 provided
MPU_INTRO_N ICU (for LSU) ICU (for LSU)-PCU – – CN10 6 PCU
communication communication signal
MPU_PRINTS_N ICU (for LSU) ICU (for LSU)-PCU – – CN10 8 PCU
communication communication signal
MPU_SIF_CLK ICU (for LSU) ICU (for LSU)-PCU – – CN10 18 PCU
communication communication signal
MPU_SIF_RST ICU (for LSU) ICU (for LSU)-PCU – – CN10 20 PCU
communication communication signal
MPU_SIF_RXD ICU (for LSU) ICU (for LSU)-PCU – – CN10 14 PCU
communication communication signal
MPU_SIF_TXD ICU (for LSU) ICU (for LSU)-PCU – – CN10 16 PCU
communication communication signal
MPWD Manual feed paper width Manual feed paper width – – CN20 2 PCU Analog
detection detection
/MTOP1 Manual feed tray sensor 1 Manual feed tray detection 1 – Manual feed CN20 13 PCU
(reduction detection) (reduction detection) tray reduction
position
/MTOP2 Manual feed tray sensor 2 Manual feed tray detection 2 – Manual feed CN20 11 PCU
(extension detection) (extension detection) tray extension
position
nCLR_PIC ICU-PIC communication ICU-PIC communication – – CN10 17 PCU
signal
nCNCT_FAX Option FAX installation Option FAX installation Installed Not installed CN29 5 MFPC
detection detection signal PWB
nFAX_WUP Option FAX wakeup Option FAX wakeup Active Negative CN29 15 MFPC
interruption PWB
nFAXCS_CTS Option FAX send enable Option FAX send enable Active Negative CN29 26 MFPC
input input PWB
nFAXCS_RTS Option FAX send request Option FAX send request Active Negative CN29 24 MFPC
PWB

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 22

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
"L" "H" No. No. name
nFAXD_CTS Option FAX send enable Option FAX send enable Active Negative CN29 22 MFPC
input input PWB
nFAXD_RTS Option FAX send request Option FAX send request Active Negative CN29 20 MFPC
PWB
nINFO_FAX_LED FAX notice LCD signal FAX notice LCD signal LED lighting – CN6 10 PCU
nOFF_CNT 5VL power relay signal 5VL power relay signal 5VL power – CN13 9 PCU
OFF
nPOF_MFPC Power interruption detection Power interruption detection AC power – CN10 9 PCU
signal signal OFF
nPOF_SCN Power interruption detection Power interruption detection AC power – CN6 1 PCU
signal signal OFF
nPOW_LED Power LED signal Power LED signal LED lighting – CN6 8 PCU
nPWR_SW Power SW detection signal Power SW detection signal SW_ON state – CN6 5 PCU
nREQ_PIC ICU-PIC communication ICU-PIC communication – – CN10 19 PCU
signal
nREQ_PIC_INT ICU-PIC communication ICU-PIC communication – – CN10 5 PCU
signal
nRES_FAX Option FAX reset Option FAX reset Active Negative CN29 9 MFPC
PWB
nRES_PIC ICU-PIC communication ICU-PIC communication – – CN10 7 PCU
signal
nRY_CNT Main power relay signal Main power relay signal Main power – CN13 7 PCU
OFF
nSPED Document detection WU Document detection WU WU detection – CN6 3 PCU
signal signal
nWU_FAX WU signal (Start request) FAX_WU signal (Start WU – CN10 12 PCU
request) (Start request)
nWU_KEY Energy-saving key detection Energy-saving key detection Start request – CN6 6 PCU
signal signal detection
nWU_LED Reset key LED signal Reset key LED signal LED lighting – CN6 9 PCU
OCSW Light emitting UN open/close Light emitting UN open/close Close Open CN17 3 SCNcnt
detection detection
/OPCASSEL Desk motor Enable Desk motor Enable signal – Motor rotation CN14 26 PCU
Enable
OSMA Shift motor Motor drive signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN2 3 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
OSMB Shift motor Motor drive signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN2 4 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
OSMXA Shift motor Motor drive signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN2 5 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
OSMXB Shift motor Motor drive signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN2 6 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
PICVPPON For PIC program PIC program writing signal – – CN10 11 PCU
/PM_CLK Polygon motor CLK Polygon motor CLK signal – – CN12 6 PCU
(frequency dividing output)
/PM_D Polygon motor ON signal Polygon motor ON signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN12 8 PCU
PM_LD Polygon M_LD signal Polygon motor lock detection Normal – CN12 5 PCU
signal rotation state
POD1 Paper exit sensor Paper transport detection – Paper CN28 6 PCU
provided
POD2 Second paper exit discharge Paper transport detection Paper – CN3 2 PCU
provided
POD3 Right paper exit discharge Paper transport detection Paper – CN1 2 PCU
sensor provided
POFM_LD1 Paper exit cooing FAN1_LD FAN ON signal Normal – CN23 2 PCU
signal rotation state
POFM_LD2 Paper exit cooing FAN2_LD FAN ON signal Normal – CN23 5 PCU
signal rotation state
POFM_V Paper exit cooling FAN_ON FAN lock detection signal – FAN motor CN23 1 PCU
signal ON
POFM_V Paper exit cooling FAN_ON FAN lock detection signal – FAN motor CN23 4 PCU
signal ON
/POGS1a Paper exit gate solenoid Gate select Solenoid ON – CN25 2 PCU
(Normal paper
exit direction)
/POGS1b Paper exit gate solenoid Gate select Solenoid ON – CN25 3 PCU
(Second
paper exit
direction)

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 23

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
"L" "H" No. No. name
/POGS2a Right paper exit keep Gate select Solenoid ON – CN1 8 PCU
solenoid (Left paper
exit direction)
/POGS2b Right paper exit keep Gate select Solenoid ON – CN1 9 PCU
solenoid (Right paper
exit direction)
/POMA Paper exit motor Motor drive signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN26 4 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
POMA Paper exit motor Motor drive signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN26 2 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
/POMB Paper exit motor Motor drive signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN26 5 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
POMB Paper exit motor Motor drive signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN26 3 PCU
(phase
excitation ON)
POSD PaperOutputSect sensor Paper transport detection Paper – CN21 3 PCU
(Paper exit reverse section) provided
POUT2A_DET Right paper exit UN UN installation detection Wight paper Right paper CN1 10 PCU
detection exit UN exit UN not
connection connected
detection
POUT2B_DET Second paper exit UN UN installation detection Second paper Second paper CN3 6 PCU
installation detection exit UN exit UN not
connection connected
detection
/PPD1 Manual paper feed entry Paper transport detection Paper – CN21 17 PCU
sensor provided
PSFM_LD1 Power FAN1_LD signal FAN lock detection signal Normal – CN17 5 PCU
rotation state
PSFM_LD2 Power FAN2_LD signal FAN lock detection signal Normal – CN17 2 PCU
rotation state
PSFM_V Power FAN_ON signal FAN ON signal – FAN motor CN17 3 PCU
ON
PSFM_V Power FAN_ON signal FAN ON signal – FAN motor CN17 6 PCU
ON
/PSPS Process separation pawl Separation pawl drive Solenoid ON Solenoid OFF CN23 8 PCU
solenoid
PTRC1 Vertical transport clutch 3CS Clutch drive signal Clutch OFF Clutch ON CN14 16 PCU
PTRC2 Vertical transport clutch 2CS Clutch drive signal Clutch OFF Clutch ON CN14 7 PCU
PWM(PGC) For PIC program PIC program writing signal – – CN10 21 PCU
RES_FIN Finisher communication Finisher communication – – CN7 9 PCU
signal
RES_FINin Finisher installation Finisher installation FIN FIN not CN7 13 PCU
detection signal detection connection connected
detection
RES_PCU ICU communication ICU-PCU communication – – CN10 26 PCU
signal
/RRC PS clutch Clutch drive signal Clutch ON – CN19 12 PCU
RTS RIC, PCI (main) send RIC, PCI (main) send Negative Active CN12 7 MFPC
request request PWB
RTS_PCI PCI (sub) send request PCI (sub) send request Active Negative CN5 5 MFPC
PWB
RTS_PCU ICU communication ICU-PCU communication – – CN10 24 PCU
signal
RXD RIC,PCI (main) reception RIC,PCI (main) reception – – CN12 2 MFPC
data data PWB
RxD_FIN Finisher communication Finisher communication – – CN7 3 PCU
signal
RXD_PCI PCI (sub) reception data PCI (sub) reception data – – CN5 3 MFPC
PWB
RXD_PCU ICU communication ICU-PCU communication – – CN10 23 PCU
signal
RXD_PIC ICU-PIC communication ICU-PIC communication – – CN10 13 PCU
signal
SATA_RXN HDD differential data input + HDD differential data input + – – CN22 5 MFPC
PWB
SATA_RXP HDD differential data input – HDD differential data input – – – CN22 6 MFPC
PWB
SATA_TXN HDD differential data output HDD differential data output – – CN22 3 MFPC
– – PWB

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 24

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
"L" "H" No. No. name
SATA_TXP HDD differential data output HDD differential data output – – CN22 2 MFPC
+ + PWB
SHPOS Shifter HP sensor Shifter HP detection HP detection – CN28 5 PCU
SOCD SPF open/close detection SPF open/close detection Close – CN14 28 SCNcnt
SPED Document sensor Document detection Detection – CN14 27 SCNcnt
SPFM* SFP transport motor SPF transport motor drive – – CN14 3, 4, 5, SCNcnt
6, 7
SPM* SPF paper feed motor SPF paper feed motor drive – – CN14 8, 9, SCNcnt
10, 11,
12
SPPD1 SPF transport sensor 1 Detects paper pass. Detection – CN14 1 SCNcnt
SPPD2 SPF transport sensor 2 Detects paper pass. Detection – CN14 2 SCNcnt
SPPD3 SPF transport sensor 3 Detects paper pass. Detection – CN14 24 SCNcnt
SPPD4 SPF transport sensor 4 Detects paper pass. Detection – CN14 22 SCNcnt
SPRS Pressure release solenoid Controls the pressure OFF ON CN14 13 SCNcnt
release solenoid.
SPWS Document width sensor Detects document width. – – CN14 17 SCNcnt
SRRC PS clutch Controls the PS clutch. OFF ON CN14 15 SCNcnt
STMPS Stamp solenoid Controls the stamp solenoid. – Stamp CN14 14 SCNcnt
TC_DA Transfer output adjustment Transfer output adjustment – – CN13 6 PCU Analog
analog output analog output signal
TCS Toner sensor density Toner sensor density – – CN18 6 PCU Analog
detection detection
TFD1 Paper exit tray paper sensor Paper detection signal – Paper CN12 9 PCU
provided
TFD2 Second paper exit full Paper full detection – Full detection CN3 5 PCU
TFD3 Right paper exit full sensor Paper full detection Full detection – CN1 5 PCU
TH_RA Temperature analog sensor Temperature detection – – CN19 9 PCU Analog
signal input signal
TH_UM Fusing thermistor Fusing thermistor signal – – CN21 4 PCU Analog
temperature detection
(upper main)
TH_US Fusing thermistor Fusing thermistor signal – – CN21 6 PCU Analog
temperature detection
(upper sub)
THV-REM/ THV(–) remote output Transfer bias (–) ON signal – High voltage CN13 10 PCU
output ON
THVREM/ THV(+) remote output Transfer bias (+) ON signal – High voltage CN13 16 PCU
output ON
TNMA Toner motor A Motor drive signal – – CN15 1 PCU
TNMB Toner motor B Motor drive signal – – CN15 2 PCU
/TRC_FIN Finisher communication Finisher communication – – CN7 11 PCU
signal
TXD RIC, PCI (main) send data RIC, PCI (main) send data – – CN12 3 MFPC
PWB
TxD_FIN Finisher communication Finisher communication – – CN7 1 PCU
signal
TXD_PCI PCI (sub) send data PCI (sub) send data – – CN5 6 MFPC
PWB
TXD_PCU ICU communication ICU-PCU communication – – CN10 25 PCU
signal
TXD_PIC ICU-PIC communication ICU-PIC communication – – CN10 15 PCU
signal
VBUS USB Device VBUS USB Device power supply Power shutoff Power supply CN17 1 MFPC
PWB
VBUS USB Host (Rear) VBUS USB Host (Rear) power Power shutoff Power supply CN18 1 MFPC
supply PWB
VBUS1 USB Host1 VBUS USB Host1 power supply Power shutoff Power supply CN43 1 MFPC
PWB
VBUS3 USB Host3 VBUS USB Host3 power supply Power shutoff Power supply CN43 6 MFPC
PWB
VBUS4 USB Host4 VBUS USB Host4 power supply Power shutoff Power supply CN43 11 MFPC
PWB
/WH_CNT Dehumidifying heater OFF Dehumidifying heater OFF Dehumidifying Dehumidifying CN13 5 PCU
signal signal relay OFF relay ON
Y1A 151 selector output 151 selector output – – CN14 25 PCU
signal_2CS signal_2CS
Y1B 151 selector output 151 selector output – – CN14 12 PCU
signal_3CS (Op) signal_3CS (Op)
Y2 151 selector output 151 selector output – – CN14 14 PCU
signal_4CS (Op) signal_4CS (Op)

MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 25

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 [14] TOOL LIST
MX-M264U
Service Manual
Name Part code Note
Color copy test chart UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11
SIT chart UKOG-0280FCZZ/UKOG-0280FCZ1
Gray test chart UKOG-0162FCZZ
Color image density sensor calibration jig UKOG-0318FCZZ
Kynar powder UKOG-0123FCZZ For transfer belt
Grease (HANARL FL-955R) UKOG-0299FCZZ
Conduction grease (FLOIL GE-676) UKOG-0012QSZZ Other shaft
Grease (FLOIL G-313S) UKOG-0307FCZZ
Grease (JFE552) UKOG-0235FCZZ
Stearic acid powder UKOG-0312FCZZ OPC drum
Grease (FLOIL GP-501MR) UKOG-0013QSZZ RSPF paper feed roller shaft
Grease (MOLYKOTE X5-6020) UKOG-0158FCZZ
Grease (MOLYKOTE BR-2 Plus) UKOG-0097FCZZ

MX-M264U TOOL LIST 14 – 1

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine
 LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.

Example:

<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>

Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu

a
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm Sn-In-Ag-Bi i
Sn-Cu-Ni n
Sn-Ag-Sb s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag

(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.

(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT ©
solder is about 220°C, which
XXXX is about 40°C higher
BYSHARP than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
CORPORATION
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

 CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.

CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.

“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine

 COPYRIGHT © 2012 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Trademark acknowledgements
• Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7,
Windows® Server 2003, Windows® Server 2008 and Internet Explorer®
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
and other countries.
• PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Laser Writer, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• IBM, PC/AT, and Power PC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
• Acrobat® Reader Copyright® 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.

SHARP CORPORATION
Document Solutions Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2012 March Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution

Downloaded from [Link] manuals search engine